O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

2 0 1 7

20

17

12

4 S

PID

ER

124 SPIDERFourth Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA GroupMarketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.

17BAFIA-126-AD

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCAUS LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCACanada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOLDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes ofaccidents.Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with bloodalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you aredrinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes areslower, and your judgment is impaired when youhave been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation offeatures and equipment that are either standard or op-tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include adescription of features and equipment that are no longeravailable or were not ordered on this vehicle. Pleasedisregard any features and equipment described in thismanual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in designand specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-ments to its products without imposing any obligationupon itself to install them on products previously manu-factured.

Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC

DEAR CUSTOMERDear Customer,We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing a Fiat 124 Spider.We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way.Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your vehicle and how to achieve the bestperformance from the technical features of your vehicle.You are advised to take the time to read these publications carefully before taking to the road for the first time, to becomefamiliar with the controls and above all with those concerning brakes, steering and transmission; at the same time, you canunderstand the vehicle behavior on different road surfaces.This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, careand maintenance of your vehicle over time.After reading it, you are advised to keep the Owner’s Manual inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure itremains in the vehicle should it be sold.In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that FCA offers to its customers, and the detailof the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new vehicle and the service provided by thepeople at FCA.Enjoy reading. Happy motoring!Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all models of the vehicle; please consider only the information relevant to your vehicle’strim level, engine and model. All data contained in this publication are purely indicative. FCA can modify the vehicle modeldescribed in this publication at any time, for technical or commercial purposes. For further information, contact your authorizeddealer.

Read This CarefullyREFUELING

Only refuel with unleaded gasoline with a recommended rating of 91 octane. A rating less than 87 octane is not acceptable. Do not usegasoline containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and handling issues, as well as damage fundamentalcomponents of the fuel supply system.

STARTING THE ENGINE

If equipped with a manual transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged; place the gear selector in NEUTRAL, fully depress theclutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed.If equipped with an automatic transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged and that the gear selector is in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N), depress the brake pedal, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or otherflammable material: fire hazard.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The vehicle is equipped with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect theenvironment.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

Contact your authorized dealer if you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery) after buying thevehicle. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the vehicle is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmentalfriendliness and low running costs are unchanged over time.

How To Use This ManualESSENTIAL INFORMATIONEach time directions (left/right or forward/backwards) are listed, they are determined by facing forward from the rear of thevehicle or as from the point of view of being seated inside the car. Special cases not complying with this rule will be properlyspecified in the text.The figures in the Owner’s Manual are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do notcorrespond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the Owner’s Manual has been conceived considering vehicleswith steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position ofsome controls or elements is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure.To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner’s Manual.Chapters can be rapidly identified by graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A key showing the order of the chapter andthe corresponding tab symbols appears on another page.

SYMBOLSWhile reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.There are also CAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, whichcould cause accidents or injuries.Therefore, all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:

Personal Safety

Vehicle Safety

Vehicle Modifications / Alterations

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents, in which the occupantscould be fatally injured.

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER

If after buying the vehicle, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio,satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that burden the electrical supply, contact your authorized dealer, whosepersonnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required , or whether it needs to beintegrated with a more powerful battery.Note: Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out ofposition and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

INSTALLING ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC DEVICES

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation issubject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.

RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONESRadio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless aseparate aerial is mounted externally.Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use ofEC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobilephone Manufacturer.The use of these devices inside the vehicle (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. Thiscould compromise the vehicle safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performanceof the Advanced Keyless Entry System may occur.CELL PHONE WARNINGNote: Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles in your country.Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driverwhile the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use ofthese devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is unable to use thedevice, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use ahands-free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical devices whilethe vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving.

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

01020304-000-100

Front View

1 — Engine Compartment 3 — Doors 5 — Exterior Lights2 — Windshield Wiper Blades 4 — Wheels And Tires

9

REAR VIEW

Rear View

1 — Outside Mirrors 3 — Antenna 5 — Exterior Lights2 — Convertible Top (Soft Top) 4 — Trunk Lid 6 — Fuel Door

01020304-001-100

Rear View

10

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Panel

1 — Turn Signal/High Beams Lever 4 — Hazard Warning Lights Button 7 — Driver Air Bag2 — Instrument Cluster 5 — Passenger Air Bag 8 — Control Buttons3 — Windshield Wiper And Washers 6 — Ignition Switch

02010200-129-555

Instrument Panel

11

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1 — Steering Wheel 4 — Climate Control System 7 — Radio Control2 — Rearview Mirror 5 — Transmission Gear Selector 8 — Seats3 — Radio Systems 6 — Parking Brake

01020304-002-100

Interior Overview

12

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . .20ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRYSYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .21VEHICLE SECURITY ALARMSYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .24DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33NON-ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . .35MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . .38WINDSHIELD WIPERS / WASHER . .42CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .45POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . .56HOMELINK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .58INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . .60TRUNK LID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66TRUNK EMERGENCY RELEASE . . .68HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68CONVERTIBLE TOP (SOFT TOP) . .70ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . .74ENVIRONMENT PROTECTIONSYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

13

KEYSKey Fob

A code number is stamped on the plateattached to the key set; detach thisplate and store it in a safe place (not inthe vehicle) for use if you need to makea replacement Emergency Key.Also, write down the code number andkeep it in a separate safe andconvenient place, but not in the vehicle.If your key fob is lost, contact anauthorized dealer and have your codenumber ready.Note: Your key fob configuration mayvary with different feature button iconsas well as the total number of featurebuttons depending on your vehicleoptions/features. Key fob example asshown.

To use the Emergency Key, push themechanical latch on the back side ofthe key fob and pull the emergency keyout that's housed inside the key fob.

Note:

Always keep a spare key fob incase one is lost. If a key fob is lost, seean authorized dealer as soon aspossible.

The driver must carry the key fob toensure the Keyless Entry Systemfunctions properly.

Warning!

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift theautomatic transmission into PARK or themanual transmission into FIRST gear orREVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn theengine OFF, remove the key fob from thevehicle and lock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible tochildren. A child could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move thevehicle.

Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heatbuild-up may cause serious injury or death.

04010177-361-002

Key Fob

1 — Emergency Key2 — Key Fob3 — Key Code Number Plate

14

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Key Fob Functions

With A Vehicle Security AlarmSystemThe hazard warning lights flash whenthe vehicle security alarm system isarmed or disarmed.With Advanced Keyless FunctionA beep can be heard for confirmationwhen the doors, trunk lid, and the fuelfiller door are locked/unlocked using thekey fob. The beep indication volumecan be adjusted or turned off.Use the following procedure to changethe beep setting:

1. Verify or place the ignition in the OFFposition and close both of the doorsand the trunk lid.

2. Open the driver's door.

3. Within 30 seconds of opening thedriver's door, push and hold the lockbutton on the key fob for five secondsor longer.

Note:

Both of the doors, the trunk lid, andfuel filler door will lock and the beepsound activates at the currently setvolume (if the beep is currently set tonot activate, it will not activate).

The setting changes each time thelock button on the key fob is pushedand the beep sound activates at theset volume (if the beep sound hasbeen set to not activate, it will notactivate).

Setting change is completed by doingany one of the following:

Placing the ignition to ACC or ONposition.

Closing the driver's door.

Opening the trunk lid.

Not operating the key fob for tenseconds.

Pushing any button, except the lockbutton on the key fob.

Pushing a request switch on theexterior door handle.

Note: Refer to “Lock/Unlock WithAdvanced Keyless Entry Function — IfEquipped” in “Doors” for furtherinformation.The operation indicator light flasheswhen the buttons are pushed.

Key Fob Buttons

Lock ButtonTo lock the doors, trunk lid, and the fuelfiller door, push the lock button and thehazard warning lights will flash onceand a beep will be heard.

Unlock ButtonTo unlock the doors and the trunk lid,push the unlock button and the hazardwarning lights will flash twice.The system can be set to unlock bothdoors. Use the following procedure tochange the setting:

1. Place the ignition in the OFF positionand close both of the doors and thetrunk lid.

2. Open the driver's door.

3. Within 30 seconds of opening thedriver's door, push and hold the unlockbutton on the key fob for five secondsor longer.

Note: The sound of the doorslocking/unlocking can be heard. Afterthis, the system changes the settingeach time the unlock button is pushed(the sound of the doors locking/unlocking can be heard).

The setting change can becompleted by doing any one of thefollowing:

1. Placing the ignition in the ACC orON position.

2. Closing the driver’s door.

3. Opening the trunk lid.

4. Not operating the key fob for tenseconds.

15

5. Pushing any button except theunlock button on the key fob.

6. Pushing a request switch on theexterior door handle.Trunk ButtonTo open the trunk lid, push and hold thetrunk button until the trunk lid opens.Panic ButtonTo turn the Panic Alarm feature on oroff, push and hold the panic button onthe key fob for at least one second andrelease. When the Panic Alarm is on,the headlights will turn on, the parklights will flash, the horn will pulse onand off, and the turn signal lights willflash.Note: The panic button will workwhether any door or the trunk lid isopen or closed.Turning On The AlarmPushing the panic button for onesecond or more will trigger the alarm forabout two minutes and thirty seconds,and the following will occur:

The horn sounds intermittently.

The hazard warning lights flash.Turning Off The AlarmThe alarm will stop by pushing anybutton on the key fob.

Operational Range

The system operates only when thedriver is in the vehicle or withinoperational range while the key fob isbeing carried or on your person.Starting The EngineStarting the engine may be possibleeven if the key fob is outside of thevehicle and extremely close to a doorand window, however, always start theengine from the driver's seat.If the vehicle is started and the key fobis not in the vehicle, the vehicle will notrestart after it is shut off and the ignitionis placed in the OFF position.The trunk is out of the assuredoperational range, however, if the keyfob is operable the engine will start.Key Fob Antenna Location

Note: The engine may not start if thekey fob is placed in or around thefollowing areas:

Around The Instrument Panel

In The Storage Compartments

Key Suspend Function

If a key fob is left in the vehicle, thefunctions of the key fob left in thevehicle are temporarily suspended toprevent unlawful use of the vehicle.To restore the functions, push theunlock button on the functions-suspended key fob left in the vehicle.

Key Fob BatteryReplacement

If the buttons on the key fob areinoperable and the indicator light doesnot flash, the battery power level maybe low or discharged.Replace with a new battery(CR2025 type) before the key fobbecomes unusable.The following conditions indicate thatthe battery power is low:

Indicator light (green) flashes inthe instrument cluster for about30 seconds after the engine is placed inthe OFF position.

The system does not operate andthe operation indicator light on the keyfob does not flash when the buttons arepushed.

04010202-12R-001

Key Fob Antenna Location

1 — Interior Antenna2 — Operational Range

16

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

The system's operational range isreduced.Note: Replacing the battery at anauthorized dealer is recommended toprevent damage to the key fob. Ifreplacing the battery by yourself, followthe instruction below.Replacing The Key Fob BatteryProceed as follows:

1. Push the mechanical release buttonand remove the emergency key.

1 — Key Fob Case With MechanicalRelease Button2 — Emergency Key

2. Insert a coin, a flat blade screwdriver, or the tip of your emergency keyinto the now exposed slot and carefullypry in the direction of the arrows toopen the cover (3) slightly.

3. Insert a coin, a flat blade screwdriver, or the tip of your emergency keyinto the side gap and carefully pry in thedirection of the arrow to open the cover(4).

4. Separate the key fob case, thenremove the battery.

3 — Key Fob Case5 — Key Fob Battery

5. Insert a new battery with the positivepole facing up. Then, cover the batterywith the battery cap.

6. Close the cover and reinsert theEmergency Key.

Note: Be careful not to allow therubber ring shown in call-out (6) to be

07031301-361-002

Emergency Key Removed

07031301-362-002

3 — Pry Case Left Side

07031301-363-002

4 — Pry Case Right Side

07031301-364-003

Remove Back Cover For BatteryReplacement

07031301-367-001

6 — Install New Battery

17

scratched or damaged. If the rubberring comes out, reinstall it beforeinserting a new battery.

Engine Start FunctionWhen Key Fob Battery IsDischarged

When starting the engine by holding thekey fob over the keyless ignitionSTART/STOP button due to adischarged key fob battery or amalfunctioning key fob, be careful notto allow the following, otherwise thesignal from the key fob will not bereceived correctly and the engine maynot start:

Metal parts of other key fobs ormetal objects touch the key fob.

Spare key fobs or key fobs for othervehicles equipped with an immobilizersystem touch or come near the key.

Devices for electronic purchases, orsecurity passage touch or come nearthe key fob.

If the engine cannot be started due to adischarged key fob battery, the enginecan be started using the followingprocedure:

Continue to depress the brake pedalfirmly until the engine has completelystarted.

Manual Transmission: continue todepress the clutch pedal firmly until theengine has completely started.

Verify that the keyless ignition startindication light (green) flashes.

Touch the keyless ignitionSTART/STOP button using thebackside of the key fob while thekeyless ignition start indicator light(green) flashes.

Verify that the keyless ignition startindicator light (green) turns on.

Push the keyless ignitionSTART/STOP button to start theengine.

When touching the keyless ignitionSTART/STOP button using thebackside of the key fob as shown in theillustration, touch the keyless ignitionSTART/STOP button with the lockswitch side of the key fob facing up.

05010201-KY1-001

No Keys Touching The Key Fob

05010201-KY2-001

No Key Fob Touching The Key Fob

05010201-L12-001

Discharged Key Fob Battery StartProcedure

18

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

The engine cannot be started unlessthe clutch pedal is fully depressed(manual transmission) or the brakepedal is fully depressed (automatictransmission).If there is a malfunction with the keylessignition START/STOP button function,the keyless ignition start indicator light(amber) flashes. In this case, the enginemay start, however contact anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.If the keyless ignition start indicator light(green) does not illuminate, perform theoperation from the beginning again. If itdoes not illuminate contact anauthorized dealer.To change the ignition position withoutstarting the engine, perform the followingoperations after the keyless ignition startindicator light (green) turns on:

Release the clutch pedal (manualtransmission) or brake pedal (automatictransmission).

Push the keyless ignitionSTART/STOP button to change theignition position. The ignition cycles inthe order of ACC, ON, and OFF eachtime the keyless ignition START/STOPbutton is pushed. To change theignition position again, perform theoperation from the beginning.Emergency Operation For StartingThe EngineIf the KEY warning light (red) illuminates,or the keyless ignition start indicator

light (amber) flashes, this could indicatethat the engine may not start using theusual starting method. Contact anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.If this occurs, the engine can beforce-started. push and hold thekeyless ignition START/STOP buttonuntil the engine starts.Other procedures necessary for startingthe engine such as having the key fobin the vehicle, and depressing theclutch pedal (manual transmission) orthe brake pedal (automatictransmission) are required.

Caution!

If your vehicle battery becomes low ordead, your key fob will become locked inthe ignition.

Do not attempt to remove the key fobwhile in this condition, damage could occurto the key fob or ignition module. Onlyremove the emergency key for locking andunlocking the doors.

Leave the key fob in the ignition andeither:

Jump Start the vehicle.

Charge the battery.

Contact your authorized dealer forassistance on how to remove the key fobusing the manual override method.

Key Fob Cautions

Because the key fob uses low-intensityradio waves, it may not functioncorrectly under the following conditions:

The key fob is carried withcommunication devices such as cellularphones.

The key fob contacts or is coveredby a metal object.

The key fob is near electronicdevices such as personal computers.

Non-FCA genuine electronicequipment is installed in the vehicle.

There is equipment which dischargesradio waves near the vehicle.

The key fob may consume batterypower excessively if it receiveshigh-intensity radio waves. Do not placethe key fob near electronic devicessuch as televisions or personalcomputers.To avoid damage to the key fob, DONOT:

Drop the key fob.

Get the key fob wet.

Disassemble the key fob unlessreplacing battery.

Expose the key fob to hightemperatures on places such as theinstrument panel or enginecompartment, under direct sunlight.

19

Expose the key fob to any kind ofmagnetic field.

Place heavy objects on the key fob.

Put the key fob in an ultrasoniccleaner.

Put any magnetized objects close tothe key fob.

General Information

The following regulatory statementapplies to all Radio Frequency (RF)devices equipped in this vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.Note: Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment.

IGNITION SWITCHPush Button StartPositions

The system operates only when the keyfob is within operational range.Each time the keyless ignitionSTART/STOP button is pushed, theignition cycles in the order of OFF, ACC,and ON. Pushing the START/STOPbutton again from ON position cyclesthe ignition to the OFF position.

Note:

The engine starts by pushing thekeyless ignition START/STOP buttonwhile depressing the clutch pedal(manual transmission) or the brakepedal (automatic transmission). Tochange the ignition position, push thekeyless ignition START/STOP buttonwithout depressing the clutch or brakepedal.

Do not leave the ignition in the ONposition while the engine is notrunning, doing so could result in thebattery being discharged. If the ignitionis left in ACC position (for automatictransmission, the gear selector is in theP position, and the ignition is in ACC),the ignition cycles to the OFF positionautomatically after about 25 minutes.

OFFThe power supply to electrical devicesturns off and the keyless ignition startindicator light (amber) also turns off. Inthe OFF position, the steering wheel islocked.ACC (Accessory)Some electrical accessories will operateand the indicator light (amber)illuminates. In the ACC position, thesteering wheel is unlocked.The Keyless Entry System does notfunction while the keyless ignition hasbeen placed in the ACC position, andthe doors will not lock/unlock even ifthey have been locked manually.ONThis is the normal running position afterthe engine is started.Note: The indicator light (amber) turnsoff (the indicator light amber illuminateswhen the ignition has been placed inthe ON position and the engine is notrunning).

05010101-L12-001

Keyless START/STOP IgnitionButton

20

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Some indicator lights/warning lightsshould be inspected before the engineis started.When the keyless ignition has beenplaced in the ON position, the sound ofthe fuel pump motor operating near thefuel tank can be heard. This does notindicate an abnormality.

Warning!

Never use the PARK position as asubstitute for the parking brake. Alwaysapply the parking brake fully when exitingthe vehicle to guard against vehiclemovement and possible injury or damage.

When leaving the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the transmission gearselector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, (or in a location accessible tochildren), and do not leave the ignition inthe ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, ormove the vehicle.

Be sure the parking brake is fullydisengaged before driving; failure to do socan lead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the parking brakewhen leaving your vehicle, or it may rolland cause damage or injury. Also becertain to leave the transmission in PARK.Failure to do so may allow the vehicle toroll and cause damage or injury.

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake engaged, or repeated use of theparking brake to slow the vehicle maycause serious damage to the brakesystem.

ADVANCEDKEYLESS ENTRYSYSTEM — IFEQUIPPEDAdvanced Keyless EntrySystem

The Advanced Keyless Entry System isan enhancement that allows you tolock/unlock the doors, trunk lid, fuelfiller door, and opens the trunk lid withthe slow and careful push of a button.The Advanced Keyless Entry Systemallows the driver to START/STOP theignition with the push of a button aslong as the key fob is in the passengercompartment.If equipped, the vehicle security alarmsystem may be armed/disarmed withthe push of the lock/unlock buttonlocated on the key fob.System Malfunctions/WarningsSystem malfunctions or warnings areindicated by the following warning lightsor beeps (refer to “Getting To KnowYour Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation) :

Warning Light (Red)

Ignition Not Turned OFF WarningBeep

Key Fob Removed From VehicleWarning Beep

Request Switch Inoperable WarningBeep

21

Key Fob Left-In-Trunk Warning Beep

Key Fob Left-In-Vehicle WarningBeepIf you have a problem with the key fob,or the key fob is lost or stolen, contactan authorized dealer as soon aspossible for a replacement and to makethe lost or stolen key fob inoperative.

Note: Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could voidthe user's authority to operate theequipment.

The Advanced Keyless EntrySystem operational range may varydue to local weather conditions.

The Advanced Keyless EntrySystem is fully operational (door/trunklid/fuel filler door lock/unlock) when theignition is placed in the OFF position.The Advanced Keyless Entry Systemdoes not operate if the ignition isplaced to any position other than theOFF position.

If the key fob does not operatewhen pushing a button, the operationalrange becomes too small, or thewarning light does not illuminate orflash, the battery may be weak ordischarged. To install a new battery,refer to “Key Fob BatteryReplacement.”

Battery life is about one year.Replace the battery with a new one ifthe Warning light (green) flashes inthe instrument cluster. Replacing thebattery about once a year isrecommended because the

Warning light may not illuminate orflash if the battery is low or discharged.

Additional key fobs may beobtained at an authorized dealer. Up tosix key fobs may be used with theAdvanced Keyless Entry System pervehicle. Bring all key fobs to anauthorized dealer when additional keysare required.

The Advanced Keyless Entry functionallows you to lock/unlock the door,trunk lid, and fuel filler door, or open thetrunk lid while carrying the key fob.

Warning!

Radio waves from the key fob may affectmedical devices such as pacemakers:before using the key fob near people whouse medical devices, ask the medicaldevice manufacturer or your physician ifradio waves from the key fob will affect thedevice.

Note: The Advanced Keyless EntrySystem functions can be deactivated toprevent any possible adverse effect ona user wearing a pacemaker or othermedical device. If the system is

deactivated, you will be unable to startthe engine by carrying the key fob.Contact an authorized dealer fordetails. If the Advanced Keyless EntrySystem has been deactivated, you canstart the engine by following theprocedure indicated when the key fobbattery becomes discharged.Operational RangeThe system operates only when thedriver is in the vehicle or withinoperational range while the key fob isbeing carried.

Note: When the battery power is low,or in places where there arehigh-intensity radio waves or noise, theoperational range may becomenarrower or the system may notoperate.

04010202-12S-002

Advanced Keyless Entry Sensors

1 — Interior Antenna2 — Operational Range

22

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Locking/Unlocking The Doors AndThe Trunk Lid

Note: The system may not operate ifyou are too close to the windows ordoor handles.

Opening The Trunk Lid

General Information

The following regulatory statementapplies to all Radio Frequency (RF)devices equipped in this vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.Note: Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment.

04020201-12A-003

Request Switch Door Functions

1 — Exterior Antenna2 — Operational Range3 — Distance (31 inches)

04020202-12A-003

Electronic Trunk Release

1 — Exterior Antenna2 — Operational Range3 — Distance (31 inches)

23

VEHICLE SECURITYALARM SYSTEM — IFEQUIPPEDModifications AndAdd-On Equipment

FCA cannot guarantee the immobilizerand the vehicle security alarm systemoperation if the system has beenmodified or if any add-on equipmenthas been installed.Note: To avoid damage to the vehicle,do not modify the system or install anyadd-on equipment to the immobilizerand the vehicle security alarm systemor the vehicle.

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system allows theengine to start only with a key fob thesystem recognizes.If someone attempts to start the enginewith an unrecognized key fob, theengine will not start, thereby helping toprevent unlawful vehicle use.If you have a problem with theimmobilizer system or the key fob,contact an authorized dealer.To avoid damage to the key fob, do not:

Drop the key fob.

Get the key fob wet.

Expose the key fob to any kind ofmagnetic field.

Expose the key fob to hightemperatures on places such as theinstrument panel, hood, or under directsunlight.

Note:

Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could voidthe user's authority to operate theequipment.

If the engine does not start with thecorrect key fob, and the warninglight keeps illuminating or flashing, thesystem may have a malfunction.Contact an authorized dealer.

The key fobs carry a uniqueelectronic code. For this reason, and toassure your safety, obtaining areplacement key fob can only be donethrough your authorized dealer, and willrequire some waiting time.

Always keep a spare key fob incase one is lost. If a key fob is lost,contact an authorized dealer as soonas possible.

If you lose a key fob, an authorizeddealer will reset the electronic codes ofyour remaining key fobs andimmobilizer system. Bring all theremaining key fobs to an authorizeddealer to reset. Starting the vehiclewith a key fob that has not been resetis not possible.

OperationThe engine may not start and

warning light may illuminate or flashif the key fob is placed in an area whereit is difficult for the system to detect thesignal, such as on the instrument panel.Move the key fob to a location withinthe signal range, cycle the ignition off,and then restart the engine.

Note: Signals from a TV, radio station,transceiver, or mobile telephone couldinterfere with your immobilizer system. Ifyou are using the proper key fob andthe engine fails to start, check the

warning light.ArmingThe system is armed when the ignitionis cycled from the ON to OFF position.The warning light in the instrumentcluster flashes every two seconds untilthe system is disarmed.DisarmingThe system is disarmed when theignition is placed in the ON position withthe correct programmed key fob. The

warning light illuminates for aboutthree seconds and then turns off. If theengine does not start with the correctkey fob, and the warning lightremains illuminated or flashing, try thefollowing:

Make sure the key fob is within theoperational range for signaltransmission.

24

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Cycle the ignition off, and then restartthe engine. If the engine does not startafter three or more tries, contact anauthorized dealer.

Note:

If the warning light flashescontinuously while you are driving, donot turn the engine OFF. Contact anauthorized dealer and have it checked.If the engine is shut off while the

warning light is flashing, you willnot be able to restart it.

Because the electronic codes arereset when the immobilizer system isrepaired, the keys are needed. Makesure to bring all the key fobs to anauthorized dealer so that they can beprogrammed.

Vehicle Security AlarmSystem — If Equipped

If the vehicle security alarm systemdetects an inappropriate entry into thevehicle or the intrusion sensor detectsmovement in the vehicle which couldresult in the vehicle or its contentsbeing stolen, the alarm alerts thesurrounding area of an abnormality bysounding the siren/horn and flashingthe hazard warning lights.The system will not function unless it'sproperly armed. So when you leave thevehicle, follow the arming procedurecorrectly.

Siren/Horn Triggering ConditionsThe siren/horn sounds intermittentlyand the hazard warning lights flash forabout 30 seconds when the system istriggered by any one of the following:

Unlocking a door with an insidedoor-lock knob.

Forcing open a door, the enginecompartment or the trunk lid.

Opening the hood by operating thehood release handle.

Placing the ignition in the ON positionwithout starting the engine.

With the intrusion sensor: theintrusion sensor detects a movement inthe vehicle.The system will be triggered again (upto ten times) if one of the aboveconditions remains.The trunk lid will not open when thevehicle security alarm system isactivated.If the battery becomes drained whilethe vehicle security alarm system isarmed, the siren will activate and thehazard warning lights will flash duringthe battery charging or replacementprocess.How To Arm The System

Close the windows and theconvertible top securely.

Place the ignition in the OFF position.

Make sure the engine compartment,convertible top, the doors, and thetrunk lid are closed.

Push the lock button on the key fobor lock the driver's door from theoutside with the emergency key. Thehazard warning lights will flash once.With The Advanced Keyless Entryfunction: push a request switch. The

warning light in the instrumentpanel flashes twice per second for20 seconds. After 20 seconds thesystem is fully armed.The vehicle security alarm system canalso be armed by activating the autore-lock function with all the doors, thetrunk lid and the engine compartmentclosed.The system will disarm if one of thefollowing operations takes place within20 seconds after pushing the lockbutton: To rearm the system, performthe arming procedure again.

1. Unlocking any door.

2. Opening any door.

3. Opening the engine compartment.

4. Placing the ignition in the ONposition.The hazard warning lights will flashonce to indicate that the vehiclesecurity alarm system is armed whenthe doors are locked by pushing thelock button on the key fob, or using theemergency key. 25

Note:

If any door or trunk lid remainsclosed for 30 seconds, the doors, andtrunk lid automatically re-lock and thevehicle security alarm system armseven if a window open or theconvertible top is left down.

To reactivate the intrusion sensor,turn off the armed vehicle securityalarm system and then rearm it.

The intrusion sensor is operationalwhen the vehicle security alarm systemis armed. To cancel the intrusionsensor, push the intrusion sensorcancel button each time the vehiclesecurity alarm system is armed.

To Turn Off An Armed SystemAn armed system can be turned offusing any one of the following methods:

Pushing the unlock button on the keyfob.

Starting the engine with the keylessignition START/STOP button.

With The Advanced Keyless Entryfunction: pushing a request switch onthe exterior door handles.Note: When the doors are unlocked bypushing the unlock button on the keyfob while the vehicle security alarmsystem is turned off, the hazardwarning lights will flash twice to indicatethat the system is turned off.To Stop The AlarmA triggered alarm can be turned offusing any one of the following methods:

Pushing the unlock button on the keyfob

Starting the engine with the keylessignition START/STOP button

With The Advanced Keyless Entryfunction: pushing a request switch onthe exterior door handles or the electrictrunk release while the key fob is beingcarried.The hazard warning lights will flashtwice.

DOORSLock/Unlock WithEmergency Key

Both doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lockautomatically when the driver's door islocked using the emergency key.

Lock With Emergency Key — Insertkey into driver’s door and turn to the left(toward front of car).

Unlock With Emergency Key —Insert key into driver’s door and turn tothe right (toward back of car).They both unlock when the driver'sdoor is unlocked using the emergencykey.Turn the emergency key toward thefront to lock, toward the back to unlock.

Caution!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation forthieves. Always remove key fob from thevehicle and lock all doors when leaving thevehicle unattended.

26

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Manual Lock/UnlockKnob

Operation From InsideTo lock any door from the inside, pushthe door-lock knob. To unlock, pull itoutward. This does not operate theother door locks.

Note: The red indication can be seenwhen the door-lock knob is unlocked.Operation From OutsideTo lock the passenger door with thedoor-lock knob from the outside, pushthe door-lock knob to the lock positionand close the door (holding the doorhandle in the open position is notrequired).

Note: When locking the door this way,be careful not to leave the key fobinside the vehicle. The driver's doorlock knob cannot be used while thedriver's door is open.

Warning!

For personal security and safety in theevent of a collision, lock the vehicle doorsbefore you drive as well as when you parkand leave the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob from the vehicle and lock yourvehicle. If equipped with Advanced KeylessEntry, always make sure the keyless ignitionis in “OFF” position, remove the key fob fromthe vehicle and lock the vehicle.Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment maycause severe personal injuries or death.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible tochildren, and do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with Advanced KeylessEntry in the ACC or ON/RUN positions. Achild could operate power windows, othercontrols, or move the vehicle.

Central Lock/Unlock

Both doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lockautomatically when the lock rockerswitch is pushed with both doorsclosed.

Note:

The doors, trunk lid, and the fuelfiller door cannot be locked while anyother door is open.

The key fob may not be able to bedetected by the vehicle keyless-gosystem if it is located next to a mobilephone, laptop or other electronicdevice; these devices may block thekey fob’s wireless signal and preventthe keyless-go system from startingthe vehicle.

Both unlock when the unlock rockerswitch is pushed.Note: The doors, trunk lid, and the fuelfiller door cannot be locked while anyother door is open.

04030107-L21-001AB

Inside Door-Lock Knob

1 — Door Knob Lock Position (RedIndicator Not Seen When Locked)2 — Door Knob Unlock Position (RedIndicator Seen When Unlocked)

04030105-12D-002

Central/Power Door Lock Switch

27

Double Locking System— If Equipped

The double locking system is designedto prevent someone who has brokeninto your vehicle from opening the doorfrom the inside. If you have anyproblems with the double lockingsystem, contact an authorized dealer.System ActivationProceed as follows:

1. Close both the windows and theconvertible top.

2. Place the ignition in the OFF positionand take the key fob with you.

3. Close both doors and trunk lid.

4. Insert the emergency key in thedriver's door, turn the emergency key tothe lock position (counterclockwise/left), and return it to thecenter position. Then turn it to the lockposition (counter clockwise/left) againwithin three seconds.

5. The indicator light illuminates forabout three seconds to indicate that thesystem has been activated.

The system can be activated bypushing the lock button on the key fobtwice within three seconds.With The Advanced KeylessFunction: the system can be activatedby pushing the request switch on theexterior door handle twice within threeseconds.Note: The system cannot be activatedwhen any door is open.System DeactivationUnlock the driver's door or place theignition in the ON position. If the powersupply is interrupted (fuse blows or thebattery is disconnected), the systemcan only be deactivated by unlocking adoor with the emergency key.

Lock/Unlock WithAdvanced Keyless EntryFunction — If Equipped

Both doors, trunk lid, and the fuel fillerdoor can be locked/unlocked bypushing the request switch on theexterior door handle while the key fob isbeing carried.

To LockTo lock the doors, trunk lid, and the fuelfiller door, push the request switch onthe exterior door handle and the hazardwarning lights will flash once.A beep sound will be heard once.

04030102-12A-001

Emergency Key Lock Procedure

04000098-121-555

Request Switch On Exterior DoorHandle

28

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

To UnlockDriver's door request switch located onthe exterior door handle.To unlock the doors, trunk lid, and thefuel filler door, push the request switchon the exterior door handle and thehazard warning lights will flash twice.To unlock both doors and the fuel fillerdoor, push the request switch on theexterior door handle again within threeseconds and two more beep soundswill be heard.Front Passenger Door RequestSwitch:To unlock both doors and the fuel fillerdoor, push the request switch on theexterior door handle. A beep sound willbe heard twice and the hazard warninglights will flash twice.

Note:

Confirm that both doors, and thefuel filler door are securely locked.

For the trunk lid, move it withoutpushing the electric trunk lid opener toverify that the trunk lid has not beenleft open.

Both doors and the fuel filler doorcannot be locked when any door isopen.

It may require a few seconds for thedoors to unlock after the requestswitch on the exterior door handle ispushed.

The key fob may not be able to bedetected by the vehicle keyless-gosystem if it is located next to a mobilephone, laptop or other electronicdevice; these devices may block thekey fob’s wireless signal and preventthe keyless-go system from startingthe vehicle.

A beep sound is heard for confirmationwhen the doors, and fuel filler door arelocked/unlocked using the requestswitch on the exterior door handle. Ifyou prefer, the beep sound can beturned off.The volume of the beep sound can alsobe changed. Use the followingprocedure to change the setting:

1. Place the ignition in the OFF positionand close both of the doors and thetrunk lid.

2. Open the driver's door.

3. Within 30 seconds of opening thedriver's door, push and hold the lockbutton on the key fob for five secondsor longer. The doors, and fuel filler doorwill lock, an audible beep will activate atthe currently set volume (if the beepsound is currently set to not activate, itwill not activate). The setting changeseach time the lock button on the keyfob is pushed and the beep soundactivates at the set volume (if the beepsound has been set to not activate, itwill not activate).

4. The setting change is completed bydoing any one of the following:

Place the ignition in the ACC or ONposition.

Closing the driver's door.

Opening the trunk lid.

Not operating the key fob for tenseconds.

Pushing any button except the lockbutton on the key fob.

Pushing a request switch on theexterior door handle.

29

With Vehicle Security Alarm SystemThe hazard warning lights flash whenthe vehicle security alarm system isarmed or disarmed (refer to “VehicleSecurity Alarm System” found in“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” forfurther information).The setting can be changed so that thedoors and the fuel filler door are lockedautomatically without pushing therequest switch on the exterior doorhandle, (refer to “PersonalizationFeatures” section in “Getting To KnowYour Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation).Auto-Lock FunctionA beep sound is heard when bothdoors are closed while the key is beingcarried. Both doors, the trunk lid, andfuel door are locked automatically afterabout three seconds when theAdvanced Keyless Entry key fob is outof the operational range.The hazard warning lights will flashonce (even if the driver is in theoperational range, both doors, trunk lid,and the fuel filler door are lockedautomatically after about 30 seconds).

If you are out of the operational rangebefore the doors and the trunk lid arecompletely closed or another key fob isleft in the vehicle, the auto-lock functionwill not work.Always make sure that both doors andthe trunk lid are closed and lockedbefore leaving the vehicle. Theauto-lock function does not close thepower windows.Auto Re-Lock FunctionAfter unlocking with the request switchon the exterior door handle, both doors,and the fuel filler door will automaticallylock if any of the following operationsare not performed within about60 seconds.If your vehicle has a vehicle securityalarm system, the hazard warning lightswill flash for confirmation.The time required for the doors to lockautomatically can be changed (refer to“Personalization Features” in “GettingTo Know Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information).

Opening a door or the trunk lid.

Placing the ignition in any positionother than the OFF position.

Locking/Unlocking With A Key FobBoth doors, trunk lid, and the fuel fillerdoor can be locked/unlocked byoperating the keyless entry system keyfob: refer to “Keyless Entry System” in“Keys” for further information.Locking/Unlocking With Door-LockSwitchBoth doors and the fuel filler door lockautomatically when the lock side ispushed. They unlock when the unlockside is pushed.To lock both the doors and the fuel fillerdoor from an open door, push the lockside of the door lock switch and thenclose the door.Note: When locking the doors thisway, be careful not to leave the key fobinside the vehicle.

30

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Auto Lock/Unlock Function — If Equipped

When the vehicle speed exceeds 12 MPH (20 km/h), both doors, and fuel filler door lock automatically.When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, both doors, and fuel filler door unlock automatically.These functions can also be disabled so that they do not operate.Auto Lock/Unlock Function Setting Change Using Door-Lock Switch (With Door-Lock Switch)The doors, and fuel filler door can be set to lock or unlock automatically by selecting any one of the functions from the followingtable and using the door-lock switch on the interior door panel. There are only a total of six auto lock/unlock settings availablefor automatic transmission vehicles, and three for manual transmission vehicles. Be sure to push the unlock side of the driver'sdoor-lock switch the correct number of times according to the selected function number. If the switch is mistakenly pushedseven times on an automatic transmission vehicle or four times on a manual transmission, the procedure will be cancelled. Ifthis occurs, start the procedure from the beginning.

Function Number Function (*)

1 The auto door-lock function is disabled.

2 Both the doors, and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH(20 km/h) or more.

3Both the doors, and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH

(20 km/h) or more. Both the doors, trunk lid, and the fuel filler door unlock when the ignition iscycled from the ON to OFF position.

4Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position and thegear selector is shifted from park (P) to any other gear position, both the doors, and fuel filler door

lock automatically.

5

Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position and thegear selector is shifted from PARK (P) to any other gear position, both the doors, and the fuel fillerdoor lock automatically. When the dear selector is shifted to PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in

the ON position, both the doors, and the fuel filler door unlock automatically.

6

Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: both the doors, and the fuel filler door lockautomatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH (20 km/h) or more. When the gear selectoris shifted to PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in the ON position, both the doors, and the fuel

filler door unlock automatically.

(*) For other settings for the auto door lock function contact an authorized dealer.Note: Function number 3 is the factory setting for your vehicle.

31

Settings ChangingSettings can be changed using thefollowing procedure:

1. Safely park the vehicle. Both doorsmust remain closed.

2. Place the ignition in the ON position.

3. Push and hold the lock side of thedriver's door-lock switch within20 seconds of placing the ignition in theON position, and make sure a beepsound is heard about eight secondsafterwards.

4. Refer to the auto lock/unlockfunction setting table, determine thefunction number for the desired setting.Push the unlock side of the driver'sdoor-lock switch the same number oftimes as the selected function number(example: if you select function 2, pushthe unlock side of the switch only twotimes).

5. Three seconds after the functionsetting has been changed, a beepsound will beep in the amount of theselected function number (example:Function number 3 = three beepsounds).

Automatic Transmission VehiclesThe doors cannot be locked orunlocked while the setting function isbeing performed.The procedure can be cancelled bypushing the lock side of the door-lockswitch.

Note:

The vehicle lock-out preventionfeature prevents you from lockingyourself out of the vehicle. Both doors,trunk lid, and the fuel filler door willautomatically unlock if they are lockedusing the power door locks with anydoor open. If both the doors are closedeven though the trunk lid is open, boththe doors and the fuel filler door willlock.

Door Unlock (Control) SystemWith Collision Detection — IfEquipped: this system automaticallyunlocks the doors, trunk lid, and thefuel filler door in the event the vehicle isinvolved in an accident to allowpassengers to get out of the vehicleimmediately and prevent being trappedinside. While the ignition is placed inthe ON position and in the event thevehicle receives an impact strongenough to inflate the air bags, both thedoors, the trunk lid, and fuel filler doorare automatically unlocked after aboutsix seconds have elapsed from thetime of the accident. The doors, trunklid, and the fuel filler door may notunlock depending on how an impact isapplied, the force of the impact, andother conditions of the accident. Ifdoor-related systems or the battery ismalfunctioning, the doors, trunk lid,and the fuel filler door will not unlock.

When opening a door, the powerwindows open a little automatically.When closing the door, the powerwindows close automatically. This is afunction for improving the sealing ofthe window, and it does not meanthere is a problem. If the vehicle batteryis disconnected for vehiclemaintenance or other reasons, thepower windows will not open or closeautomatically. If the power windows donot open or close, the automaticopen/close mechanism for thewindows must be reset.32

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

SEATSManual Adjustment

Forward / RearwardTo move the seat forward or rearward,pull the adjustment bar. Release the baronce the desired position is reached.Using body pressure, move forwardand rearward on the seat to be surethat the seat adjusters have latched.

HeightTo adjust the height for front edge ofthe seat bottom, rotate the dial to thedesired position.Seat ReclineTo recline the seatback, lift up therecline lever and lean back until thedesired position has been reached,then release the lever. Make sure the

lever returns to its original position andthe seatback is locked in place byattempting to push it forward andrearward.

Warning!

Adjusting a seat while driving may bedangerous. Moving a seat while drivingcould result in loss of control which couldcause a collision and serious injury ordeath.

Seats should be adjusted beforefastening the seat belts and while thevehicle is parked. Serious injury or deathcould result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt.

Do not ride with the seatback reclinedso that the shoulder belt is no longerresting against your chest. In a collisionyou could slide under the seat belt, whichcould result in serious injury or death.

Heated Seats

On some models, the front driver andpassenger seats may be equipped withheaters in both the seat cushions andseatbacks. The controls for the frontheated seats are located on the centerinstrument panel below the climatecontrols.The heated seats have three settings:High, Medium, and Low. Push theswitch once to turn the heated seats onHigh, twice for Medium, and three times

for Low. Pushing the switch a fourthtime will turn the heated seat off.

Note:

If the ignition is switched OFF whilethe seat warmer is operating (High,Mid or Low), and then switched ONagain, the seat warmer willautomatically operate at thetemperature set before switching theignition OFF.

Use the seat warmer when theengine is running. Leaving the seatwarmer on for long periods with theengine not running could discharge thebattery.

The temperature of the seat warmercannot be adjusted beyond High, Midand Low.

Once a heat setting is selected,heat will be felt within two to fiveminutes.

03010202-12A-003

Manual Seat Adjustment

1 — Adjustment Bar2 — Height Dial3 — Recline Lever

03010203-L12-002

Heated Seat Switches

33

Warning!

Persons who are unable to feel pain tothe skin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,medication, alcohol use, exhaustion orother physical condition must exercise carewhen using the seat heater. It may causeburns even at low temperatures, especiallyif used for long periods of time.

Do not place anything on the seat orseatback that insulates against heat, suchas a blanket or cushion. This may causethe seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seatthat has been overheated could causeserious burns due to the increased surfacetemperature of the seat.

Caution!

Do not use organic solvents to clean theseat. It may damage the seat surface andthe heater.

NON-ADJUSTABLEHEAD RESTRAINTSThe non-adjustable head restraints areform fitted into the upper structure ofthe seatback, and are designed toreduce the risk of injury by restrictinghead movement in the event of a rearimpact. The seatback should beproperly adjusted to an upright positionwhere the head restraint is positionedas close as possible to the back of theoccupant’s head.

Warning!

Be certain that the seatback is lockedsecurely into position. Otherwise, the seatwill not provide the proper stability forpassengers. An improperly latchedseatback could cause serious injury.

Driver And PassengerHead Restraints

Your vehicle is equipped withnon-adjustable head restraints on thedriver's and passenger's seatbacks.The non-adjustable head restraintsconsist of a trimmed foam coveringover the upper structure of theseatbacks and are intended to helpprotect occupants from neck injury.Adjust the seatbacks to their upright,on-road positions so that the headrestraint is positioned as close aspossible to the back of the occupant’shead.

Warning!

Be certain that the seatback is lockedsecurely into position. Otherwise, the seatwill not provide the proper stability forpassengers. An improperly latchedseatback could cause serious injury.

34

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

STEERING WHEELSteering WheelAdjustment

To change the angle of the steeringwheel:

1. With the gear selector in the PARKposition, pull the lock release lever,located under the steering column,downward.

2. Tilt the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

3. Push the lock release lever upwardto lock the steering column.

4. Attempt to push the steering wheelupward and downward to ensure it islocked before driving.

Warning!

Do not adjust the steering column whiledriving. Adjusting the steering column whiledriving or driving with the steering columnunlocked could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle. Be sure the steeringcolumn is locked before driving yourvehicle. Failure to follow this warning mayresult in serious injury or death.

MIRRORSOutside Mirrors

Be sure that all inside and outsidemirrors are adjusted to the desiredposition prior to driving the vehicle.Mirror Types:

Flat Type (Driver Side): flat surfacemirror.

Convex Type (Passenger Side): thismirror has a slight curve.Note: The passenger side convexoutside mirror will give a much widerview toward the rear of the vehicle, andespecially of the adjacent lane.The outside mirrors may be equippedwith a heated mirror system. Refer to“Climate Controls” for more information.The perceived distance of objects in theouter and inner regions of the wideangle mirror is different.

Warning!

Vehicles and other objects seen in thepassenger side convex mirror will looksmaller and farther away than they reallyare. Relying too much on your passengerside mirror could cause you to collide withanother vehicle or other object. Use yourinside mirror when judging the size ordistance of a vehicle seen in the passengerside mirror.

04050101-12A-001

Manual Tilt Adjustment

1 — Lock Release Lever

35

Inside Day / Night Mirror

Rear View Mirror AdjustmentBefore driving, adjust the rear viewmirror to center on the view through therear window.

Note: Before adjusting the manualmirror, place the mirror in the “daydriving position” (see below).Reducing Glare From Headlights

1. Push the lever forward for daydriving (A position).

2. Pull the lever rearward to reduceglare of headlights from vehicles at therear (B position).

Automatic DimmingMirror — If Equipped

The automatic dimming mirrorautomatically reduces glare ofheadlights from vehicles at the rearwhen the ignition is switched ON.Push the off button ( O ) to cancel theautomatic dimming function. Theindicator light will turn off.

Caution!

To avoid damage to the mirror duringcleaning, never spray any cleaning solutiondirectly onto the mirror. Apply the solutiononto a clean cloth and wipe the mirrorclean.

Push the off button ( O ) to cancel theautomatic dimming function. Theindicator light will turn off.To reactivate the automatic dimmingfunction, push the on button ( I ). Theindicator light will illuminate.

04060102-ADJ-001

Manual Mirror Adjustment

04060102-MAN-002

Mirror Adjustment Lever

1 — Mirror Adjustment LeverA — Day Driving PositionB — Reduced Glare Position

04060102-36E-666

Automatic Dimming Mirror Buttons

1 — Off2 — On3 — Light Sensor

36

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Note:

Do not use glass cleaner orsuspend objects on or around the lightsensor. Otherwise, light sensorsensitivity will be affected and may notoperate normally.

The automatic dimming function iscanceled when the ignition is switchedON and the gear selector is inREVERSE.

Power Mirrors

The ignition must be in the ACC or ONposition to adjust the outside powermirrors.Rotate the mirror switch to the left ( L )or right ( R ) to select which mirror toadjust.Push the mirror control switch in thedirection of the desired position.

After adjusting the mirror, lock thecontrol by rotating the switch to thecenter position to prevent accidentalmovements.

Folding Mirrors

Manually fold the outside mirrorrearward until it is flush with the vehicle.

Your vehicle may be equipped with adriver side automatic-dimming mirror.The automatic-dimming door mirror islinked with the automatic-dimmingrearview mirror inside the vehicle toautomatically reduce headlight glarefrom vehicles at the rear. Refer to“Automatic Dimming Mirror” in thissection for further information.Note: The passenger door mirror doesnot have the automatic-dimmingfeature.

04060102-121-666

Light/Rain Sensor

2 — Light Sensor

04060101-L12-001

Power Mirror Switch

0 — Center Position1 — Left Position2 — Right Position

04060101-12R-001

Outside Folding Mirror

37

EXTERIOR LIGHTSHeadlights

Rotate the headlight switch toactivate/deactivate the headlights, otherexterior lights and dashboardillumination.When the lights are turned on, the

indicator in the instrument clusterilluminates.

Note: To prevent discharge of thebattery, do not leave the lights on whilethe engine is OFF.

05030101-132-001

Headlight Switch

1 — Headlight Switch2 — Fog Light Switch

38

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Headlight Operation

Without Auto-Light Control

Switch Position OFF Daytime Running Lights High Beams

Ignition Position ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF

Headlights Off Off Off Off On Off

Daytime Running Lights On Off Off Off Off Off

Tail Lights / Position Lights /License Plate Lights /

Instrument Panel IlluminationOff Off On On On On (*)

(*) If the driver's door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.

With Auto-Light Control

Switch Position OFF AUTO Daytime RunningLights High Beams

Ignition Position ON ACC OrOFF ON ACC Or

OFF ON ACC OrOFF ON ACC Or

OFF

Headlights Off Off Auto (*) Off Off Off On Off

Daytime Running Lights On Off Auto (*) Off Off Off Off Off

Tail Lights / Position Lights / License PlateLights / Instrument Panel Illumination Off Off Auto On (**) /

Off (***)On On On On (****)

(*) The headlights and other light settings adjust automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected by the sensor.(**) While the lights are turned on, they will remain on even if the ignition is switched to a position other than ON. If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have

elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.(***) When the ignition is switched to a position other than ON, the lights will not turn on even if the headlight switch is switched to AUTO.(****) If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.

39

Daytime Running Lights(DRL)

The daytime running lights turn onautomatically when the vehicle startsmoving.They turn off when the parking brake isengaged or the gear selector is shiftedto the PARK position (if equipped withautomatic transmission).Note: In some markets, the daytimerunning lights can be deactivated. Referto “Personalization Features” in “GettingTo Know Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

High Beams

The headlights can be switchedbetween high and low beams bypushing the headlight switch leverforward for high beams, and pulling thelever rearward to return to low beams.When the headlight high beams are on,the high beam indicator isilluminated in the instrument cluster.

Flash To Pass

You can signal another vehicle with yourheadlights by partially pulling theheadlight lever toward the steeringwheel. This will cause the high beamheadlights to turn on until the lever isreleased.The high beam indicator in theinstrument cluster illuminates while thehigh beams are active.

Automatic Lighting

When the headlight switch is in theAUTO position and the ignition isswitched ON, the light sensor willdetect the surrounding light levels andautomatically turns the headlights, otherexterior lights and dashboardillumination on or off.Note: Do not shade the light sensor byplacing a sticker or a label on thewindshield. Otherwise the light sensorwill not operate correctly.

The light sensor also works as a rainsensor for the auto-wiper control. Keephands and scrapers clear of thewindshield when the wiper lever is inthe AUTO position and the ignition isswitched ON, as fingers could bepinched or the wipers and wiper bladesdamaged when the wipers activateautomatically. If you are going to cleanthe windshield, be sure the wipers are

turned off completely when the engineis running.

Note:

The headlights, other exterior lightsand dashboard lights may not turn offimmediately even if the surroundingarea becomes well-lit because the lightsensor determines that it is night time ifthe surrounding area is continuouslydark for several minutes such as insidelong tunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels,or in indoor parking lots. In this case,the lights turn off if the light switch isturned to the OFF position.

When the headlight switch is in theAUTO position and the ignition isswitched to ACC or OFF, theheadlights, other exterior lights anddashboard illumination will turn off.

The dashboard lights can beadjusted by rotating the knob in theinstrument cluster. The day/night modecan be changed by rotating the knobuntil a beep sound is heard.

The sensitivity of the automaticlights may be changed by anauthorized dealer.

05030101-12A-003

Light Sensor

40

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Follow Me Home

The Follow Me Home Light Systemturns on the headlights (low beams) fora period of time after the ignition isswitched OFF.System ActivationWith the ignition switched to ACC orOFF, pull the headlight control leverrearward and the low beam headlightswill turn on.The headlights turn off after a period oftime after all doors are closed.The time until the headlights turn offafter all of the doors are closed can bechanged through the Connect system.The headlights turn off if the lever ispulled again while the headlights are on,or after three minutes of no furtheraction after the first pull of the lever.

Front Fog Lights

The front fog light can be activatedwhen the ignition is in the ON positionand the headlights or parking lights areon.ActivationTurn the headlight switch to the or

position.Rotate the fog light switch to the

position.

The fog light indicator in theinstrument cluster illuminates while thefront fog lights are on.DeactivationPerform one of the following operationsto turn off the front fog lights:

Rotate the fog light switch to the OFFposition.

Turn the headlight switch to the OFFposition.

Switch the ignition to a position otherthan ON.The fog light indicator in theinstrument cluster goes off when thefront fog light is turned off.With Auto-Light ControlWhen the fog light switch is in

position and the headlight switch is

in AUTO position, the front fog lights willstay on.

Turn Signals

The ignition must be in the ON positionto use the turn signals and lane changeassist.Move the signal lever down (for a leftturn) or up (for a right turn). The signalwill self-cancel after the turn iscompleted.If the indicator light continues to flashafter a turn, manually return the lever toits original position.The turn signal indicators (green)

in the instrument cluster flashaccording to the operation of the turnsignal lever to show which signal isactive.Note: If an indicator light stays onwithout flashing or if it flashesabnormally, one of the turn signal bulbsmay be burned out.

Lane Change Assist

Move the lever halfway toward thedirection of the lane change (until theindicator flashes) and hold it there. It willreturn to the off position when released.Three-Flash Turn SignalAfter releasing the turn signal lever, theturn signal indicator flashes three times.The operation can be cancelled bymoving the lever in the directionopposite to which it was operated.

05030101-132-001

Headlight Switch

1 — Headlight Switch2 — Fog Light Switch

41

The three-flash turn signal function canbe turned on or off using thepersonalization function in the radio.

Adaptive Front LightingSystem (AFS) — IfEquipped

This system directs the main headlightbeams and adapts it to the drivingconditions around bends and turns,continuously and automatically.The system directs the headlight beamto illuminate the road in the best way,taking into account the speed of thevehicle, the bend or corner angle andthe speed of steering.The Adaptive Front Lighting System isautomatically activated when thevehicle is started.

Leaving Home LightSystem

The Leaving Home Light System turnsthe headlights on when the unlockbutton on the key fob is pushed whileaway from the vehicle.ActivationWith the ignition switch in the OFFposition, and the headlight switch is inthe or position, theheadlights will illuminate when theunlock button on the key fob is pushed,and the vehicle receives the signal.The headlights turn off after30 seconds.

The following lights turn on when theLeaving Home Light System isoperated: low beams/parking lights/taillights/license plate lights.

Operation of the Leaving Home LightSystem can be turned on or off throughthe Connect system.

When the lock button on the key fobis pushed, and the vehicle receives thesignal, the headlights turn off.

When the headlight switch is in aposition other than or , theheadlights turn off.

Headlamp LevelingSystem — If Equipped

On some models, the angle of theheadlights will be automatically adjustedwhen turning on the headlights.

Adjusting The HeadlightWhen Abroad

Dipped headlights are adjusted fordriving in the country where the vehiclewas originally purchased.When travelling in countries withopposite driving direction, to avoidflashing the drivers on the other side ofthe road, you need to cover areas ofthe headlight. For this operation contactan authorized dealer.

WINDSHIELDWIPERS / WASHERWindshield Wipers AndWasher

The windshield wiper/washer lever islocated on the right side of the steeringwheel. The ignition must be in the ONposition to use these features.

Windshield Wipers

Activate the windshield wipers bypushing the wiper lever up or down.With Intermittent WiperSet the lever to the intermittent positionand choose the interval timing byrotating the center switch.Switch positions:

or MIST: operation whilepushing the lever upward

OFF: stop

--- or INT: intermittent operation

— or LO: low speed operation

= or HI: high speed operation

42

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

With Auto-Wiper ControlWhen the wiper lever is in the AUTOposition, the rain sensor will sense theamount of rainfall on the windshield andturns the wipers on or off automatically(off/intermittent/low speed/high speed).Switch positions:

or MIST: operation whilepulling up lever

OFF: stop

AUTO: auto control operation

— or LO: low speed operation

= or HI: high speed operationAdjusting Rain Sensor SensitivityThe sensitivity of the rain sensor can beadjusted by rotating the switch on thewiper lever.From the center position (normal),rotate the switch downward for highersensitivity (+) (faster response) or rotateit upward for less sensitivity (-) (slowerresponse).

Note: Do not shade the rain sensor byplacing a sticker or a label on thewindshield. Otherwise the rain sensorwill not operate correctly.When the wiper lever is in the AUTOposition and the ignition is switchedON, the wipers may move automaticallyin the following cases:

If the windshield above the rainsensor is touched or wiped with a cloth.

If the windshield is struck with a handor other object from either outside orinside the vehicle.

Warning!

Keep hands and scrapers clear of thewindshield when the wiper lever is in theAUTO position and the ignition is switchedON as fingers could be pinched or thewipers and wiper blades damaged whenthe wipers activate automatically.

If you are going to clean the windshield,be sure the wipers are turned off. Thisis important when clearing ice andsnow.Switching the auto-wiper lever from theOFF to the AUTO position while drivingactivates the windshield wipers once,after which they operate according tothe rainfall amount.The auto-wiper control may not operatewhen the rain sensor temperature isabout 14 °F (–10 °C) or lower, or about185 °F (85 °C) or higher.If the windshield is coated with waterrepellent, the rain sensor may not beable to sense the amount of rainfallcorrectly and auto-wiper control maynot operate properly.

05030101-122-001

Windshield Wiper Lever

1 — Rain Sensor Adjustment

43

If dirt or debris (such as ice or debriscontaining salt water) adheres to thewindshield above the rain sensor or ifthe windshield is iced, it could causethe wipers to move automatically.However, if the wipers cannot removethis ice, dirt or debris, the auto-wipercontrol will stop operation. In this case,set the wiper lever to the low speedposition or high speed position formanual operation, or remove the ice,dirt or debris by hand to restore theauto-wiper operation.If the auto-wiper lever is left in theAUTO position, the wipers couldoperate automatically from the effect ofstrong light sources, electromagneticwaves, or infrared light because the rainsensor uses an optical sensor.It is recommended that the auto-wiperlever be switched to the OFF positionother than when driving the vehicleunder rainy conditions.The auto-wiper control functions can beturned off.Because heavy ice and snow can jamthe wiper blades, the wiper motor isprotected from motor breakdown,overheating and possible fire by acircuit breaker. This mechanism willautomatically stop operation of theblades, but only for about five minutes.If this happens, turn off the wiper switchand park off the road and remove thesnow and ice. After five minutes, turnon the switch and the blades should

operate normally. If they do not resumefunctioning, contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible. Pull off tothe side of the road to a safe location.Wait until the weather clears beforetrying to drive with the wipersinoperative.

Windshield Washer

Pull the wiper/washer lever rearwardand hold it to spray washer fluid ontothe windshield.With the wiper lever in the OFF,intermittent, or AUTO position, thewipers will operate continuously untilthe lever is released.

Warning!

Sudden loss of visibility through thewindshield could lead to a collision. Youmight not see other vehicles or otherobstacles. To avoid sudden icing of thewindshield during freezing weather, warmthe windshield with defroster before andduring windshield washer use.

If the fluid level is normal and thewasher does not work, contact anauthorized dealer.

With Headlight WashersWhen the headlights are on, theheadlight washers operateautomatically once every fifth time thewindshield washer operates.

04110109-115-001

Windshield Washer Nozzles

44

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEMOperating Tips

The air conditioning system will onlyoperate with the engine running.To prevent the battery from beingdischarged while the engine is off, donot leave the Blower Control Knob onfor extended periods of time.To improve system efficiency, clear allobstructions (leaves, snow and ice)from the hood and the air inlet in thegrille.Use the air conditioning system todefog the windows and dehumidify theair.Recirculation mode should be usedwhen driving through tunnels, while in atraffic jam, or when you would like toquickly cool the interior.Use the outside air position forventilation or windshield defrosting.If the vehicle has been parked in directsunlight during hot weather, open thewindows to let warm air escape, andthen run the air conditioning system.To keep the internal parts lubricatedand the system running smoothly, runthe air conditioner about 10 minutes atleast once a month.

Have the air conditioner checked beforethe weather gets hot. A lack ofrefrigerant may make the air conditionerless efficient. The refrigerantspecifications are indicated on a label (Aor B depending on the market)attached to the inside of the enginecompartment. Check the label beforerefilling the refrigerant. If the wrong typeof refrigerant is used, it could result in aserious malfunction of the airconditioner. For details, contact yourauthorized dealer.

Caution!

The system uses a coolant that iscompatible with the laws in force in thecountries where the vehicle is sold, R134aor R1234yf (indicated on a specific plate inthe engine compartment). The use of othercoolants affects the efficiency andcondition of the system. Also thecompressor coolants used must becompatible with the indicated coolant.

06010100121001

Label Location

45

Vent Operation

Adjusting The VentsTo adjust the direction of air flow, movethe vent adjustment knob.Note: When using the air conditioner inhumid conditions, fog may blow fromthe vents. This is a result of humid airbeing suddenly cooled and does notindicate a system malfunction.

Center Vents (Driver) and SideVentsCenter and side vents are located onthe dashboard.

Air vent open/close: the air vents canbe fully opened and closed by usingknob 1 (A = open / B = close).

Air flow direction adjustment: useknob 1 to adjust the center vents to thedesired position.

Center Vents (Front Passenger)Center vents are located on thedashboard.

Air vent open/close: use the CenterVent tab 1 to open/close the centervents (A = open / B = close).

Air flow direction adjustment: use theCenter Vent tab 1 to adjust the centervents to the desired position.

06010201-033-001

Side Air Vents

06010201-033-666

Operating the Side Air Vents

1 — Air Vent KnobA — Open PositionB — Closed Position

06010201-121-001

Central Air Vent

06010201-121-777

Operating The Central Air Vent

1 — Center Vent TabA — Open PositionB — Closed Position

46

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Airflow Mode

06010202-121-002

Airflow Locations

1 — Fixed Upper Air Diffuser2 — Adjustable Side Air Vents3 — Adjustable Center Air Vent4 — Floor Vents

47

Manual Climate Control System

With MAX A/C function

06010300-122-002

Manual Climate Controls With MAX A/C

1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

48

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Controls

1 – Temperature Control KnobThis dial controls the interiortemperature of the vehicle.Turn it clockwise for hottertemperatures and counterclockwise forcolder temperatures.MAX A/C – If Equipped: When theMode Selector Knob is set to or ,the Blower Control Knob is in a positionother than 0, and the temperaturecontrol knob is in the maximum coldposition, the Recirculation Button willactivate and the A/C will turn onautomatically. If A/C is not desired,press the A/C Button to turn it off.

2 – Blower Control KnobThe blower has seven speeds. Turn theknob clockwise to increase blowerspeed or counterclockwise to decreaseblower speed.

3 – Mode Selector KnobTurn the Mode Selector Knob to selectthe air flow mode.The mode selector dial can be set atthe intermediate positions (●) betweeneach mode.

Set the knob to an intermediateposition if you want to split the air flowbetween the two modes.For example, when the Mode SelectorKnob is at the intermediate position (●)between the and positions, airflow from the floor vents is less thanthat of the position.

4 – Rear Window Defrost ButtonThe Rear Window Defrost Button clearsfog and frost from the rear window. Theignition must be on to use the defroster.Push the button to turn on the RearWindow Defroster. The Rear WindowDefroster operates for about15 minutes and then turns offautomatically. The button LED willilluminate when the defroster isoperating.To turn off the Rear Window Defrosterbefore the end of 15 minutes, push thebutton again.

Caution!

Failure to follow these cautions can causedamage to the heating elements:

Use care when washing the inside ofthe rear window. Do not use abrasivewindow cleaners on the interior surface ofthe window. Use a soft cloth and a mildwashing solution, wiping parallel to theheating elements. Labels can be peeled offafter soaking with warm water.

Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,or abrasive window cleaners on the interiorsurface of the window.

Keep all objects a safe distance fromthe window.

Note:

Before opening the convertible top,make sure the Rear Window DefrostButton is turned off. Otherwise, theheat generated from the defrostercould damage the convertible top andthe internal material.

This defroster is not designed formelting snow. If there is anaccumulation of snow on the rearwindow, remove it before using thedefroster.

49

Mirror Defroster — If Equipped: Toturn on the mirror defroster, turn theignition ON and push the Rear WindowDefroster Button.

5 – Air Recirculation ButtonPush the Air Recirculation Button toselect between outside air andrecirculated air positions.Recirculated Air Position: (LED on)Outside air is shut off when this positionhas been activated. Use this positionwhen going through tunnels, driving incongested traffic (high engine exhaustareas), or when quick cooling of thevehicle is desired.Outside Air Position: (LED off)Outside air is allowed to enter thecabin. Use this mode for ventilation orwindshield defrosting.Note: Do not use the Outside AirPosition in cold or rainy weather isdangerous as it will cause the windowsto fog up. Your vision will be hampered,which could lead to a serious accident.

6 – A/C ButtonPush the A/C Button to turn on the airconditioner.The LED on the switch will illuminatewhen the Blower Control Knob is in anyposition except the OFF position.Push the button again to turn off the airconditioner.Note: The air conditioner may notfunction when the outside temperatureapproaches 32 °F (0 °C).

Heating

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to theposition.

2. Set the Air Recirculation Button tothe outside air position.

3. Set the Temperature Control Dial tothe hot position.

4. Set the Blower Control Knob to thedesired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,turn on the air conditioner.If the windshield fogs up easily, set theMode Selector Knob to the position.If cooler air is desired at face level, setthe Mode Selector Knob to the

position and adjust the TemperatureControl Knob to maintain comfort.The floor vents will blow warmer airwhile the side air vents will blow coolerair (except when the temperaturecontrol dial is set at the maximum hotor cold position).

Cooling (With AirConditioner)

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Mode Selector Knob tothe position.

2. Set the Temperature Control Knobto the cold position.

3. Set the Blower Control Knob to thedesired speed.

4. Turn on the air conditioner bypushing the A/C Button.

5. After cooling begins, adjust theBlower Control Knob and TemperatureControl Knob as needed to maintaincomfort.

Note:

If the air conditioner is used whiledriving up large hills or in heavy traffic,monitor the Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light to see if itis illuminated or flashing. The airconditioner may cause engineoverheating in these situations. If thewarning light is illuminated or flashing,turn the air conditioning offimmediately.

When maximum cooling is desired,set the Temperature Control Knob tothe extreme cold position, push the AirRecirculation Button to activate therecirculated air position, and then turnthe fan control dial fully clockwise.

If warmer air is desired at floor level,set the Mode Selector Knob to the

position, and adjust theTemperature Control Knob to maintaincomfort.

50

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

The floor vents will blow warmer airwhile the side air vents will blow coolerair (except when the temperaturecontrol dial is set at the maximum hotor cold position).

Ventilation

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Mode Selector Knob tothe position.

2. Set the Air Recirculation Button tothe outside air position.

3. Set the Temperature Control Knobto the desired position.

4. Set the Blower Control Knob to thedesired speed.

Windshield DefrostingAnd Defogging

Proceed as follows:1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to theFront Defrost position.2. Set the Temperature Control Knob tothe desired position.3. Set the Blower Control Knob to thedesired speed.4. If dehumidified heating is desired,turn on the air conditioner.

Warning!

Set the temperature control to the hot orwarm position when defogging (FrontDefrost position). Using the Front Defrostposition with the temperature control set tothe cold position is dangerous as it willcause the outside of the windshield to fogup. Your vision will be hampered, whichcould lead to a serious accident.

Note:

For maximum defrosting, turn onthe air conditioner, set the TemperatureControl Knob to the extreme hotposition, and turn the Blower ControlKnob fully clockwise.

If warm air is desired from the floorvents, set the Mode Selector Knob tothe position.

If equipped with MAX A/C, theRecirculation Button can be set to theRecirculated Air position, when theBlower Control Knob is ON, and theMode Selector Knob is set to the FrontDefrost position.

Dehumidifying (With AirConditioner)

Operate the air conditioner in cool orcold weather to help defog thewindshield and side windows.Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to thedesired position.

2. Set the Air Recirculation Knob to theoutside air position.

3. Set the Temperature Control Knobto the desired position.

4. Set the Blower Control Knob to thedesired speed.

5. Turn on the air conditioner bypressing the A/C Button.Note: One of the functions of the airconditioner is dehumidifying the air. Touse this function, the temperature doesnot have to be set to cold. Set theTemperature Control Knob to thedesired position (hot or cold), and turnon the air conditioner to dehumidify thecabin air.

51

Automatic Climate Control System

06010900-122-999

Automatic Climate Controls — Type A

1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

52

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

06010900122

Automatic Climate Controls — Type B

1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

53

Controls

1 – Temperature Control KnobThis knob controls internal temperatureof the vehicle. Turn it clockwise forhotter temperatures andcounterclockwise for coldertemperatures.

2 – Blower Control KnobThe fan has seven speeds. Turn theclockwise to increase blower speed orcounterclockwise to decrease blowerspeed/enter Auto mode.AUTO Position: The blower speed isautomatically controlled by the systembased upon the set temperature.0 Position: To turn off the system, setthe dial to 0 position.

3 – Mode Selector KnobTurn the Mode Selector Knob to selectthe air flow mode.AUTO Position: The air flowautomatically adjusts based upon theselected temperature.

Note:

With the air flow mode set to theposition, and the Temperature

Control Knob is set to a mediumtemperature, the floor vents will blowwarmer air, and the center and side airvents will blow cooler air.

When the Blower Control Knob ison, and the Mode Selector Knob is inthe position, the air conditioner isautomatically turned on, and the AirRecirculation Button is automaticallyset to the outside air position forwindshield defrosting.

4 – Rear Window Defrost ButtonThe Rear Window Defroster clears fogand frost from the rear window. Theignition must be switched ON to usethe defroster.Push the button to turn on the RearWindow Defroster.The Rear Window Defroster operatesfor about 15 minutes, and then turns offautomatically.The button LED will illuminate when thedefroster is operating.To turn off the Rear Window Defrosterbefore the end of 15 minutes, push theswitch again.

Caution!

Failure to follow these cautions can causedamage to the heating elements:

Before opening the convertible top,make sure the Rear Window DefrostButton is turned OFF. Otherwise, the heatgenerated from the defroster coulddamage the convertible top and theinternal material.

Use care when washing the inside of therear window. Do not use abrasive windowcleaners on the interior surface of thewindow. Use a soft cloth and a mildwashing solution, wiping parallel to theheating elements. Labels can be peeled offafter soaking with warm water.

Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,or abrasive window cleaners on the interiorsurface of the window.

Keep all objects a safe distance from thewindow.

Note: This defroster is not designed formelting snow. If there is anaccumulation of snow on the rearwindow, remove it before using thedefroster.Mirror Defroster — If Equipped: Toturn on the mirror defroster, switch theignition on and push the Rear WindowDefroster Button.

54

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

5 – Air Recirculation ButtonPress the Air Recirculation Button toselect between outside air andrecirculated air positions.Recirculated Air Position: (LED On)Outside air is shut off when this positionhas been activated. Use this positionwhen going through tunnels, driving incongested traffic (high engine exhaustareas), or when quick cooling of thevehicle is desired.Outside Air Position: (LED Off)Outside air is allowed to enter thecabin. Use this mode for ventilation orwindshield defrosting.Note: Do not use the Recirculated AirPosition in cold or rainy weather. Usingthe Recirculated Air Position in cold orrainy weather is dangerous as it willcause the windows to fog up. Yourvision will be hampered, which couldlead to a serious accident.

6 – A/C ButtonPush the A/C Button to turn on the airconditioner.The LED on the switch will illuminatewhen the Blower Control Knob is in anyposition except the off position.Push the button again to turn off the airconditioner.Note: The air conditioner may notfunction when the outside temperatureapproaches 32 °F ( 0 °C).

Operation Of AutomaticAir Conditioning

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the mode selector knob to theAUTO position.

2. Set the Air Recirculation Button tothe outside air position (indicator lightturned off).

Note: If the recirculated air position isused for long periods in cold weather orhigh humidity, the windshield may fogup more easily.

3. Set the Blower Control Knob to theAUTO position.

4. Push the A/C button to operate theair conditioning (indicator light on).

5. Set the Temperature Control Knobto the desired position.

6. To turn off the system, set theblower control knob to the 0 position.Setting the temperature to maximumhot or cold will not provide the desiredtemperature at a faster rate.When selecting heat, the system willrestrict air flow until it has warmed toprevent cold air from blowing out of thevents.For an optimal cabin temperature, setthe temperature close to 77º. Adjust tothe desired temperature if necessary.

Windshield DefrostingAnd Defogging

Set the mode selector knob to theposition and turn the blower control

knob to the desired speed.In this position, the outside air positionis automatically selected, and when theblower control knob is on, the airconditioner automatically turns on. Theair conditioner will directly dehumidifythe air to the front windshield and sidewindows. Air flow amount will beincreased.Use the temperature control knob toincrease the air flow temperature anddefog the windshield more quickly.

Warning!

Set the temperature control to the hot orwarm position when defogging (FrontDefrost position). Using the Front Defrostposition with the temperature control set tothe cold position is dangerous as it willcause the outside of the windshield to fogup. Your vision will be hampered, whichcould lead to a serious accident.

Sunlight/TemperatureSensor

The air conditioning system measuresinside and outside temperatures, andsunlight.It then sets temperatures inside thecabin accordingly. 55

Note: Do not obstruct either sensor.Otherwise, the air-conditioning systemwill not operate properly.

POWER WINDOWSPower Window Controls

The ignition must be placed in the ONposition for the power windows tooperate.A power window may no longeropen/close if you continue to push theswitch after opening/closing the powerwindow.If the power window does notopen/close, wait a moment and thenoperate the switch again.Note: To prevent burning out the fuseand damaging the power windowsystem, do not open or close bothwindows at once.The passenger window can beoperated with each door switch whenthe power window lock switch on thedriver's door is in the unlocked position.Passenger Control SwitchesThe passenger window can also beoperated using the master controlswitches on the driver's door.

06010904333003

Exterior Sensor

1 — Sunlight Sensor

06010904-121-002

Interior Sensor

2 — Interior Temperature Sensor

04070103-LN2-002

Power Window Switches

1 — Driver's Window2 — Passenger's Window

04070103-L12-001

Power Window Switch Function

1 — Closing-Lightly Pull The Switch Up2 — Opening-Lightly Hold The SwitchDown

56

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Auto-Opening Power WindowsTo fully open the window automaticallypush the switch completely down. Tostop the window partway pull or pushthe switch in the opposite direction andthen release it. The power windowcannot be fully closed while the door isopen.Power Window System InitializationProcedureIf the battery was disconnected duringvehicle maintenance, or for otherreasons (such as a switch continues tobe operated after the window isopen/closed), the window will not fullyopen automatically.Resetting of the automatic function canbe performed using the master controlswitches or each passenger doorswitch.The power window auto function resetprocedure can be done on both doorswitches. The power window autofunction will only resume on the powerwindow that has been reset:

1. Close the doors and the convertibletop.

2. Place the ignition in the ON position.

3. Make sure that the power windowlock switch located on the driver's dooris not depressed.

4. Push the switch and fully open thewindow.

5. Pull up the switch to fully close thewindow and continue holding theswitch for about two seconds after thewindow fully closed.

6. Repeat steps four and five for thepassenger power window while seatedin the passenger seat.

7. Make sure that the power windowsoperate correctly using the doorswitches.After the system has been re-initialized,passenger window can be fully openedautomatically using the master controlswitches. If the automatic powerwindow operation does not operatenormally while the doors or convertibletop are opened/closed, reset it usingthe above procedures.Engine-Off Power WindowOperationThe power window can be operated forabout 40 seconds after the ignition hasbeen cycled from ON to the OFFposition with both doors closed. If anydoor is opened, the power window willstop operating.For engine-off operation of the powerwindow, the switch must be held upfirmly throughout window closurebecause the auto-closing function willbe inoperable.

Warning!

Never leave children unattended in avehicle, and do not let children play withpower windows. Do not leave the key fobin or near the vehicle, or in a locationaccessible to children, and do not leave theignition of a vehicle equipped with theKeyless Entry System in the ACC orON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularlyunattended children, can becomeentrapped by the windows while operatingthe power window switches. Suchentrapment may result in serious injury ordeath.

Power Window LockSwitch

This feature prevents the passengerspower window from operating. Keepthis switch in the locked position whilechildren are in the vehicle.

1. Locked Position (ButtonPushed): only the driver's powerwindow can be operated.

2. Unlocked Position (Button NotPushed): both power windows oneach door can be operated.

57

Note: When the power window lockswitch is in the locked position, the lighton the passenger power window switchturns off. The light may be difficult tosee depending on the surroundingbrightness.

HOMELINK — IFEQUIPPEDGeneral Information

The HomeLink system replaces up tothree hand-held transmitters with asingle built-in component in theauto-dimming mirror. Pushing theHomeLink button on the auto-dimmingmirror activates garage doors, gatesand other devices surrounding yourhome.Note: HomeLink and HomeLink houseicon are registered trademarks ofGentex Corporation.

Warning!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbonmonoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not runyour vehicle in the garage whileprogramming the transceiver. Exhaust gascan cause serious injury or death.

Your motorized door or gate will openand close while you are programming theuniversal transceiver. Do not program thetransceiver if people, pets or other objectsare in the path of the door or gate. Onlyuse this transceiver with a garage dooropener that has a “stop and reverse”feature as required by Federal safetystandards. This includes most garage dooropener models manufactured after 1982.Do not use a garage door opener withoutthese safety features. Call toll-free

1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet atHomeLink.com for safety information orassistance.

Pre-Programming TheSystemNote: It is recommended that a newbattery be placed in the hand-heldtransmitter of the device beingprogrammed to HomeLink for quickertraining and accurate transmission ofthe radio-frequency signal.

Proceed as follows:1. Verify that there is a remote controltransmitter available for the device youwould like to program.2. Disconnect the power to the device.

Programming TheSystemNote: When programming a garagedoor opener or a gate, disconnect thepower to these devices beforeprogramming. Continuous operation ofthe devices could damage the motor.

The HomeLink system provides threebuttons which can be individuallyselected and programmed using thetransmitters for current, on-marketdevices as follows:1. Disconnect power to the devicebeing programmed.2. Position the end of your handheldtransmitter one to three inches (2.5 -7.5 cm) away from the HomeLink

04070104-L12-001

Power Window Lockout Switch

1 — Locked Position2 — Unlocked Position

58

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

button you wish to program whilekeeping the indicator light in view.3. Simultaneously press and hold boththe chosen HomeLink and hand-heldtransmitter buttons. Do not releasethe buttons until step four has beencompleted.

4. After the HomeLink indicator lightchanges from a slow to a rapidlyblinking light, release both theHomeLink and hand-held transmitterbuttons.5. Connect power to the device beingprogrammed.6. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink button for fiveseconds, and then release it. Performthis operation two times to activate thedoor or gate. If the door or gate does

not activate, press and hold thejust-trained HomeLink button andobserve the indicator light. If theindicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and yourdevice should activate when theHomeLink button is pressed andreleased.Note: To program the remaining twoHomeLink buttons, begin with stepone.7. If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to aconstant light, continue with“Programming” steps (see below) tocomplete the programming of a rollingcode equipped device (most commonlya garage door opener).8. At the garage door opener receiver(motor-head unit) in the garage, locatethe “learn” or “smart” button. This canusually be found where the hangingantenna wire is attached to themotorhead unit.9. Press and release the “learn” or“smart” button (the name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer).Note: Complete the programmingwithin 30 seconds.10. Return to the vehicle and firmlypress, hold for two seconds andrelease the programmed HomeLinkbutton. Repeat the “ press/hold/release” sequence a second time, and,depending on the brand of the garagedoor opener (or other rolling code

equipped device), repeat this sequencea third time to complete theprogramming process. HomeLinkshould now activate your rolling codeequipped device.Note: To program the remaining twoHomeLink buttons, begin with stepone.For questions or comments, pleasecontact HomeLink atwww.homelink.com or1-800-355-3515.

Gate Operator/CanadianProgramming

Canadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission -which may not be long enough forHomeLink to pick up the signal duringprogramming.Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.gate operators are designed to“time-out” in the same manner.If you live in Canada or you are havingdifficulties programming a gate operatorby using the “Programming”procedures (regardless of where youlive), replace “Programming TheSystem” step three with the following:Note: If programming a garage dooropener or gate operator, it is advised tounplug the device during the “cycling”process to prevent possibleoverheating.

04060102-121-999

HomeLink Buttons

1 — First HomeLink Button2 — Second HomeLink Button3 — Third HomeLink Button

59

1. Continue to press and hold theHomeLink button while you press andrelease - every two seconds (“cycle”)your hand-held transmitter until thefrequency signal has successfully beenaccepted by HomeLink (the indicatorlight will flash slowly and then rapidly).2. Proceed with the “Programming”steps to complete.

Operating The System

Push the programmed HomeLinkbutton to operate a programmeddevice.The code will continue beingtransmitted for a maximum of20 seconds.

Reprogramming TheSystem

To program a device to HomeLink usinga HomeLink button previously trained,follow these steps:1. Push and hold the desired HomeLinkbutton. DO NOT release the button;2. The indicator light will begin to flashafter 20 seconds. Without releasing theHomeLink button, proceed with“Programming The System” step one.

Erasing ProgrammedHomeLink Buttons

To erase the existing programming fromall three operating channels, push andhold the two outside buttons 1 and3 on the auto-dimming mirror until theHomeLink indicator light begins to flashafter approximately ten seconds.Verify that the programming has beenerased when you resell the vehicle.

INTERNALEQUIPMENTStorage Compartments

Center ConsoleThe center console is located betweenthe driver’s and passenger’s seats.

Warning!

Keep storage compartments closed whendriving. Driving with the storagecompartments open is dangerous. Toreduce the possibility of injury in anaccident or a sudden stop, keep thestorage compartments closed whendriving.

60

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Caution!

Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in thestorage compartments while parked underthe sun. A lighter could explode or theplastic material in eyeglasses could deformand crack from high temperature.

Seat Side CompartmentThe seat side compartment is locatedbetween the seats above thecupholders.

To open, push the release handle downto open the seat side compartment.Insert the emergency key in the lockand turn it clockwise to lock, counterclockwise to unlock.Note: When using the rear consolecup holders, remove any cups beforeopening the seat side compartment. Ifthe seat side compartment is openedwith a cup present, the lid will hit thecups and may cause the contents tospill.

Back Trim Storage CompartmentSmall items can be stored in the backtrim storage compartment which islocated behind the seats.

To use the back trim storagecompartment, slide the seat all the wayforward and fold the seat back forward,then open the compartment.When finished, close the compartmentand return the seat to its originalposition and secure it.After returning the seat to its originalposition, make sure the seat is securedby attempting to lightly move it forwardand rearward.

06040706-12A-001

Center Console Lid

06040717-121-001

Seat Side Compartment

1 — Release Handle2 — Key Hole

06040718-12A-002

Back Trim Storage Compartment

61

Caution!

Do not forcefully push objects into the rearstorage compartment. Otherwise, the boxcould be damaged.

Sun Visors

The sun visors are located at the sidesof the interior rear view mirror. They canbe adjusted forward toward thewindshield, and sideways toward theside windows, to block sunlight.

Vanity MirrorsTo access the vanity mirror, fold the sunvisor down and lift the cover toward theseats.

Interior Lights

Overhead LightThe interior light is located in theheadliner in between the sun visors.The interior light can be set to threedifferent positions.

Light switch positions:

On : Light is on at all times.

Door : Light is on when any door isopen. Light is on or off when theilluminated entry system is on.

Off : Light is off at all times.

Trunk LightThe trunk light comes on when the lid isopen and turns off when closed.

Note: To prevent the battery frombeing discharged, do not leave thetrunk open for a long period when theengine is not running.

Illuminated Entry SystemThe overhead light turns on when anyof the following operations occurs withthe overhead light switch in the doorposition and the ignition switched OFF:

Turns on for about 30 seconds whenthe driver's door is unlocked.

Turns on for about 15 seconds whena door is opened while a key fob is leftin the vehicle and then the door isclosed.

06040100-L12-001AB

Sun Visor

06040200-12A-002

Overhead Light Switch

1 — On2 — Door3 — Off

06040200-T12-003

Trunk Light Location

1 — Trunk Light Switch

62

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Turns on for about five secondswhen a door is opened from the outsidewith a key fob being carried and thenthe door is closed.The overhead light turns on for about15 seconds when the ignition isswitched OFF with the overhead lightswitch in the door position.The overhead light turns off immediatelyin the following cases:

The ignition is switched ON and bothdoors are closed.

The driver's door is locked.

Battery SaverIf any door is left open with theoverhead light switch in the doorposition or the trunk lid is left open, theoverhead light or trunk light turns offafter about 30 minutes to preventdischarge of the battery.To prevent discharge of the battery, ifthe interior lights remain on (the interiorlight switch is in the on position), theywill turn off automatically under thefollowing conditions:

No operations are done for about30 minutes after the ignition is switchedOFF.

The button on the key fob ispushed, or the request switch locatedon the exterior door handle is pushed tolock the doors (vehicles with theadvanced keyless function) after theignition is switched OFF.

In addition, if the following operationsare performed after turning the interiorlights off, they will turn on again if:

The ignition is switched to a positionother than OFF.

A door is opened.

A door is unlocked.The operation of the illuminated entrysystem can be changed through theConnect system.

Accessory Socket

The accessory socket is located deepin the back of the footwell on thepassenger side.

Only use genuine FCA accessories orthe equivalent requiring no greater than12V (120 W, 10A).The ignition must be placed in ACC orON.

To prevent accessory socket damageor electrical failure, pay attention to thefollowing:

Do not use accessories that requiremore than 12V (120 W, 10A).

Do not use accessories that are notgenuine FCA accessories or theequivalent.

Close the cover when the accessorysocket is not in use to prevent foreignobjects and liquids from getting into theaccessory socket.

Correctly insert the plug into theaccessory socket.

Do not insert the cigarette lighter intothe accessory socket.

Noise may occur on the audioplayback depending on the deviceconnected to the accessory socket.

Depending on the device connectedto the accessory socket, the vehicle'selectrical system may be affected,which could cause the warning light toilluminate. Disconnect the connecteddevice and make sure that the problemis resolved. If the problem is resolved,disconnect the device from the socketand switch the ignition off. If theproblem is not resolved, contact anauthorized dealer.Note: To prevent discharging of thebattery, do not use the socket for longperiods with the engine off or idling.

06040400-L12-002

Accessory Socket

63

Warning!

To avoid serious injury or death:Only devices designed for use in this

type of outlet should be inserted into any12 Volt outlet.

Do not touch with wet hands.

Close the lid when not in use and whiledriving the vehicle.

If this outlet is mishandled, it may causean electric shock and failure.

Cupholders — IfEquipped

Cupholders are available and can beinserted in the center console on thepassenger side and the rear area of thecenter console.

Warning!

Never use a cup holder to hold hot liquidswhile the vehicle is moving. Using a cupholder to hold hot liquids while the vehicleis moving is dangerous. If the contentsspill, you could be burned.

Caution!

Do not place plastic bottles withoutcaps in the cup holders. Otherwise, thecontents may spill while the vehicle is beingdriven.

Do not place excessive weight on thecup holders such as by resting your handsor elbows on them. Otherwise, the cupholders could be damaged.

If a passenger is present, install the frontcup holder to the rear console. Otherwise,a knee might hit it and cause the contentsto spill.

Removing Cup HoldersUse both hands when removing thecup holder.

06040500L21002

Cupholders

1 — Front Cup Holder2 — Rear Cup Holder (If Equipped)

06040500-J12AEC1-001

Removing Cupholders

64

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

Installing CupholdersWhen installing a cupholder, insert itfirmly into the installation hole and makesure that it is secured in place.

The front cupholder can be removedand installed to the rear console.

The rear cupholder is designed for useon the rear console and cannot beinstalled to the front side.

Windblocker

This windblocker reduces rear windcoming into the cabin when driving withthe convertible top down.

06040500-J12AEC2-001

Installing Cupholders

06040500-L25-002

Correct Cupholder Placement

06040500-L26-001

Incorrect Cupholder Placement

06041000-12A-003

Windblocker

65

TRUNK LIDOpening

Warning!

Before opening the trunk lid, remove anysnow and ice accumulation on it.Otherwise, the trunk lid could close underthe weight of the snow and ice resulting ininjury.

Be careful when opening/closing thetrunk lid during strong winds. If a stronggust blows against the trunk lid, it couldclose suddenly resulting in injury.

Fully open the trunk lid and make surethat it stays open. If the trunk lid is onlyopened partially, it could slam shut byvibration or wind gusts resulting in injury.

When loading or unloading luggage inthe trunk, turn off the engine. Otherwise,you could get burned by the heat of theexhaust gas.

Using The Remote Release Button— If Equipped

The remote release button function canbe disabled by locking the doors usingthe key fob, emergency key, or arequest switch on the exterior doorhandle to prevent an intruder in thevehicle from opening the trunk lid.To enable the remote release buttonoperation, unlock the doors by usingthe key fob, emergency key, requestswitch on the exterior door handle, orplace the ignition in the ON position.Note: The remote release buttoncannot be disabled by locking thedoors using the door-lockswitch/door-lock knob.Using The Electric Trunk LidOpenerWith the remote release button: a trunklid can also be opened while the keyfob is being carried.

Push the electric trunk lid button andraise the trunk lid when the latchreleases.

Without the remote release button:unlock the doors and trunk lid, thenpush the electric trunk lid opener andraise it when the latch releases.With The Advanced Keyless EntryFunctionA locked trunk lid can also be openedwhile the key fob is being carried. Whenopening the trunk lid with the doorslocked, it may require a few seconds forthe trunk lid latch to release after theelectric trunk lid opener is pushed.The trunk lid can be closed when thedoors are locked with the key fob left inthe vehicle. However, to prevent lockingthe key fob in the vehicle, the trunk lidcan be opened by pushing the electrictrunk lid opener. If the trunk lid cannotbe opened despite doing thisprocedure, push the electric trunk lid

04030201-R12-001

Interior Trunk Lid Release Button 04030201-12A-001

Electric Trunk Release Button

66

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

opener to fully open the trunk lid afterpushing the trunk lid completely closed.If the vehicle battery is discharged orthere is a malfunction in the electricalsystem and the trunk lid cannot beunlocked, the trunk lid can be openedby performing the emergencyprocedure.

When Trunk Lid CannotBe Opened

If the battery is discharged, the trunk lidcannot be unlocked and opened. In thiscase, the trunk can be unlocked bytaking care of the discharged batterysituation.If the trunk lid cannot be unlocked evenif the discharged battery situation hasbeen resolved, the electrical systemmay have a malfunction.Proceed as follows:

1. Close the convertible top andremove the windblocker.

2. Remove the fasteners on the rightside of the vehicle.

3. Partially peel back the cover on theright side of the vehicle.

4. Turn and loosen the cap screws untilthe screws start to spin free.Note: Do not pull the screw whenpulling the cap. Otherwise, the screwmay fall off and become lost.

Refer to “Trunk Emergency Release”located in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further information.

Closing

1. Use both hands to push the trunk liddown until the lock snaps shut. Do notslam it.

2. Pull up on the trunk lid to make sureit is secure.

08080100-125-002

Remove Windblocker

08080100-121-004

Remove Fasteners

08080100-122-001

Cover Removal

67

TRUNK EMERGENCYRELEASEAs a security measure, a trunk internalemergency release lever is built into therear tail panel. In the event of an adultor child being locked inside the trunk,the trunk can be simply opened bypulling down the lever and open thetrunk lid. After performing thisemergency measure, contact anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.

Trunk Safety Warning

Warning!

Do not allow children to have access to thetrunk, either by climbing into the trunk fromoutside, or through the inside of thevehicle. Always close the trunk lid whenyour vehicle is unattended. Once in thetrunk, young children may not be able toescape, even if they entered through therear seat. If trapped in the trunk, childrencan die from suffocation or heat stroke.

HOODOpening The Hood

To open the hood, proceed as follows:

1. With the vehicle in PARK, pull therelease handle located to the left of thesteering wheel, below the instrumentpanel.

2. Move to the outside of the vehicleand insert your hand into the hoodopening, then slide the latch lever to theright, and lift up the hood.

08080100-123-004

Trunk Emergency Release

07030201-L12-001

Releasing The Hood Latch

1 — Hood Release Handle

68

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

3. Pull up the support rod from the clip,and insert it into the support rod holeindicated by the arrow to hold the hoodopen.

Closing The Hood

To close the hood, proceed as follows:

1. Check under the hood area to makecertain all filler caps are in place and allloose items (e.g. tools, oil containers,etc.) have been removed.

2. Lift the hood with one hand, andwith the other hand grasp the paddedarea on the support rod.

3. Secure the support rod into the rodclip.

4. Verify that the support rod issecured in the clip before closing thehood.

5. Lower the hood slowly to a height ofabout 8 inches (20 cm) above its closedposition and then let it drop.

Warning!

Be sure the hood is fully latched beforedriving your vehicle. If the hood is not fullylatched, it could open when the vehicle isin motion and block your vision. Failure tofollow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.

Caution!

To prevent possible damage, do not slamthe hood to close it. Lower hood toapproximately 8 inches (20 cm) and dropthe hood to close. Make sure hood is fullyclosed for both latches. Never drive vehicleunless hood is fully closed, with bothlatches engaged.

07030201-122-001

Sliding The Latch Lever To TheRight

2 — Latch Lever

07030201-130-888

Support Rod Location

3 — Support Rod

07030201-123-002

Inserting Support Rod Into Hole

4 — Support Rod Hole

69

CONVERTIBLE TOP(SOFT TOP)Lowering TheConvertible Top

Warning!

Do not sit on the folded convertible top,otherwise the convertible top could bedamaged or you may fall off and be injured.

To lower the convertible top, Proceedas follows:

1. Make sure the parking brake isapplied and the engine is OFF.

2. Make sure there are no objectswhich have been placed in the areawhere the convertible top is to beretracted.

3. Push forward on the release latch.There is a red indicator showing thatthe latch is open.

4. With the lock release latch pushedforward (red indicator visible), pull thetop latch handle rearward to unlock it.

5. Remove the striker from the anchor.

Note: The power windows will godown automatically when theconvertible top is opened. If the powerwindows do not go down automatically,fully open the windows using the powerwindow switch located on the doors.

04110102-L36-006

Lock Release Latch

1 — Release Latch Closed2 — Release Latch Open

04110102-L21-001

Pulling The Top Latch HandleRearward

3 — Latch Release Handle

04110102-L22-002

Removing Striker From Anchor

4 — Striker5 — Anchor

70

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

6. Standing outside of the vehicle, holdthe convertible top along the front edgeand pull it toward the rear of the vehicle.To lower the convertible top from insidethe vehicle, use the convertible tophandles.

7. Move the convertible top rearwardand while pushing the rear glass lightlywith your hand.

8. With the back end of the convertibletop pushed down, push the front enduntil a latching sound is heard. Lightlyrock the retracted convertible top tomake sure it is securely locked.

Warning!

Always keep your hands and fingersaway from the fastening mechanisms whenmoving the convertible top: it is dangerousto place your hands or fingers near thefastening mechanisms. Your hands orfingers could be caught and injured by themechanism.

Sit in the seat with the seat beltcorrectly fastened when the vehicle ismoving: standing in the vehicle, or sittingon the convertible top storage area orcenter console when the vehicle is movingis a dangerous way to ride. During asudden maneuver or collision you could beseriously injured or even killed.

Raising The ConvertibleTop

To raise the convertible top, proceed asfollows:

1. Make sure the parking brake isapplied and the engine is OFF.

2. Pull the unlock lever upward todisengage the lock.

3. Standing outside of the vehicle, holdthe convertible top along the front edgeand pull it towards the vehicle front. Toraise the convertible top from inside thevehicle, use the convertible tophandles.

04110102-123-002AB

Convertible Top Handles

6 — Handles

04110102-126-001

Retracted Convertible Top

04110103-121-004

Unlock Lever Location

1 — Unlock Lever

71

4. While sitting in a seat, grasp theconvertible top handles, and push theconvertible top against the windshield.Make sure the striker engages with theanchor, move the top latch slowly, andthen push the top latch upward until alatching sound is heard.

5. If the red indicator is visible on thelock release button, the convertible topis not locked. After locking theconvertible top, verify that the redindicator is not visible.

Caution!

Driving with the convertible top not fullylocked could damage the convertible top.

Note:

Do not spray water directly near theseam of the window and convertibletop when flushing away dirt on the softtop with water. Otherwise, water mayenter the vehicle (refer to “ConvertibleTop Maintenance” in “Servicing AndMaintenance”).

04110103-L23-002

Convertible Handle Location

2 — Convertible Top Handles

04110103-L24-003

Convertible Top Components

4 — Closing Release Latch5 — Striker6 — Anchor

04110103-124-001

Lock Release Button

6 — Red Indicator7 — Release Latch Locked8 — Release Latch Unlocked

72

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

The convertible top may beconstricted if it is left retracted for along period. Therefore, if the top hasbecome constricted, it may be difficultto hook the top latch striker to theanchor.

Make sure the convertible top issecurely locked by pushing up on it. Ifit still sounds loose (rattles) after beinglocked by the top latch, contact anauthorized dealer.

Convertible TopPrecautions

Remove leaves or other debris thatmay accumulate on and around theconvertible top. If leaves or other debrisblock the drain filter, water may enterthe vehicle. Clean the drain filter at leastonce a year.

Before lowering or raising theconvertible top, stop in a safe place offof the road and park on a level surface.

When lowering the convertible top,make sure objects inside the vehicle arenot blown away by the wind.

Secure all loose objects inside beforedriving with the convertible top down.

To help prevent theft or vandalismand to ensure that the passengercompartment stays dry, close theconvertible top securely and lock bothdoors when leaving the vehicle.

The soft top is made of high qualitymaterial and if it is not maintainedcorrectly, the material could harden,becomes stained, or have an unevengloss.

Lowering the convertible top whileit's wet can also cause water to dripinto the cabin.

The power windows go downautomatically in conjunction with theconvertible top opening/closing.However, this is a function for improvingthe operability, and it does not meanthere is a problem. If the vehicle batteryis disconnected for vehicle maintenanceor other reasons, the power windowswill not go down automatically. If thepower windows do not go down, theautomatic open/close mechanism forthe windows must be reset.

The windblocker reduces the amountof wind coming into the cabin frombehind when driving with theconvertible top opened.

Before starting the vehicle make surethe convertible top is correctly locked.

Caution!

Before opening the convertible top,make sure the rear window defrosterswitch is turned off. Otherwise the heatgenerated from the window defrostercould damage the convertible top and theinternal material.

Make sure nothing is on the convertibletop or near the back window when raisingor lowering the convertible top. Even smallobjects may interfere and cause damage.

Do not drive through an automatic carwash; it may damage the convertible top.

Do not raise or lower the convertible topwhen the temperature is below 41 °F(5 °C); this will damage the convertible topmaterial.

Do not lower the convertible top whenit's wet. If the convertible top dries whilefolded, it will deteriorate and mold.

Do not raise or lower the convertible topin a strong wind as it could damage theconvertible top or cause an unexpectedaccident.

73

ELECTRIC POWERSTEERINGPower Steering

Electric power steering is only operablewhen the engine is running.If the engine is off or if the powersteering system is inoperable, you canstill steer, but it requires more physicaleffort.If the steering feels stiffer than usualduring normal driving or the steeringvibrates, contact your authorized dealer.The warning light notifies the driverof system abnormalities and operationconditions.Note: Never hold the steering wheel tothe extreme left or right for more thanfive seconds with the engine running.This could damage the power steeringsystem.

ENVIRONMENTPROTECTIONSYSTEMSEmission Control SystemThis vehicle is equipped with anemission control system (the catalyticconverter is part of this system) thatenables the vehicle to comply withexisting exhaust emissionsrequirements.Ignoring the following precautions couldcause lead to accumulate on thecatalyst inside the converter or causethe converter to get very hot. Eithercondition will damage the converter andcause poor performance:

USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.

Do not drive your vehicle with anysign of engine malfunction.

Do not coast with the ignition OFF.

Do not descend steep grades in gearwith the ignition OFF.

Do not operate the engine at highidle for more than two minutes.

Do not tamper with the emissioncontrol system. All inspections andadjustments must be made by yourauthorized dealer.

Do not push-start or pull-start yourvehicle.Under U.S. federal law, any modificationto the original-equipment emissioncontrol system before the first sale andregistration of a vehicle is subject topenalties. In some states, suchmodification made on a used vehicle isalso subject to penalties.While the engine is off, the sound of avalve opening and closing can be heardat the rear of the vehicle, however thisdoes not indicate an abnormality. Thevehicle has a self-checking device andit operates while the engine is off.

Warning!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if youpark over materials that can burn. Suchmaterials might be grass or leaves cominginto contact with your exhaust system. Donot park or operate your vehicle in areaswhere your exhaust system can contactanything that can burn.

74

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTROL PANEL ANDINSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76MAINTENANCE MONITOR — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82FUEL ECONOMY MONITOR — IFEQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85WARNING LIGHTS ANDMESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86PERSONALIZATION FEATURES . .105ONBOARD DIAGNOSTICSYSTEM — OBD II . . . . . . . . . . .109EMISSIONS INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . .110

75

CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTSInstrument Cluster

1 — Odometer/Trip Computer And Trip Computer Button/Dashboard Illumination2 — Tachometer3 — Speedometer4 — Automatic Transmission Info Display5 — Odometer/Trip Computer Info/Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge/Fuel Gauge/Outside Temperature/Cruise Control/InfoSwitch Display

05020100-667-333

Instrument Cluster

76

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Odometer/Trip Computer

The display mode can be changed fromodometer to “Trip computer A” to “Tripcomputer B” and then back toodometer by pushing the selector whileone of them is displayed.The selected mode will be displayed.

When the ignition is placed in the ACCor OFF position, the odometer or tripcannot be displayed. Pushing theselector can switch the trip or reset itfor a ten-minute period in the followingcases:

After the ignition is cycled to OFFfrom ON.

After the driver's door is opened.

OdometerThe odometer records the totaldistance the vehicle has been driven.Trip ComputerThe trip computer can record the totaldistance of two trips. One is recorded in“Trip A”, and the other is recorded in“Trip B”.For instance, “Trip A” can record thedistance from the point of origin, and“Trip B” can record the distance fromwhere the fuel tank is filled.When “Trip A” is selected, pushing theselector again within one second willchange to “Trip B” mode. When “Trip A”is selected, TRIP A will be displayed.When “Trip B” is selected, TRIP B willbe displayed.The trip computer records the totaldistance the vehicle is driven until themeter is again reset. Return it to “0.0”by depressing and holding the selectorfor one second or more.Use this meter to measure tripdistances and to compute fuelconsumption.

Vehicles With Fiat Connect 7.0: If thefuel economy data is reset using thefuel economy monitor or Trip “A” isreset using the trip meter, the fueleconomy data and Trip “A” are resetsimultaneously when the fuel economymonitor with the trip meter is on.Note: Only the trip records tenths ofmiles (kilometers).Trip Computer ResetThe trip computer will be erased when:

The power supply is interrupted(blown fuse or the battery isdisconnected).

The vehicle is driven over9999.9 miles.

05020102-121-001

Odometer/Trip Reset Button

1 — Odometer/Trip Reset Button

77

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the speedof the vehicle.

Instrument PanelIllumination

When the position lights are turned onwith the ignition switched ON, thebrightness of the instrument panelillumination is dimmed. When theposition lights are turned on, the

warning light in the instrumentcluster turns on (see “Headlights” in“Getting To Know Your Vehicle”chapter).

Brightness AdjustmentThe brightness of the instrument paneland dashboard illuminations can beadjusted by rotating the knob:

The brightness decreases by rotatingthe knob to the left. A beep sound willbe heard when the knob has beenrotated to the maximum dim position.

The brightness increases by rotatingthe knob to the right.

Cancelling Illumination DimmerRotate the knob to the right until a beepis heard while the instrument cluster isdimmed with the ignition switched ON.If the instrument cluster's visibility isreduced due to glare from surroundingbrightness, cancel the illuminationdimmer.When the illumination dimmer iscanceled, the instrument cluster cannotbe dimmed even if the position lightsare turned on. When the illuminationdimmer is canceled, the screen in thecenter display switches to constantdisplay of the daytime screen.

Trip Computer And InfoSwitch

The following information can beselected by pushing the INFO switchwith the ignition in the ON position:

Distance-to-empty (approximatedistance you can travel on the availablefuel).

Average fuel economy.

Current fuel economy.

Average vehicle speed.If you have any problems with your tripcomputer, contact an authorized dealer.

05020102-121-001

Dimmer Knob

1 — Instrument Cluster IlluminationDimmer Knob

0620500-122-001

Instrument Cluster Display Controls

78

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Distance-To-Empty ModeThis mode displays the approximatedistance you can travel on theremaining fuel based on the fueleconomy.The distance-to-empty will becalculated and displayed every second.

Note:

Even though the distance-to-emptydisplay may indicate a sufficientamount of remaining driving distancebefore refueling is required, refuel assoon as possible if the fuel level is verylow or the low fuel warning lightilluminates.

The display may not change unlessyou add more than approximately2.3 gallons (9 liters) of fuel.

The distance-to-empty is theapproximate remaining distance thevehicle can be driven until all thegraduation marks in the fuel gauge(indicating the remaining fuel supply)disappear.

If there is no past fuel economyinformation such as after firstpurchasing your vehicle or theinformation is deleted when the batterycables are disconnected, the actualdistance-to empty/range may differfrom the amount indicated.

Average Fuel Economy ModeThis mode displays the average fueleconomy by calculating the total fuelconsumption and the total traveleddistance since purchasing the vehicle,reconnecting the battery afterdisconnection, or resetting the data.The average fuel economy is calculatedand displayed every minute. To clearthe data being displayed, push theINFO switch for more than 1.5 seconds.After pushing the INFO switch,“- - - mpg” (“- - - L/100 km”) will bedisplayed for about 1 minute before thefuel economy is recalculated anddisplayed.

Current Fuel Economy ModeThis mode displays the current fueleconomy by calculating the amount offuel consumption and the distancetraveled. Current fuel economy will becalculated and displayed every twoseconds.When you've slowed to about 3 MPH(5 km/h) , “- - - mpg” (“- - - L/100 km”)will be displayed.

0502011019A019

Distance To Empty Display Screen

05020110199019

Current Fuel Economy DisplayScreen

79

Average Vehicle Speed ModeThis mode displays the average vehiclespeed by calculating the distance andthe time traveled since connecting thebattery or resetting the data.Average vehicle speed will becalculated and displayed every10 seconds. To clear the data beingdisplayed, push the INFO switch formore than 1.5 seconds.

After pushing the INFO switch,“- - - MPH” (“- - - km/h”) will bedisplayed for about 1 minute before thevehicle speed is recalculated anddisplayed.

Tachometer

The tachometer shows engine speed inthousands of revolutions per minute(rpm).The range varies depending on the typeof gauge.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge AndFuel Gauge

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

Note: If the high engine coolanttemperature warning light (red) turnson, there is a possibility of overheating.

0502011020110C

Average Vehicle Speed DisplayScreen

05020103-12A-002

Tachometer

1 — Tachometer Display

0502010417A007

Fuel/Temperature Gauge

1 — Engine Coolant Temperature2 — Fuel Gauge

80

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Park the vehicle in a safe placeimmediately and take appropriatemeasures. If the vehicle continues to bedriven, it could cause damage to theengine.Fuel GaugeThe fuel gauge 2 shows approximatelyhow much fuel is remaining in the tankwhen the ignition is in the ON position.We recommend keeping the tank over1/4 full.

E = Empty

F = FullIf the low fuel warning light illuminatesor the fuel level is very low, refuel assoon as possible.

Note:

After refueling, it may require sometime for the indicator to stabilize. Inaddition, the indicator may deviatewhile driving on a slope or curve sincethe fuel moves in the tank.

The display indicating a quarter orless remaining fuel has more segmentsto show the remaining fuel level ingreater detail.

The direction of the arrow on thefuel gauge indicates that the fuel doorlid is on the left side of the vehicle.

Outside TemperatureDisplay

When the ignition is in the ON position,the outside temperature is displayed.

Under the following conditions, theoutside temperature display may differfrom the actual outside temperaturedepending on the surroundings andvehicle conditions:

Significantly cold or hottemperatures.

Sudden changes in outsidetemperature.

The vehicle is parked.

The vehicle is driven at low speeds.

Changing The Temperature Unit OfThe Outside Temperature DisplayThe outside temperature unit can beswitched between Fahrenheit andCelsius using the following procedure.Vehicles With Fiat Connect 7.0Settings can be changed through theConnect 7.0 radio screen. Refer to“Personalization Features” in thischapter.Vehicles With Fiat Radio 3.0Proceed as follows:

1. Push the INFO switch with theignition in the OFF position andcontinue pushing the INFO switch for5 seconds or longer while placing theignition in the ON position. The outsidetemperature display flashes.

2. Push the INFO switch to change theoutside temperature unit.

3. Push and hold the INFO switch for3 seconds or longer while the outsidetemperature display is flashing. Theoutside temperature display illuminates.Note: When the temperature unitindicated in the outside temperaturedisplay is changed, the temperatureunit indicated in the engine coolantgauge display changes in conjunctionwith it.

05020107345034

Outside Temperature ScreenDisplay

81

Cruise Control SetVehicle Speed Display

The vehicle speed preset using thecruise control is displayed.

MAINTENANCEMONITOR — IFEQUIPPEDOil Life Reset

Vehicles With Fiat Radio 3.0“Oil Change” with flexible settings areavailable. Consult an authorized dealerfor details.Note: The engine oil flexiblemaintenance setting is available (ifequipped). Based on the engineoperating conditions, the on-boardcomputer in your vehicle calculates theremaining oil life. When the engine oilflexible maintenance setting is selected,the system must be reset wheneverreplacing the engine oil.When the engine oil flexiblemaintenance setting is selected, theIndicator light will illuminate in theinstrument cluster when remaining oillife becomes less than 300 miles(500 km) or remaining days are lessthan 15 (whichever comes first).Reset MethodYour vehicle is equipped with an engineoil change indicator system. The “OilChange Required” message will flash inthe instrument cluster display forapproximately ten seconds after a singlechime has sounded to indicate the nextscheduled oil change interval. The engineoil change indicator system is duty cyclebased, which means the engine oilchange interval may fluctuate, dependentupon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continueto display each time you turn theignition switch to the ON/RUN position.To reset the oil change indicator system(after performing the scheduledmaintenance), refer to the followingprocedure

1. Place the ignition in the ON position.(Do not start the engine.)

2. Fully push the accelerator pedalslowly to the floor, three times within tenseconds.

3. Place the ignition in the OFF/LOCKposition.Note: If the indicator messageilluminates when you start the vehicle,the oil change indicator system did notreset. If necessary, repeat thisprocedure.

Oil Life Reset

Vehicles With FIAT Connect7.0 RadioProceed as follows:

1. Select the icon on the homescreen to display the “Applications”screen.

2. Select “Maintenance” to display themaintenance list screen.

3. Switch the tab and select the settingitem you want to change: “Scheduled,”“Tire Rotation,” or “Oil Change.”

0502010819A019

Cruise Control Display Screen

82

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Oil Life Monitor

You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:

Tab Item Explanation

Scheduled

Setting Notification can be turned on/off.

Time (months)

Displays the time or distance untilmaintenance is due. Select this item to set

the maintenance period. “Scheduled Due!” isdisplayed in red, and the indicator light will

illuminate in the instrument cluster when theremaining distance is less than 300 mi

(500 km) or the remaining number of days isless than 15 (whichever comes first).

Distance (mile or km)

ResetResets the time and distance to the initial

values. Once the system turns on, it needs tobe reset whenever carrying out maintenance.

Tire Rotation

Setting Notification can be switched on/off.

Distance (mile or km)

Displays the distance until tire rotation is due.Select this item to set the tire rotation

distance. “Tire Rotation Due!” is displayed inred and the wrench indicator light will

illuminate in the instrument cluster when theremaining distance is less than 300 mi

(500 km).

ResetResets the remaining distance to the initial

value. Once the system turns on, it needs tobe reset whenever rotating the tires.

83

Tab Item Explanation

Oil Change

Setting Notification can be switched on/off.

Distance (mile or km)

Displays the distance until an oil change isdue. Select this item to set the oil changedistance. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed inred, and the indicator light will illuminate inthe instrument cluster when the remaining

distance is less than 300 mi (500 km).

ResetResets the remaining distance to the initial

value. Once the system turns on, it needs tobe reset whenever replacing the engine oil.

Oil life (%)

Displays the engine oil life until an oil changeis due. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red

and the indicator light will illuminate in theinstrument cluster when remaining oil lifedistance is less than 300 mi (500 km), or

remaining days are less than 15 (whichevercomes first).

ResetResets the remaining oil life to 100%. The

system must be reset whenever replacing theengine oil.

(*) The engine oil flexible maintenance setting is available (only some models). Consult an authorized dealer for details. When theengine oil flexible maintenance setting is selected, you will see the following items in the display.The vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on the engine operating conditions and lets you know when an oil change isdue by illuminating the indicator light in the instrument cluster.

84

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

FUEL ECONOMYMONITOR — IFEQUIPPEDDescription

Versions With Fiat Connect 7.0The “Fuel Consumption” information isdisplayed by operating each icon in thedisplay.In addition, after completing a trip, thetotal energy efficiency to date isdisplayed in the ending display whenthe ending display is turned on.Proceed as follows:

1. Select the icon on the homescreen to display the applications screen.

2. Select the “Fuel Economy Monitor”.

3. Operate the Multimedia ControlKnob or touch the screen and displaythe menu.Note: When the menu is displayed bytouching the screen, the display ishidden automatically after 6 seconds.Select the icon in the menu andperform the operation. Each iconoperates as follows:

1. Hides the menu display.

2. Displays the application screen.

3. Resets the fuel economy data.

4. Displays the following settingscreen: ending display on/off switching- On/off switching for function which

synchronizes reset fuel economy datato trip meter (Trip A).

Fuel ConsumptionDisplay

Information regarding fuel economy isdisplayed:

1. Displays the fuel economy for thepast 60 minutes:

Displays the fuel economy everyminute for the past 1 to 10 minutes.

Displays the fuel economy every10 minutes for the past 10 to60 minutes.

2. Displays the average fuel economyover the past five resets and after thecurrent reset.

3. Calculates the average fueleconomy every minute after vehicletravel begins, and displays it.

Note: The fuel economy data can bereset by doing the following operation:

Push the reset switch from themenu screen.

When the function, whichsynchronizes the fuel economy monitorand the trip meter, is on, reset Trip A ofthe trip meter.

Delete the average fuel economyinformation displayed in the tripcomputer.

After resetting the fuel economy data,“-- -” is displayed while the average fueleconomy is calculated.

Ending Screen Display

If the ending display on the fueleconomy monitor is on when theignition is cycled from ON position tothe OFF position, the informationregarding the fuel economy isdisplayed.

05240100-36A-003

Fuel Economy Display Screen

05240101-36A-004

Average Fuel Economy DisplayScreen

85

WARNING LIGHTSAND MESSAGESWarning Lights AndMessages

Note:

The warning light in the instrumentpanel appears together with adedicated message and/or acousticsignal when applicable. Theseindications are indicative andprecautionary and as such must not beconsidered as exhaustive and/oralternative to the information containedin the Owner’s Manual, which you areadvised to read carefully in all cases.Always refer to the information in thischapter in the event of a failureindication.

Failure indications displayed aredivided into two categories: seriousand less serious failures. Seriousfailures are indicated by a repeatedand prolonged warning "cycle". Lessserious failures are indicated by awarning "cycle" with a shorter duration.The display cycle of both categoriescan be interrupted. The instrumentpanel warning light will stay on until thecause of the failure is eliminated.

Vehicles With Fiat Connect 7.0The warning contents can be verifiedon the audio system.Proceed as follows:

1. If the warning light is turned on,select icon on the home screen todisplay the application screen.

2. Select “ Warning Guidance” todisplay the current warnings.

3. Select the applicable warning toview the warning details.For the following warning/indicatorlights:

Master Warning Light

Brake System Warning Light

ABS Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Engine Oil Warning Light

Electric Throttle Warning Light

Cold Start Warning Light

Check Engine Warning Light

Coolant Temperature Warning Light

Automatic Transmission WarningLight

Power Steering Malfunction IndicatorLight

Air Bag/Seat Belt PretensionerSystem Warning Light

Check Fuel Cap Warning Light

Low Fuel Warning Light

Seat Belt Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light

Low Washer Fluid Level WarningLight

Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemWarning Light

KEY Warning Light

LED Headlight KEY Warning Light

BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) OFFIndicator Light

TCS/DSC Indicator Light

DSC OFF Indicator Light

Security Indicator Light

Indicator Light

Passenger Air Bag DeactivationWarning LightThe light turns on when the ignition isswitched on for an operation check,and turns off a few seconds later orwhen the engine is started. If the lightdoes not turn on or remains turned on,have the vehicle inspected at anauthorized dealer.Note: Only for “Brake System WarningLight:” the light turns on continuouslywhen the parking brake is applied.

86

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Parking Brake Warning - Warning Light Inspection/Low Brake Fluid Level WarningParking Brake Warning / Warning Light InspectionThe light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switched to START orON. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released.Low Brake Fluid Level WarningIf the brake warning light remains illuminated even though the parking brake is released, thebrake fluid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake system. Park the vehicle in asafe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Note:

Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer tohave the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving with the brake system warning lightilluminated is dangerous. It indicates that your brakes may not work at all or that they couldcompletely fail at any time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brakeis fully released, have the brakes inspected immediately.

The effectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to push the brake pedalmore strongly than normal to stop the vehicle.Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

EBD (Electronic Brake-Force Distribution) System WarningIf the EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) control unit determines that some componentsare operating incorrectly, the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning light and theABS warning light simultaneously. The problem is likely to be the electronic brake forcedistribution system. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorizeddealer.

Note:

Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated. Contact anauthorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving when the brakesystem warning light and ABS warning light are illuminated simultaneously is dangerous.

When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an emergencystop than under normal circumstances.

87

Warning Light What It Means

Alternator FailureIf the warning light illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction of the alternator or of thecharging system. Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Stop the vehicle ina safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Note:Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated because theengine could stop unexpectedly.

Low Engine Oil PressureThis warning light indicates low engine oil pressure.

Note:Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive enginedamage.If the light illuminates or the warning indication is displayed while driving:Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way on level ground.Turn off the engine and wait five minutes for the oil to drain back into the sump.Inspect the engine oil level. If it's low, add the appropriate amount of engine oil while beingcareful not to overfill.Start the engine and check the warning light.

Note:Do not run the engine if the oil level is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage.If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil, stop theengine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Door-Open Warning LightThe light turns on if any door is not closed securely.Close the door securely.

Warning!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. Youcould have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

88

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning LightThe light flashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high, and illuminates whenthe engine coolant temperature increases further.Handling Procedure

Flashing Light: drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can find a safe place to stopthe vehicle and wait for the engine to cool down.

Illuminated Light: this indicates the possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safeplace immediately and stop the engine. Refer to “Overheating” in “In Case Of Emergency” forfurther information.

Note:Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminated.Otherwise, it could result in damage to the engine.

Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System WarningA system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly illuminatesor does not illuminate at all when the ignition is placed in the ON position. If any of these occur,contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not operate in an accident.

89

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Key Warning Light — IlluminatedIf any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system, it illuminates continuously.

Note:If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light (amber)flashes, the engine may not start. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Key Warning Light — FlashingAdvanced Key Fob MalfunctionTake the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off.

The advanced key fob battery is discharged: replace the key fob battery.

The advanced key fob is not within the operation range/is placed in areas insidethe cabin where it is difficult for the key to be detected: bring the advanced key fob intothe operation range.

A key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key fob is in theoperation range: take the key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key outof the operation range.

Without the ignition switched OFF, the advanced key is taken out of the vehicle,and then all the doors are closed: bring the advanced key fob back into the vehicle.

Vehicle Security Alarm SystemThe warning light switches on to report a failure of the vehicle security alarm system. Contactan authorized dealer as soon as possible.

90

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

ABS Warning LightIf the ABS warning light stays on while you're driving, when the ABS control unit has detected asystem malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had noABS. Should this happen contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Note:

When the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven RPM occurs and the ABSwarning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it is the result of the weak battery and does notindicate an ABS malfunction. Recharge the battery.

The brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated.

Malfunction Indicator LightIf this light illuminates while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to note thedriving conditions when the light illuminated and contact an authorized dealer.The malfunction indicator light may illuminate in the following cases:

The engine's electrical system has a problem.

The emission control system has a problem.

The fuel tank level is very low or approaching empty.

The fuel-filler cap is missing or not tightened securely.If the malfunction indicator light remains on, or it flashes continuously, do not drive at highspeeds and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can causea fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or seriousinjury to the driver, occupants or others.

91

Caution!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fueleconomy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service isrequired.

92

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Warning Light — If EquippedThe warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure islower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show theindications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

Note:Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop thevehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repairkit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflatedto the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’shandling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-upsas long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system maynot be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur fora variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

93

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tiresize equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not ofthe same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicleto an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

94

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Power Steering Malfunction Indicator LightThe light illuminates if the electric power steering has a malfunction. If the light illuminates, stopthe vehicle in a safe place and do not operate the steering wheel. There is no problem if the lightturns off after a while. Contact an authorized dealer if the light illuminates continuously.

Note:

If the indicator light illuminates, the power steering will not operate normally. If this happens,the steering wheel can still be operated, however, the operation may feel heavy compared tonormal, or the steering wheel could vibrate when turning.

Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or movingextremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective mode which willmake the steering feel heavy, but this does not indicate a problem. If this occurs, park thevehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return to normal.

95

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Automatic Transmission Warning Light — If EquippedThe light illuminates when the transmission has a problem.

Note:If the automatic transmission warning light illuminates, the transmission has an electricalproblem. Continuing to drive your vehicle in this condition could cause damage to yourtransmission. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Master Warning LightVehicles Equipped With Fiat Connect 3.0 SystemThe warning light turns on continuously if there is a malfunction in the battery management systemor there is a malfunction in the brake switch. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Vehicles Equipped With Fiat Connect 7.0 SystemThe warning light turns on when the system has a malfunction. Operate the center display andverify the content.

Cold Start Disable Indicator LightWhen the ambient temperature is extremely low, the engine may not crank even when the enginestarting procedure is performed. At this time, the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in the instrumentcluster flashes. However, this does not indicate a problem.

Note:Place your vehicle in a warm garage until the temperature has risen to a sufficient level to enableengine starting.

Electric Throttle Control Warning LightThis light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problemis detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash dependingon the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completelystopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If thelight remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see anauthorized dealer for service as soon as possible.If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and youmay experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle mayrequire towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain onbriefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer.

96

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Lights What It Means

Led Headlight Warning LightThis light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the LED headlight. Contact an authorized dealeras soon as possible.

BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) Off Indicator Light — If EquippedA problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions:

The light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON position.

The light remains turned on even if the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch is operated.

It turns on while driving the vehicle.Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors candetect, the system may pause (the warning light illuminates). However, it does not indicate amalfunction.

Low Fuel Warning LightThe light turns on when the remaining fuel is about 2.3 gallons (9.0 liters).The light illumination timing may vary because fuel inside the fuel tank moves around accordingto the driving conditions and the vehicle posture. Add fuel.

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light — If EquippedThis warning light indicates that little washer fluid remains. Add washer fluid.

Cruise Control Activation — If EquippedThe warning light illuminates when the cruise control system is activated.

97

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

TCS / DSC System Indicator LightThe warning light turns on when the in case of intervention of TCS/DSC systems. This meansthat the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

DSC Off Indicator LightThe warning light turns on when the DSC system is deactivated.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator LightIf the check fuel filler cap warning light illuminates while driving, the fuel filler cap may not beinstalled properly. Stop the engine and reinstall the fuel filler cap.

98

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Green Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Left Direction IndicatorThe warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved downwards or,together with the right direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Right Direction IndicatorThe warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved upwards or,together with the left direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Parking Lights And Normal Beam HeadlightsThe warning light turns on when parking lights or normal beam headlights are turned on.

Cruise Control — If EquippedThe warning light turns on when a cruising speed has been set.

Key Indicator LightThe warning light turns on when the engine is ready to start.Warning Light FlashingWhen the keyless START/STOP button is pushed from ON to ACC or OFF position, the warninglight may flash for approximately 30 seconds indicating that the remaining battery power of thekey is low. Replace with a new battery before the key becomes unusable.

99

Blue Warning Light

Warning Light What It Means

High Beam HeadlightsThe warning light switches on when the high beam headlights are turned on.

Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator LightThe light illuminates continuously when the engine coolant temperature is low and turns off afterthe engine is warm.If the low engine coolant temperature indicator light remains illuminated after the engine hasbeen sufficiently warmed up, the temperature sensor could have a malfunction. Contact anauthorized dealer.

100

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Warning Light (Red Color) On Dashboard Trim

Warning Light What It Means

Seat Belt Warning LightThe seat belt warning light turns on if the driver or passengers seat is occupied and the seatbelt is not fastened with the ignition placed in the ON position.If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened (only when the passenger seat is occupied)and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 12 MPH (20 km/h), the warning lightflashes. After a short time, the LED stops flashing, but remains illuminated.If a seat belt remains unfastened, the LED flashes again for a given period of time.If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened after the LED turns on, and the vehicle speedexceeds 12 MPH (20 km/h), the LED flashes again.With Passenger Occupant Classification System: to allow the passenger occupantclassification sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion onthe passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushioncould cause sensor interference.Without Passenger Occupant Classification System: placing heavy items on thepassengers seat may cause the passengers seat belt warning function to operate dependingon the weight of the item. To allow the passengers seat weight sensor to function properly, donot place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may notfunction properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. If asmall child is seated on the passengers seat, the warning light may not operate.Fasten the seat belts.

Warning Light (Amber Color) On Instrument Cluster Trim

Warning Light What It Means

Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator LightThe light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a fewseconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on,contact an authorized dealer.

101

Message Indicated OnDisplay — If EquippedWith Fiat Connect7.0 System

If a message is displayed in the centerdisplay, take appropriate action (in acalm manner) according to thedisplayed message.If the following messages are displayedin the center display, a vehicle systemmay be malfunctioning:

Engine Coolant TemperatureHigh: displays if the engine coolanttemperature has increased excessively.

Charging System Malfunction:displays if the charging system has amalfunction.

Temperature Warning: thefollowing message is displayed whenthe temperature around the centerdisplay is high. Lowering thetemperature of the inside of the vehicleor the temperature around the centerdisplay by avoiding direct sunlight isrecommended.Stop the vehicle in a safe place andcontact an authorized dealer.

Warning Sound IsActivated

Lights-On ReminderIf lights are on and the ignition is placedin the ACC position, or the ignition isplaced in the OFF position, acontinuous beep sound will be heardwhen the driver's door is opened.

Note:

When the ignition is placed in theACC position, the “Ignition Not CycledOff Warning Beep” overrides thelights-on reminder.

A personalized function is availableto change the sound volume for thelights-on reminder.

Air Bag/Seat Belt PretensionerSystem Warning BeepIf there is a problem with the airbag/seat belt pretensioner systems andthe warning light illumination, a warningbeep sound will be heard for about5 seconds every minute.The air bag and seat belt pretensionersystem warning beep sound willcontinue to be heard for approximately35 minutes. Contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

Do not drive the vehicle with the airbag/seat belt pretensioner system warningbeep sounding. Driving the vehicle with theair bag/seat belt pretensioner systemwarning beep sounding is dangerous. In acollision, the air bags and the seat beltpretensioner system will not deploy and thiscould result in death or serious injury.Contact an authorized dealer as soon aspossible.

Seat Belt Warning BeepExcept MexicoIf the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition is in the ON position,a beep sound will be heard for aboutsix seconds.If the driver or the passengers seat beltis not fastened and the vehicle is drivenat a speed faster than about 12 MPH(20 km/h), a beep sound will be heardagain for a specified period of time.Until a seat belt is fastened or a givenperiod of time has elapsed, the beepsound will not stop even if the vehiclespeed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h).

102

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Note:

To allow the passenger occupantclassification sensor to functionproperly, do not place and sit on anadditional seat cushion on thepassengers seat. The sensor may notfunction properly because theadditional seat cushion could causesensor interference.

If a small child is seated on thepassengers seat, the warning beepmay not operate.

MexicoIf the vehicle speed exceeds about12 MPH (20 km/h) with the driver orpassengers seat belt unfastened, awarning beep sounds continuously. Ifthe seat belt remains unfastened, thebeep sound stops once and thencontinues for about 90 seconds. Thebeep stops after the driver orpassengers seat belt is fastened.Until a seat belt is fastened or a givenperiod of time has elapsed, the beepsound will not stop even if the vehiclespeed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h).

Warning!

Placing heavy items on the frontpassenger seat may cause the frontpassenger seat belt warning function tooperate depending on the weight of theitem.

To allow the front passenger seat weightsensor to function properly, do not placeand sit on an additional seat cushion on thefront passenger seat. The sensor may notfunction properly because the additionalseat cushion could cause sensorinterference.

When a small child sits on the frontpassenger seat, it is possible that thewarning beep will not operate.

Ignition Not Switched OFFIf the driver's door is opened while theignition is placed in the ACC position, acontinuous beep sound will be heard tonotify the driver that the ignition has notbeen placed in the OFF position.Left in this condition, the keyless entrysystem will not operate, the car cannotbe locked, and the battery power willbe depleted.

Key Removed From VehicleWarning BeepA beep sound will be heard six timesand the warning light (red) will flashcontinuously if the ignition has not beenplaced in the OFF position, all the doorsare closed, and the key fob is removedfrom the vehicle.This is to notify the driver that the keyfob has been removed from the vehicleand the ignition has not been placed inthe OFF position.

Note: Because the key fob useslow-intensity radio waves, the

warning may activate if the key fobis carried together with a metal objector it is placed in a poor signal receptionarea.Request Switch Inoperable WarningBeep — If Equipped With AdvancedKeyless FunctionIf the request switch on the exteriordoor handle is pushed with a dooropen, or the ignition has not beenplaced in the OFF position, a beep willbe heard for about two seconds toindicate that the doors, and trunk lidcannot be locked.

103

Key Left-In-Trunk CompartmentWarning Beep — If Equipped WithAdvanced Keyless FunctionIf the key fob is left in the trunk with alldoors locked and the trunk lid closed, abeep sound is heard for about tenseconds to remind the driver the keyfob has been left in the trunk.If this happens, open the trunk lid bypushing the electric trunk lid openerand remove the key fob.A key fob removed from the trunk maynot function because its functions mayhave been temporarily suspended. Torestore the key fob function, performthe applicable procedure (seeparagraph “Keys” in “Getting to knowyour vehicle” chapter).Key Left-In-Vehicle Warning Beep(with the advanced keyless function)If a key fob is left in the vehicle and allthe doors and the trunk are lockedusing a separate key fob, a beep soundis heard for about ten seconds toremind the driver that the key fob hasbeen left in the vehicle.If this happens, open the door andremove the key fob. A key fob removedfrom the vehicle this way may notfunction because its functions mayhave been temporarily suspended.

Perform the applicable procedure torestore the functions of the key fob (seeparagraph “Keys” in “Getting To KnowYour Vehicle” chapter).Vehicle Speed Alarm — If EquippedThe vehicle speed alarm function isdesigned to alarm the driver via a singlebeep sound and a warning indication inthe instrument cluster that thepreviously set vehicle speed has beenexceeded.You can change the vehicle speedsetting at which the warning is triggered(see paragraph “Trip Computer” in“Getting To Know Your Vehicle”chapter).Tire Inflation Pressure WarningBeep — If EquippedVehicle With Conventional Tires: thewarning beep sound will be heard forabout three seconds when there is anyabnormality in tire inflation pressures(see “TMPS” in “Safety” chapter).Vehicle With Run-Flat Tires (IfEquipped): the warning beep sound willbe heard for about three seconds if thetire pressures decrease. If the tirepressure decreases extremely, a beepsound will be heard for approximately30 seconds (see “TMPS” in “Safety”chapter).

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)System Warning Beep — IfEquippedDriving Forward: the warning beepoperates when the direction indicatorlever is operated to the side where theBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warninglight is illuminated.Note: A personalized function isavailable to change the Blind SpotMonitoring (BSM) warning beep soundvolume.Reversing: if a moving object such asa vehicle or two-wheeled vehicleapproaches on the left or right frombehind your vehicle, the Blind SpotMonitoring (BSM) warning sound isactivated.Electronic Steering Lock WarningBeepThe warning beep operates if thesteering wheel is not unlocked after thekeyless ignition START/STOP button ispushed.Speed Limiter Warning Beep — IfEquippedIf the vehicle speed exceeds the setspeed by about 2 MPH (3 km/h) ormore, a warning beep operatescontinuously.The warning beep operates until thevehicle speed decreases to the setspeed or less.

104

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

PERSONALIZATION FEATURESOverview

The following Personalization Features can be set or changed by the customer or by an authorized dealer.Personalization Features differ depending on the market and specification.Settings change method

1. Settings can be changed by operating the center display screen

A: Refer to the “Settings” paragraph in Fiat Connect 7.0 Supplement for further information.

B: Refer to “Fuel Economy Monitor” paragraph in this chapter.

2. Settings can be changed by operating the vehicle switches

C: Refer to “Auto Lock/Unlock Function” paragraph in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

D: Refer to “Key Fob” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

E: Refer to “Lock/Unlock With Request Switch (With The Advanced Keyless Function)” (Doors) in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further information.

3. Settings can be changed by an authorized dealer (refer to the following table)

X: Refer to your authorized dealer for setting change.

Item Feature Factory Setting Available SettingsSettings Change Method

1 2 3

Safety

Blind SpotMonitoringSystem (ifequipped)

Warning Beep Volume (*) High High/Low/Off A — X

105

Item Feature Factory Setting Available SettingsSettings Change Method

1 2 3

Vehicle

Door Locks Operation condition ofauto lock/unlock function

Lock: WhenDriving/Unlock: IGN

Off

Lock: WhenDriving/Unlock: In

Park/Lock: Out of ParkUnlock: In Park/Lock:Shifting Out of Park/Lock: When Driving

Unlock: IGN Off/ Lock:When Driving/Off

A C X

KeylessEntrySystem

Time for locking doorautomatically 30 seconds

90 seconds/60 seconds/30

secondsA — X

AdvancedKeylessEntrySystem

Time for locking doorautomatically 30 seconds

90 seconds/60 seconds/30

secondsA — X

Auto-lock functionoperation/non operational Off On/Off A — X

Beep volume whenlocking/unlocking Off or Medium High/Medium/Low/Off A D/E X

IlluminatedEntrySystem

Time until interior lightsturn off after closing door 15 seconds

60 seconds/30 seconds/15

seconds/7.5 secondsA — X

Time until interior lightsturn off automaticallywhen any door is not

closed completely

30 minutes 60 minutes/30 minutes/10 minutes A — X

Auto-WiperControl

Operational/non-operational On On/Off (**) A — X

106

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

Item Feature Factory Setting Available SettingsSettings Change Method

1 2 3

DaytimeRunningLights (DRL)

Operational/non-operational On On/Off — — X

Autoheadlightoff (***)

Time until headlights turnoff 30 second

120 seconds/90 seconds/60 seconds/

30 seconds/Off (****)

A — X

Auto-LightControl

Timing by which lightsturn on Medium

High/Med.High/Medium/Med.

Low/LowA — X

AdaptiveFrontLightingSystem(AFS)

Operational/non-operational (***) On On/Off A — X

Lights-OnReminder Warning beep volume High High/Low/Off A — X

ComingHomeSystem

Time until headlights turnoff 30 seconds

120 seconds/90 seconds/60

seconds/30 seconds/Off

A — X

LeavingHome LightSystem

Operational/Non-operational On or Off On/Off A — X

Turn Signals Beep volume Low High/Low A — X

Three-FlashTurn Signal

Operational/Non-operational On or Off On/Off A — X

107

Item Feature Factory Setting Available SettingsSettings Change Method

1 2 3

System

Language Language indicated indisplay English Depends on

market (****) A — X

Temperature Temperature unitindicated in display °C °F/°C A — X

Distance Distance unit indicated indisplay mi or km mi/km A — X

Fuel Economy Monitor

EndingDisplay On/Off Off On/Off B — X

FuelEconomyResettingProcedure

Linkage/non-linkage withfuel economy reset and

trip meter resetOff On/Off B — X

(—) Feature setting change not available.(*) Only the volume of the warning beep during Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) operation can be changed. The volume of thewarning beep during Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) operation cannot be changed.(**) If the auto-wiper control is set to Off, the wiper lever AUTO position is set to intermittent operation.(***) Though these systems can be turned Off, doing so will defeat the purpose of the system and FCA recommends that thesesystems remain On.(****) Available only in display from the center display.

108

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

ONBOARDDIAGNOSTICSYSTEM — OBD IIYour vehicle is equipped with asophisticated Onboard Diagnosticsystem called OBD II. This systemmonitors the performance of theemissions, engine, and automatictransmission control systems. Whenthese systems are operating properly,your vehicle will provide excellentperformance and fuel economy, as wellas engine emissions well within currentgovernment regulations.If any of these systems require service,the OBD II system will turn on theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It willalso store diagnostic codes and otherinformation to assist your servicetechnician in making repairs. Althoughyour vehicle will usually be drivable andnot need towing, see your authorizeddealer for service as soon as possible.

Caution!

Prolonged driving with the MIL on couldcause further damage to the emissioncontrol system. It could also affect fueleconomy and driveability. The vehicle mustbe serviced before any emissions tests canbe performed.

If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle isrunning, severe catalytic converter damageand power loss will soon occur. Immediateservice is required.

Onboard DiagnosticSystem (OBD II)Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have anOnboard Diagnostic system (OBD II)and a connection port to allow accessto information related to theperformance of your emissionscontrols. Authorized service techniciansmay need to access this information toassist with the diagnosis and service ofyour vehicle and emissions system.

Warning!

ONLY an authorized service technicianshould connect equipment to the OBD IIconnection port in order to diagnose orservice your vehicle.

If unauthorized equipment is connectedto the OBD II connection port, such as adriver-behavior tracking device, it may:

Be possible that vehicle systems,including safety related systems, could beimpaired or a loss of vehicle control couldoccur that may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.

Access, or allow others to access,information stored in your vehicle systems,including personal information.

For further information, refer to“CyberSecurity” in “Tips, Controls, andGeneral Information” in your Owner’sManual Radio Supplement.

109

EMISSIONSINSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCEPROGRAMSIn some localities, it may be a legalrequirement to pass an inspection ofyour vehicle's emissions controlsystem. Failure to pass could preventvehicle registration.

For states that requirean Inspection andMaintenance (I/M), thischeck verifies the“Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL)” isfunctioning and is not

on when the engine is running, and thatthe OBD II system is ready for testing.Normally, the OBD II system will beready. The OBD II system may not beready if your vehicle was recentlyserviced, recently had a dead battery ora battery replacement. If the OBD IIsystem should be determined not readyfor the I/M test, your vehicle may fail thetest.

Your vehicle has a simple ignitionactuated test, which you can use priorto going to the test station. To check ifyour vehicle's OBD II system is ready,you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ONposition, but do not crank or start theengine.

Note: If you crank or start the engine,you will have to start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignitionswitch to the ON position, you will seethe “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”symbol come on as part of a normalbulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, oneof two things will happen:

The MIL will flash for about10 seconds and then return to beingfully illuminated until you turn OFF theignition or start the engine. This meansthat your vehicle's OBD II system is notready and you should not proceed tothe I/M station.

The MIL will not flash at all and willremain fully illuminated until you placethe ignition in the off position or startthe engine. This means that yourvehicle's OBD II system is ready andyou can proceed to the I/M station.If your OBD II system is not ready, youshould see your authorized dealer orrepair facility. If your vehicle wasrecently serviced or had a battery failureor replacement, you may need to donothing more than drive your vehicle asyou normally would in order for yourOBD II system to update. A recheckwith the above test routine may thenindicate that the system is now ready.Regardless of whether your vehicle'sOBD II system is ready or not, if the MILis illuminated during normal vehicleoperation you should have your vehicleserviced before going to the I/M station.The I/M station can fail your vehiclebecause the MIL is on with the enginerunning.

110

GE

TTIN

GTO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TRU

ME

NT

PAN

EL

SAFETY

SAFETY SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . .112AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .114OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121SEAT BELT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . .121CHILD RESTRAINTPRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .127SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINTSYSTEM SRS — AIR BAG . . . . . .130EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .144CONSTANT MONITORING . . . . . .146

111

SAFETY SYSTEMSSafety Systems

The vehicle has the following safetysystems:

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

Traction Contol System (TCS)

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)For the operation of the systems, seethe following pages.

ABS System (Anti-lockBraking System)The ABS control unit continuouslymonitors the speed of each wheel. Ifone wheel is about to lock up, the ABSresponds by automatically releasingand reapplying that wheel's brake. Thedriver will feel a slight vibration in thebrake pedal and may hear a chatteringnoise from the brake system. This isnormal ABS system operation.Continue to depress the brake pedalwithout pumping the brakes. Thewarning light turns on when the systemhas a malfunction. Refer to “WarningLights And Messages” in “Getting ToKnow Your Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation.

Note:

Braking distances may be longer onloose surfaces (snow or gravel, forexample) which usually have a hardfoundation. A vehicle with a normalbraking system may require lessdistance to stop under theseconditions because the tires will buildup a wedge of surface layer when thewheels skid.

The sound of the ABS operatingmay be heard when starting the engineor immediately after starting thevehicle; however, it does not indicate amalfunction.

Warning!

The ABS contains sophisticatedelectronic equipment that may besusceptible to interference caused byimproperly installed or high output radiotransmitting equipment. This interferencecan cause possible loss of anti-lock brakingcapability. Installation of such equipmentshould be performed by qualifiedprofessionals.

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes willdiminish their effectiveness and may lead toa collision. Pumping makes the stoppingdistance longer. Just press firmly on yourbrake pedal when you need to slow downor stop.

The ABS cannot prevent the naturallaws of physics from acting on the vehicle,nor can it increase braking or steeringefficiency beyond that afforded by thecondition of the vehicle brakes and tires orthe traction afforded.

The ABS cannot prevent collisions,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, following another vehicletoo closely, or hydroplaning.

The capabilities of an ABS equippedvehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner that couldjeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.

TCS System (TractionControl System)

Warning!

The capability of the TCS must never betested irresponsibly and dangerously, insuch a way as to compromise personalsafety and the safety of others.

The Traction Control System (TCS)enhances traction and safety bycontrolling engine torque and braking.When the TCS detects driving wheelslippage, it can lower engine torque andoperate the brakes to prevent loss oftraction. This means that on a slicksurface, the engine adjustsautomatically to provide optimum112

SA

FETY

power to the drive wheels, limitingwheel spin and loss of traction.The indicator light turns on when thesystem has a malfunction. Refer to“Warning Lights And Messages” in“Getting To Know Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

TCS / DSC Indicator LightThe indicator light stays on for a fewseconds when the ignition is placed inthe ON mode.If the TCS or DSC is operating, theindicator light flashes.If the indicator light stays on, theTCS, DSC or the brake assist systemmay have a malfunction and they maynot operate correctly. Contact yourauthorized dealer.

Note:

In addition to the indicator lightflashing, a slight sound will come fromthe engine. This indicates that theTCS/DSC is operating properly.

On slippery surfaces, such as freshsnow, it will be impossible to achievehigh rpm when the TCS is on.

DSC System (DynamicStability Control)

The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)automatically controls braking andengine torque in conjunction withsystems such as ABS and TCS to helpcontrol side slip when driving on

slippery surfaces, or during sudden orevasive maneuvering, enhancing vehiclesafety. Refer to “ABS System (AntilockBrake System)” and “TCS System(Traction Control System)” in thischapter for further information.DSC operation is possible at speedsgreater than 12 mph (20 km/h).The indicator light turns on when thesystem has a malfunction. Refer to“Warning Lights And Messages” in“Getting To Know Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.Note: The DSC may not operatecorrectly unless the following areobserved:

Use tires of the correct sizespecified for your vehicle on all fourwheels.

Use tires of the same manufacturer,brand and tread pattern on all fourwheels.

Do not mix worn tires.Note: The DSC may not operatecorrectly when tire chains are used.

TCS / DSC Indicator LightThe indicator light stays on for a fewseconds when the ignition is placed inthe ON mode. It also illuminates whenthe DSC OFF switch is pressed andTCS/DSC is switched off.If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC orthe brake assist system may have amalfunction and they may not operate

correctly. Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer.

DSC OFF Indicator LightThe indicator light stays on for a fewseconds when the ignition is placed inthe ON mode. It also illuminates whenthe DSC OFF switch is pressed andTCS/DSC is switched off.If the light remains illuminated and theTCS/DSC is not switched off, contactyour authorized dealer. The DSC mayhave a malfunction.

DSC OFF SwitchPush the switch to turn off theTCS/DSC. The indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate. Pushthe switch again to turn the TCS/DSCback on. The indicator light will turn off.

05060301-12A-001

DSC OFF Switch

113

Note:

When DSC is on and you attemptto free the vehicle when it is stuck, ordrive it out of freshly fallen snow, theTCS (part of the DSC system) willactivate. Depressing the acceleratorwill not increase engine power andfreeing the vehicle may be difficult.When this happens, turn off theTCS/DSC.

If the TCS/DSC is off when theengine is turned off, it automaticallyactivates when the ignition is placed inthe ON mode.

Warning!

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) cannotprevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increasethe traction afforded by prevailing roadconditions. DSC cannot prevent accidents,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, driving on very slipperysurfaces, or hydroplaning. DSC also cannotprevent accidents resulting from loss ofvehicle control due to inappropriate driverinput for the conditions. Only a safe,attentive, and skillful driver can preventaccidents. The capabilities of an DSCequipped vehicle must never be exploitedin a reckless or dangerous manner whichcould jeopardize the user’s safety or thesafety of others.

Vehicle modifications, or failure toproperly maintain your vehicle, may changethe handling characteristics of your vehicle,and may negatively affect the performanceof the DSC system. Changes to thesteering system, suspension, brakingsystem, tire type and size or wheel sizemay adversely affect DSC performance.Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tiresmay also degrade DSC performance. Anyvehicle modification or poor vehiclemaintenance that reduces the effectivenessof the DSC system can increase the risk ofloss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,personal injury and death.

AUXILIARY DRIVINGSYSTEMSBlind Spot Monitoring(BSM) System

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)system is designed to assist the driverduring lane changes by alerting thedriver to the presence of vehiclesapproaching from the rear in anadjacent lane.The system detects vehiclesapproaching from the rear whiletraveling in the forward direction at aspeed of 19 mph (30 km/h) or faster,and will activate the BSM warning lightsequipped within the door mirrors.If the turn signal lever is operated tosignal a lane change in the direction inwhich the warning light is illuminated,the system warns the driver of a vehiclein the detection area by flashing thewarning light and activating an audiblealert.The detection area on this systemcovers the driving lanes on both sidesof the vehicle and from the rear part ofthe doors to about 164 ft (50 m) behindthe vehicle.

114

SA

FETY

Activation / DeactivationThe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)system will operate when all of thefollowing conditions are met:

The ignition is ON.

The BSM switch is pushed and thewarning light in the instrument cluster isturned off.

The vehicle speed is 19 mph(30 km/h ) or faster.

The BSM system will not operate underthe following conditions:

The vehicle speed falls below about15 mph (25 km/h) even though thewarning light is turned off.

The gear selector is shifted toREVERSE.In the following cases, the warning lightin the instrument cluster illuminates andoperation of the BSM system isdeactivated.

A problem with the system (includingthe BSM warning lights) is detected.

A large change in position of a rearradar sensor on the vehicle has occurred.

There is a large accumulation ofsnow or ice on the rear bumper near arear radar sensor . Remove any snow,ice or mud on the rear bumper.

Driving on snow covered roads forlong periods.

The temperature near the rear radarsensors becomes extremely hot due todriving for long periods on inclinesduring warm weather.

The battery voltage has decreased.If the warning light in the instrumentcluster remains illuminated, have thevehicle inspected at an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Note: Under the following conditions,the rear radar sensors cannot detectobjects, or it may be difficult to detectthem:

A vehicle is in the detection area atthe rear in an adjacent driving lane butit does not approach. The BSM systemdetermines the condition based onradar detection data.

A vehicle is traveling alongside yourvehicle at nearly the same speed for anextended period of time.

Vehicles approaching in theopposite direction.

A vehicle in an adjacent driving laneis attempting to pass your vehicle.

A vehicle is in an adjacent lane on aroad with extremely wide driving lanes.The detection area of the rear radarsensors is set at the road width ofexpressways.

In the following cases, the activation ofthe BSM warning lights and the audiblealert may not occur, or they may bedelayed:

A vehicle makes a lane change froma driving lane two lanes over to anadjacent lane.

Driving on steep inclines.

Crossing the summit of a hill ormountain pass.

1

0528070012A002

BSM Detection Areas

1 — Detection Area

115

The turning radius is small (making asharp turn or turning at intersections).

When there is a difference in theheight between your driving lane andthe adjacent lane.

Immediately after pushing the BSMswitch and the system becomesoperable.If the road width is extremely narrow,vehicles two lanes over may bedetected. The detection area of the rearradar sensors is set according to theroad width of expressways.The BSM warning lights may turn on inreaction to stationary objects on theroad or the roadside such as guardrails,tunnels, sidewalls, and parked vehicles.A BSM warning light may flash or theaudible alert may be activated severaltimes when making a turn at a cityintersection.Turn off the BSM system while pulling atrailer or while an accessory such as abicycle carrier is installed to the rear ofthe vehicle. Otherwise, the radar’ssound system waves will be blockedcausing the system to not operatenormally.In the following cases, it may be difficultto view the illumination/flashing of theBSM warning lights equipped on thedoor mirrors:

Snow or ice is adhering to the doormirrors.

The door glass is fogged or coveredin snow, frost or dirt.The system switches to the Rear CrossTraffic Alert function when the gearselector is shifted to the REVERSEposition.

BSM Warning LightsThe BSM warning lights are equippedon the left and right door mirrors.

The warning lights turn on when avehicle approaching from the rear in anadjacent lane is detected.When the ignition is switched ON, themalfunction warning light in theinstrument cluster illuminatesmomentarily and then turns off after afew seconds.

Forward Driving (BSM SystemOperation)The BSM system detects vehiclesapproaching from the rear and turns onthe warning lights equipped on the doormirrors according to the conditions.Additionally, while a warning light isilluminated, if the turn signal lever isoperated to signal a turn in the directionin which the warning light is illuminated,the warning light flashes.

Reverse Driving (RCTA SystemOperation)The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)system detects vehicles approachingfrom the left and right of your vehicleand flashes the BSM warning lights.

Function For Canceling IlluminationDimmerWhen the headlight switch is in the

or position, the brightness ofthe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)warning lights is dimmed. If the BlindSpot Monitoring (BSM) warning lightsare difficult to see due to glare fromsurrounding brightness when travelingon snow-covered roads or under foggyconditions, push the dimmercancellation button to cancel thedimmer and increase the brightness ofBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warninglights when they turn on.Refer to “Instrument Panel Illumination”in “Getting To Know Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

05280701-12A-001

BSM Warning Light

116

SA

FETY

BSM Warning BeepThe BSM audible alert is activatedsimultaneously with the flashing of aBSM warning light.

BSM SwitchWhen the BSM switch is pushed, theBSM and RCTA systems are turned offand the BSM off indicator light in theinstrument cluster turns on.If the switch is pushed again, the BSMand RCTA systems become operableand the BSM off indicator light turns off.

Note:

When the ignition is switched OFF,the condition before the system wasturned off is maintained. For example,if the ignition is switched OFF while theBSM and RCTA systems areoperational, the BSM and RCTAsystems remain operational the nexttime the ignition is switched ON.

The BSM and RCTA systems areturned off when the battery isdisconnected such as when thebattery terminals or fuses have beenremoved and reinstalled. To turn theBSM and RCTA systems back on,push the BSM switch.

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)FunctionThe RCTA system is designed to assistthe driver in checking the area to therear of the vehicle on both sides whilethe vehicle is in REVERSE by alertingthe driver to the presence of vehiclesapproaching the rear of the vehicle.The RCTA system detects vehiclesapproaching from the left and rightsides of the vehicle while the vehicle isreversing out of a parking space, andnotifies the driver of possible dangerusing the BSM warning lights and anaudible alert.

RCTA OperationThe RCTA system operates when thegear selector is shifted to the REVERSEposition.If there is the possibility of a collisionwith an approaching vehicle, the BSMwarning light flashes and the audiblealert is activated simultaneously.

With Rear View CameraThe Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)warning indication in the rearviewmonitor also synchronizes with theBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warningindicator light on the door mirrors.

05280703-12A-001

BSM Switch Location

05281200-03A-001

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

1 — Your Vehicle2 — Approaching Vehicles Left AndRight

117

In the following cases, the BSM offindicator light turns on and operation ofthe system is deactivated. If the BSMoff indicator light in the instrumentcluster remains illuminated:

A problem with the system includingthe BSM warning lights has occurred.

A large change in the position of arear radar sensor on the vehicle hasoccurred.

There is a large accumulation ofsnow or ice on the rear bumper near arear radar sensor.

Driving on snow-covered roads forlong periods.

The temperature near the radarsensors becomes extremely hot due todriving for long periods on inclinesduring warm weather.

The battery voltage has decreased.Have the vehicle inspected at anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.Note: Under the following conditions,the rear radar sensors cannot detectobjects or it may be difficult to detectthem:

The vehicle speed while inREVERSE is about 6 mph (10 km/h )or faster.

The rear radar sensor detectionarea is obstructed by a nearby wall orparked vehicle (reverse the vehicle to aposition where the radar sensordetection area is no longer obstructed).

A vehicle is approaching directly tothe rear of your vehicle.

The vehicle is parked on an incline.

Immediately after pushing the BSMswitch and the system becomesoperable.

0528140012A002

RCTA Detection 05281200-03A-003

Sensors Obstructed By NearbyVehicles

118

SA

FETY

In the following cases, it may be difficultto view the illumination/flashing of theBSM warning lights equipped on thedoor mirrors:

Snow or ice adheres to the doormirrors.

The door glass is fogged or coveredin snow, frost or dirt.Turn off the RCTA system while pullinga trailer or while an accessory such as abicycle carrier is installed to the rear ofthe vehicle.Otherwise, the sound system wavesemitted by the radar will be blockedcausing the system to not operatenormally.

TPMS (Tire PressureMonitoring System)Tire Pressure Monitoring System —Lo/Hi GradeThe TPMS (Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem) monitors the air pressure of allfour tires.If the air pressure of one or more tires istoo low, the system warns the driver byindicating the warning light in theinstrument cluster and operating abeep.The system monitors the tire pressuresindirectly using the data sent from theABS wheel speed sensors.To allow the system to operatecorrectly, the system needs to beinitialized with the specified tire pressure(value on the tire placard label). Followthe procedure and perform theinitialization (refer to “Tire PressureMonitoring System Initialization”paragraph).The warning light flashes when thesystem has a malfunction.Because this system detects slightchanges in tire conditions, the timing ofthe warning may be faster or slower inthe following cases:

The size, manufacturer, or the type oftires is different from the specification.

The size, manufacturer, or the type ofa tire is different from the others, or thelevel of tire wear is excessively differentbetween them.

05281200-03A-004

Another Vehicle ApproachingDirectly To The Rear Of Your

Vehicle

05281200-03A-005

Your Vehicle Parked On An Incline

119

A run-flat tire, snow tire, or tire chainsare used.

An emergency tire is used (thewarning light may flash and then

continue illuminating).

A tire is repaired using theemergency flat tire repair kit.

The tire pressure is excessivelyhigher than the specified pressure, orthe tire pressure is suddenly lowered forsome reason such as a tire burst duringdriving.

The vehicle speed is lower thanabout 9 mph (15 km/h) (including whenthe vehicle is stopped), or the driveperiod is shorter than five minutes.

The vehicle is driven on an extremelyrough road or a slippery, icy road.

Hard steering and rapidacceleration/deceleration are repeatedsuch as during aggressive driving on awinding road.

Load on the vehicle is applied to atire such as by loading heavy luggageto one side of the vehicle.

System initialization has not beenimplemented with the specified tirepressure.

Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemInitializationIn the following cases, systeminitialization must be performed so thatthe system operates normally:

A tire pressure is adjusted.

A tire rotation is performed. A tire orwheel is replaced.

The battery is replaced or completelydischarged.

The warning light is illuminated.

Initialization MethodProceed as follows:

1. Park the car in a safe place andfirmly apply the parking brake.

2. Be sure the tires are cool, thenadjust the tire pressure of all four (4)tires to the specified pressure indicatedon the tire placard label located on thedriver's door frame (door open).

3. Place the ignition in the ON mode.

4. While the vehicle is parked, pressand hold the TPMS system set switchand verify that the warning light inthe instrument cluster flashes twice anda beep sound is heard once.

Note:

If the system initialization isperformed without adjusting the tirepressure, the system cannot detect thenormal tire pressure and it may notilluminate the warning light even if atire pressure is low, or it may illuminatethe light even if the pressures arenormal.

Adjust the tire pressure on all fourtires and initialize the system when the

warning light is turned on. If thewarning light turns on for a reasonother than a flat tire, the tire pressure ofall four tires may have decreasednaturally.

The system initialization will not beperformed if the switch is pressedwhile the vehicle is being driven.

05120101-12A-001

TPMS Set Switch

120

SA

FETY

OCCUPANTRESTRAINTSYSTEMSThe most important safety equipmentof the vehicle comprise the followingprotection systems:

Seat Belts

SBA (Seat Belt Alert) System

Head Restraints

Child Restraint Systems

Front Air Bags And Side Air BagsRead the information given in thefollowing pages with the utmost care.It is of fundamental importance that theprotection systems are used in thecorrect way to guarantee the maximumpossible safety level for the driver andthe passengers.

SEAT BELTSYSTEMSBuckle up even though you are anexcellent driver, even on short trips.Someone on the road may be a poordriver and could cause a collision thatincludes you. This can happen far awayfrom home or on your own street.Research has shown that seat beltssave lives, and they can reduce theseriousness of injuries in a collision.Some of the worst injuries happenwhen people are thrown from thevehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibilityof ejection and the risk of injury causedby striking the inside of the vehicle.Everyone in a motor vehicle should bebelted at all times.

Seat Belt Precautions

Seat belts help to decrease thepossibility of severe injury duringaccidents and sudden stops. FCArecommends that the driver andpassengers always wear seat belts.MexicoAll the seats have lap/shoulder belts.These belts have retractors with inertialocks that keep them out of the waywhen not in use.The locks allow the belts to remaincomfortable on users, but they will lockin position during a collision.

Except MexicoAll of the seat belt retractors aredesigned to keep the lap/shoulder beltsout of the way when not in use.The driver's seat belt has no provisionsfor child-restraint systems and has onlyan emergency locking mode.The driver may wear it comfortably, andit will lock during a collision.However, the passenger's seatlap/shoulder belt retractor operates intwo modes: emergency locking mode,and for child-restraint systems,automatic locking mode. If you mustuse the passenger seat for a child, slidethe passenger seat as far back aspossible and make sure any childrestraint system is secured properly.Belt retraction may become difficult ifthe belts and seat belt guides aresoiled, so try to keep them clean. Referto “Lap/Shoulder Belt” in ”Interiors,”found in Servicing And Maintenance”for further information.

121

Warning!

Relying on the air bags alone could leadto more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrainyou properly. In some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always wear yourseat belt even though you have air bags.

In a collision, you and your passengerscan suffer much greater injuries if you arenot properly buckled up. You can strike theinterior of your vehicle or other passengers,or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.Always be sure you and others in yourvehicle are buckled up properly.

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.Occupants, including the driver, shouldalways wear their seat belts whether or notan air bag is also provided at their seatingposition to minimize the risk of severe injuryor death in the event of a crash.

Wearing your seat belt incorrectly couldmake your injuries in a collision muchworse. You might suffer internal injuries, oryou could even slide out of the seat belt.Follow these instructions to wear your seatbelt safely and to keep your passengerssafe, too.

Two people should never be belted intoa single seat belt. People belted togethercan crash into one another in a collision,hurting one another badly. Never use alap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more thanone person, no matter what their size.

A lap belt worn too high can increasethe risk of injury in a collision. The seat beltforces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvicbones, but across your abdomen. Alwayswear the lap part of your seat belt as lowas possible and keep it snug.

A twisted seat belt may not protect youproperly. In a collision, it could even cut intoyou. Be sure the seat belt is flat againstyour body, without twists. If you can’tstraighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take itto your authorized dealer immediately andhave it fixed.

A seat belt that is buckled into thewrong buckle will not protect you properly.The lap portion could ride too high on yourbody, possibly causing internal injuries.

Always buckle your seat belt into thebuckle nearest you.

A seat belt that is too loose will notprotect you properly. In a sudden stop, youcould move too far forward, increasing thepossibility of injury. Wear your seat beltsnugly.

A seat belt that is worn under your armis dangerous. Your body could strike theinside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,increasing head and neck injury. A seat beltworn under the arm can cause internalinjuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. Wear the seat belt over yourshoulder so that your strongest bones willtake the force in a collision.

A shoulder belt placed behind you willnot protect you from injury during acollision. You are more likely to hit yourhead in a collision if you do not wear yourshoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt aremeant to be used together.

A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apartin a collision and leave you with noprotection. Inspect the seat belt systemperiodically, checking for cuts, frays, orloose parts. Damaged parts must bereplaced immediately. Do not disassembleor modify the seat belt system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after acollision.

03020100-12A-001

Seat Belt Routing Guide

122

SA

FETY

Seat Belts And PregnantWomen

Pregnant Women And Persons WithSerious Medical ConditionsPregnant women should always wearseat belts. Ask your doctor for specificrecommendations.The lap belt should be worn SNUGLYAND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVERTHE HIPS. The shoulder belt should beworn across your shoulder properly, butnever across the stomach area.

Persons with serious medicalconditions also should wear seat belts.Check with your doctor for any specialinstructions regarding specific medicalconditions.

Emergency LockingMode

When the seat belt is fastened, it willalways be in the emergency lockingmode.

In the emergency locking mode, thebelt remains comfortable on theoccupant and the retractor will lock inposition during a collision.If the belt is locked and cannot bepulled out, retract the belt once, andthen try pulling it out slowly. If this fails,pull the belt strongly one time andloosen, then pull it out again slowly.Seat Belt With Automatic LockingModeWhen the seat belt is fastened, it willalways be in the emergency lockingmode until it is switched to automaticlocking mode by pulling it all the wayout to its full length.If the belt feels tight and hinderscomfortable movement while thevehicle is stopped or in motion, it maybe in the automatic locking modebecause the belt has been pulled toofar out.To return the belt to the morecomfortable emergency locking mode,wait until the vehicle has stopped in asafe, level area, retract the belt fully toconvert it back to emergency lockingmode and then extend it around youagain.Automatic Locking ModeAlways use the automatic locking modeto keep the child-restraint system fromshifting to an unsafe position in theevent of an accident.To enable seat belt automatic lockingmode, pull it all the way out and

connect it as instructed on the childrestraint system. It will retract down tothe child restraint system and staylocked on it.

Warning!

The seat belt assembly must bereplaced if the switchable AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) feature or anyother seat belt function is not workingproperly when checked according to theprocedures in the Service Manual.

Failure to replace the seat belt assemblycould increase the risk of injury in collisions.

Do not use the Automatic Locking Modeto restrain occupants who are wearing theseat belt or children who are using boosterseats. The locked mode is only used toinstall rear-facing or forward-facing childrestraints that have a harness forrestraining the child.

06050100-CHD-003

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

123

Lap/Shoulder Belts

Fastening The Seat Belt

Position the lap belt as low as possible,not on the abdominal area 2, thenadjust the shoulder belt 3 so that it fitssnugly against your body.

Unfastening The Seat BeltDepress the button on the seat beltbuckle. If the belt does not fully retract,pull it out and check for kinks or twists.Then make sure it remains untwisted asit retracts.

Note:

If a belt does not fully retract,inspect it for kinks and twists. If it is stillnot retracting properly, have itinspected: contact an authorizeddealer.

1

2

03020201121001

Fastening The Seat Belt

1 — Seat BeltTongue

2 — Seat BeltBuckle

1

3

2

03020201122002

Adjusting The Seat Belt

1 — Position Lap Belt Across Lap Area2 — Lap Belt Routing3 — Shoulder Belt Routing

1

03020202UNF001

Latching/Unlatching The Seat Belt

1 — Seat Belt Release Button

124

SA

FETY

Always wear the seat belt with itcorrectly routed in its guide. Wearing aseat belt without the seat belt routed inits guide is dangerous because theseat belt would not be able to provideadequate protection in an accident,which could result in serious injury.

Seat Belt WarningSystems

If it detects that the occupant seat beltis unfastened, the warning light or beepalerts the occupant.Refer to “Warning Lights AndMessages” in “Getting To Knowing YourInstrument Panel” for furtherinformation.Refer to “Seat Belt Warning Light” in“Getting To Knowing Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

Seat Belt Extender

If your seat belt is not long enough,even when fully extended, a seat beltextender may be available to you at nocharge from authorized dealer.This extender will be only for you andfor the particular vehicle and seat. Evenif it plugs into other seat belts, it maynot hold in the critical moment of acrash.When ordering an extender, only orderone that provides the necessaryadditional length to fasten the seat beltproperly. Please contact authorizeddealer for more information.When not in use, remove the seat beltextender and store it in the vehicle. Ifthe seat belt extender is left connected,the seat belt extender might getdamaged as it will not retract with therest of the seat belt and can easily fallout of the door when not in use and bedamaged.In addition, the seat belt warning lightwill not illuminate and function properly.

Warning!

Do not use a seat belt extender unless itis necessary. Using a seat belt extenderwhen not necessary is dangerous. Theseat belt will be too long and not fitproperly. In an accident, the seat belt willnot provide adequate protection and youcould be seriously injured. Only use theextender when it is required to fasten theseat belt properly.

Do not use an improper extender. Usinga seat belt extender that is for anotherperson or a different vehicle or seat isdangerous. The seat belt will not provideadequate protection and the user could beseriously injured in an accident. Only usethe extender provided for you and for theparticular vehicle and seat.

NEVER use the extender in a differentvehicle or seat. If you sell your vehicle, donot leave your seat belt extender in thevehicle. It could be used accidentally by thenew owner of the vehicle. After removingthe seat belt extender, discard it. Never usethe seat belt extender in any other vehicleyou may own in the future.

Do not use an extender that is too long.Using an extender that is too long isdangerous. The seat belt will not fitproperly. In an accident, the seat belt willnot provide adequate protection and youcould be seriously injured. Do not use theextender or choose one shorter in length ifthe distance between the extender'sbuckle and the center of the user's body isless than 6 inches (15 cm).

1

0302020012A001

Seat Belt Routing Guides

1 — Shoulder Belt Routing Guides

125

Do not leave a seat belt extenderconnected to the buckle. Leaving a seatbelt extender connected to the bucklewithout using the seat belt is dangerous.When the seat belt extender is connectedto the driver's seat belt buckle (orpassenger) seat, the SRS driver's (orpassenger's) air bag system will determinethat the driver (or passenger) is wearing theseat belt even if the driver (or passenger) isnot wearing it. This condition could causethe driver's (or passenger's) air bag to notactivate correctly and result in death orserious injury in the event of collision.Always wear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

Do not use the seat belt extender wheninstalling a child restraint system on thepassenger seat. Using a seat belt extenderto fasten a child restraint system on anyseat is dangerous. Always follow the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions and never use a seat beltextender.

Driver And PassengerBeltAlert (If Equipped)

Seat Belt Warning SystemsThe LED on dashboard trim turns on ifthe driver or passenger's seat isoccupied and the seat belt is notfastened with the ignition switched ON.If the driver or passenger's seat belt isunfastened (only when the passengerseat is occupied) and the vehicle isdriven at a speed faster than about12 MPH (20 km/h), the LED flashes.

After a short time, the LED stopsflashing, but remains illuminated.If a seat belt remains unfastened, theLED flashes again for a given period oftime. In this case, fasten the seat belt.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

For optimum protection, the driver andpassenger seat belts are equipped withpretensioner and load limiting systems.For both these systems to workproperly you must wear the seat beltproperly.The seat belt pretensioners aredesigned to deploy in moderate orsevere frontal, near frontal collisions. Inaddition, during a side collision, thepretensioner operates on the side inwhich the collision occurs. Thepretensioners operate differentlydepending on what types of air bagsare equipped. For details on the seatbelt pretensioner operation, refer to the“SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”paragraph in this chapter.When a collision is detected, thepretensioners deploy simultaneouslywith the air bags. For deploymentdetails, refer to the “SRS Air BagDeployment Criteria” paragraph in thischapter.The seat belt retractors remove slackquickly as the air bags are expanding.Any time the air bags and seat beltpretensioners have fired they must bereplaced.

With Passenger OccupantClassification SystemIn addition, the pretensioner system forthe passenger, like the front and sidepassenger Air Bag, is designed to onlydeploy when the passenger occupantclassification sensor detects apassenger sitting on the passenger'sseat.Note:

These devices are not a substitutefor proper seat belt placement by theoccupant. The seat belt still must beworn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered bythe Occupant Restraint Controller(ORC). Like the air bags, thepretensioners are single use items. Adeployed pretensioner or a deployedair bag must be replaced immediately.

Load Limiter

The load limiting system releases beltwebbing in a controlled manner toreduce belt force on the occupant'schest.While the most severe load on a seatbelt occurs in frontal collisions, the loadlimiter has an automatic mechanicalfunction and can activate in anyaccident mode with sufficient occupantmovement.Even if the pretensioners have not fired,the load limiting function must bechecked by an authorized dealer.

126

SA

FETY

CHILD RESTRAINTPRECAUTIONSChild Restraints

FCA strongly urges the use ofchild-restraint systems for children smallenough to use them.Before buying any restraint system,make sure that it has a label certifyingthat it meets all applicable SafetyStandards. You should also make surethat you can install it in the vehiclewhere you will use it.Check your local and state or provinciallaws for specific requirements regardingthe safety of children riding in yourvehicle.Whatever child-restraint system youconsider, please pick the appropriateone for the age and size of the child,obey the law and follow the instructionsthat come with the individualchild-restraint system.A child who has outgrownchild-restraint systems should use seatbelts, both lap and shoulder. If theshoulder belt crosses the neck or face,move the child closer to the center ofthe vehicle.A rear-facing child-restraint systemshould NEVER be used on thepassenger seat with the Air Bag systemactivated. In the event of an impact theAir Bag activation may cause fatalinjuries to the transported child.

With Passenger OccupantClassification SystemTo reduce the chance of injuries causedby deployment of the passenger AirBag, the passenger occupantclassification sensor work as a part ofthe supplementary restraint system.This system deactivates the passengerfront and side Air Bags and also thepassenger seat belt pretensionersystem when the OFF passenger AirBag deactivation indicator lightilluminates.When an infant or small child sits on thepassenger seat, the system shuts offthe passenger front and side Air Bagsand seat belt pretensioner system, somake sure the OFF passenger AirBag deactivation indicator lightilluminates. For more details, refer to"Passenger Occupant ClassificationSensor" in “Supplementary RestraintSystem SRS — Air Bag” for additionalinformation.Note: A seat belt or child-restraintsystem can become very hot in aclosed vehicle during warm weather. Toavoid burning yourself or a child, checkthem before you or your child touchesthem.

Warning!

Improper installation can lead to failureof an infant or child restraint. It could comeloose in a collision. The child could bebadly injured or killed. Follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s directions exactlywhen installing an infant or child restraint.

After a child restraint is installed in thevehicle, do not move the vehicle seatforward or rearward because it can loosenthe child restraint attachments. Removethe child restraint before adjusting thevehicle seat position. When the vehicle seathas been adjusted, reinstall the childrestraint.

When your child restraint is not in use,secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt orLATCH anchorages, or remove it from thevehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.In a sudden stop or accident, it could strikethe occupants or seatbacks and causeserious personal injury.

Child Restraint SystemTypes

In this Owner Handbook, explanation ofchild restraint systems secured withseat belts is provided for the followingthree types of popular child-restraintsystems: infant seat, child seat, boosterseat.

127

Note:

Installation position is determinedby the type of child restraint system.Always read the manufacturer'sinstructions and this Owner Handbookcarefully.

Due to variations in the design ofchild restraint systems, vehicle seatsand seat belts, not all child restraintmay fit all seating positions.

Before purchasing a child-restraintsystem, it should be tested in thespecific vehicle seating position (orpositions) where it is intended to beused. If a previously purchasedchild-restraint system does not fit, youmay need to purchase a different onethat will.

Infant SeatAn infant seat provides restraint bybracing the infant's head, neck andback against the seating surface.

Child SeatA child seat restrains a child's bodyusing the harness.

Booster SeatA booster seat is a child restraintaccessory designed to improve the fit ofthe seat belt system around the child'sbody.

Warning!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder beltunder an arm or behind their back. In acrash, the shoulder belt will not protect achild properly, which may result in seriousinjury or death. A child must always wearboth the lap and shoulder portions of theseat belt correctly.

Child Seat InstallationPosition

The passenger lap/shoulder belt caneasily be converted into the automaticlocking mode, which must be done tohold the child-restraint system.Note: To check if your seats have sideair bags: FCA vehicles equipped withside air bag will have an embossed"SRS AIRBAG" marking on theoutboard shoulder of the seats.Follow the child restraint systemmanufacturer's instructions carefully.Depending on the type of child restraintsystem, it may not employ seat beltswhich are in automatic locking mode,however if it uses an upper tether, itmay not be mounted properly in thisvehicle as there is no safe way toanchor the tether. Confirm whether thechild restraint system can be used withseat belts by reading the child restraintsystem manufacturer's instructions.06070809INF001

Infant Seat

03030202CHD001

Child Seat

03030202BOO001

Booster Seat

128

SA

FETY

Passengers Seat Child RestraintSystem Installation (With PassengerOccupant Classification System)Proceed as follows:

Make sure the ignition is switchedoff.

Slide the seat as far back aspossible.

Place the child-restraint system onthe seat without putting your weight onthe seat and secure the child-restraintsystem with the lap portion of thelap/shoulder belt. See themanufacturer's instructions on thechild-restraint system for belt routinginstructions.

To get the retractor into theautomatic locking mode, pull theshoulder belt portion of the seat beltuntil the entire length of the belt is out ofthe retractor.

Push the child-restraint system firmlyinto the vehicle seat. Be sure the beltretracts as snugly as possible. Aclicking noise from the retractor will beheard during retraction if the system isin automatic locking mode. If the beltdoes not lock the seat down tight,repeat the previous step and also thisone.

Seat your child safely in thechild-restraint system and secure thechild according to the instructions fromthe child-restraint system manufacturer.

Note: Inspect this function beforeeach use of the child restraint system.You should not be able to pull theshoulder belt out of the retractor whilethe system is in the automatic lockingmode. When you remove thechild-restraint system, be sure the beltfully retracts to return the system toemergency locking mode beforeoccupants use the seat belts.

Place the ignition in the ON positionand make sure the passenger air bagdeactivation indicator light illuminatesafter installing a child restraint systemon the passenger seat. If the passengerair bag deactivation indicator light doesnot illuminate, remove the child restraintsystem, place the ignition in the OFFposition, and then reinstall the childrestraint system.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraintin front of an air bag. A deployingpassenger Advanced Front Air Bag cancause death or serious injury to a child12 years or younger, including a child in arear-facing child restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in avehicle with a rear seat.

An incorrectly anchored tether strapcould lead to increased head motion andpossibly injury to the child. Use only theanchorage position directly behind thechild seat to secure a child restraint toptether strap.

06070400567567

Passenger Air Bag DeactivationLight

129

SUPPLEMENTARYRESTRAINT SYSTEMSRS — AIR BAGDescription

The front and side SupplementaryRestraint Systems (SRS) includedifferent types of Air Bags.Note: Please verify which kinds of AirBags are equipped on your vehicle bylocating the “SRS AIR BAG” locationindicators.These indicators are visible in the areawhere the Air Bags are installed.The Air Bags are installed in thefollowing locations:

The steering wheel hub (Driver AirBag)

The passenger dashboard(Passenger Air Bag)

The outer sides of the seat backs(Side Air Bags)This vehicle has front air bags andlap/shoulder belts for both the driverand front passenger. The front air bagsare a supplement to the seat beltrestraint systems.The Air Bag supplementary restraintsystems are designed to providesupplementary protection in certainsituations so seat belts are alwaysimportant in the following ways.Without seat belt usage, the Air Bagscannot provide adequate protection

during an accident. Seat belt usage isnecessary to:

Keep the occupant from beingthrown into an inflating Air Bag.

Reduce the possibility of injuriesduring an accident that is not designedfor Air Bag inflation, such as roll-over orrear impact.

Reduce the possibility of injuries infrontal, near frontal or side collisionsthat are not severe enough to activatethe Air Bags.

Reduce the possibility of beingthrown from your vehicle.

Reduce the possibility of injuries tolower body and legs during an accidentbecause the Air Bags provide noprotection to these parts of the body.

Hold the driver in a position whichallows better control of the vehicle.

Warning!

In order for the Side Air Bags to work asintended, do not install any accessoryitems in your vehicle which could alter theroof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof toyour vehicle. Do not add roof racks thatrequire permanent attachments (bolts orscrews) for installation on the vehicle roof.Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle forany reason.

If your vehicle is also equipped witha passenger occupant classificationsystem, refer to the “PassengerOccupant Classification System”paragraph for further information.If your vehicle is equipped with apassenger occupant classificationsystem, the passenger Air Bagdeactivation indicator light illuminatesfor a specified time after the ignition hasbeen placed in the ON position.

Small children must be protected by achild-restraint system as stipulated bylaw in every state and province. Incertain states and provinces, largerchildren must use a child-restraintsystem. Carefully consider whichchild-restraint system is necessary foryour child and follow the installationdirections in this Owner's Manual aswell as the child-restraint systemmanufacturer's instructions.

06070400567567

Passenger Air Bag DeactivatedLight

130

SA

FETY

Do not use a child-restraint systemwhich employs an upper tetherbecause there is no appropriate meansto anchor the tether.

Warning!

If the Indicator Light remains illuminatedfor an adult passenger, have an authorizeddealer service the air bag systemimmediately. Failure to do so may causeserious injury or death. If the Indicator Lightis illuminated with the words “PASSAIRBAG OFF,” the Passenger AdvancedFront Air Bag will not deploy in the event ofa collision.

Never place a rear-facing child restraintin front of an air bag. A deployingpassenger front air bag can cause death orserious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facingchild restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in avehicle with a rear seat.

Children 12 years or younger shouldalways ride buckled up in a vehicle with arear seat.

Warning!

Unapproved modifications or serviceprocedures to the passenger seatassembly, its related components, seatcover or cushion may inadvertently changethe air bag deployment in case of a frontalcollision. This could result in death orserious injury to the front passenger if thevehicle is involved in a collision. A modifiedvehicle may not comply with requiredFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS).

If it is necessary to modify the air bagsystem for persons with disabilities, contactyour authorized dealer.

131

Supplementary Restraint System Components

With Passenger Occupant Classification System

03040300-121-002

With Passenger Occupant Classification System

1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators And AirBags

5 — Side Crash Sensors 9 — Passenger OccupantClassification Sensor

2 — Crash Sensors And DiagnosticModule (Sas Unit)

6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt PretensionerSystem Warning Light

10 — Passenger OccupantClassification Module

3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 8 — Passenger Air Bag Deactivation

Indicator Light

132

SA

FETY

Without Passenger Occupant Classification System

03040300-122-003

Without Passenger Occupant Classification System

1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators And AirBags

4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags

2 — Crash Sensors And DiagnosticModule (Sas Unit)

5 — Side Crash Sensors

3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt PretensionerSystem Warning Light

133

How The SRS Air BagsWork

This vehicle has front air bags andlap/shoulder belts for both the driverand front passenger. The front air bagsare a supplement to the seat beltrestraint systems. The SRS Air Bags aredesigned to provide further protectionfor passengers in addition to the seatbelt functions. Be sure to wear seatbelts properly.Seat Belt PretensionersThe seat belt pretensioners aredesigned to deploy in moderate orsevere frontal, near frontal collisions. Inaddition, during a side collision, thepretensioner operates on the side inwhich the collision occurs.The pretensioners operate differentlydepending on what types of air bagsare equipped. For details on the seatbelt pretensioner operation, refer to the“SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”.Driver Air BagThe driver's air bag is mounted in thesteering wheel.

When Air Bag crash sensors detect afrontal impact of greater than moderateforce, the driver's Air Bag inflatesquickly helping to reduce injury mainlyto the driver's head or chest caused bydirectly hitting the steering wheel. Formore details about Air Bag deployment,refer to "SRS Air Bag DeploymentCriteria" in this chapter for furtherinformation.(With Passenger OccupantClassification System)The driver's dual-stage air bag controlsair bag inflation in two energy stages.During an impact of moderate severity,the driver's air bag deploys with lesserenergy, whereas during more severeimpacts, it deploys with more energy.Passenger Air Bag(Dual Stage)The passenger Air Bag is mounted inthe passenger dashboard.

The inflation mechanism for thepassenger Air Bag is the same as thedriver's Air Bag, as mentioned above.For more details about Air Bagdeployment, refer to "SRS Air BagDeployment Criteria" in this chapter.For further details about air bagdeployment, refer to "SRS Air BagDeployment Criteria" in this chapter.Side Air BagsThe side air bags are mounted in theouter sides of the seat backs. When theair bag crash sensors detect a sideimpact of greater than moderate force,the system inflates the side air bag onlyon the side in which the vehicle was hit.

06010203-126-123

Driver Side Air Bags06010204-126-123

Passenger Side Air Bag

134

SA

FETY

The side air bag inflates quickly toreduce injury to the driver orpassenger's head and chest caused bydirectly hitting interior parts such as adoor or window. For more details aboutair bag deployment, refer to "SRS AirBag Deployment Criteria" in thischapter for further information.

Warning!

Occupants, including children, who areup against or very close to SABs can beseriously injured or killed. Occupants,including children, should never lean on orsleep against the door, side windows, orarea where the side air bags inflate, even ifthey are in an infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints whereappropriate) are necessary for yourprotection in all collisions. They also helpkeep you in position, away from an inflatingSAB. To get the best protection from theSABs, occupants must wear their seatbelts properly and sit upright with theirbacks against the seats. Children must beproperly restrained in a child restraint orbooster seat that is appropriate for the sizeof the child.

With Passenger OccupantClassification SystemIn addition, the passenger side bag isdesigned to only deploy when thepassenger occupant classificationsensor detects a passenger sitting onthe passenger's seat.

Warning!

If a child restraint system, child, smallteenager or adult in the front passengerseat is seated improperly, the occupantmay provide an output signal to the OCSthat is different from the occupant’sproperly seated weight input. This mayresult in serious injury or death in acollision.

Always wear your seat belt and sitproperly, with the seatback in an uprightposition, your back against the seatback,sitting upright, facing forward, in the centerof the seat, with your feet comfortably onor near the floor.

Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g.,backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in thefront passenger seat. Holding an objectmay provide an output signal to the OCSthat is different than the occupant’sproperly seated weight input, which mayresult in serious injury or death in acollision.

Placing an object on the floor under thefront passenger seat may prevent the OCSfrom working properly, which may result inserious injury or death in a collision. Do notplace any objects on the floor under thefront passenger seat.

Warning Light/BeepA system malfunction or operationconditions are indicated by a warning.Refer to the beginning paragraph of“Warning Lights And Messages” in

06010205-126-123

Side Air Bags

135

“Getting To Know Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in yourinstrument panel could mean you won’thave the air bags to protect you in acollision. If the light does not come on as abulb check when the ignition is first turnedon, stays on after you start the vehicle, or ifit comes on as you drive, have anauthorized dealer service the air bagsystem immediately.

Passenger Side Front Air Bag AndChild Restraint SystemsRearward-facing child restraint systemsmust NEVER be fitted on the front seatwith an active passenger side air bagsince in the event of an impact the airbag activation may cause fatal injuriesto the transported child.ALWAYS comply with the instructionson the label stuck on the passengerside sun visor : A = Mexico market/B = U.S.A. and Canada market.

Warning!

Do not use accessory seat covers or placeobjects between you and the Side AirBags; the performance could be adverselyaffected and/or objects could be pushedinto you, causing serious injury.

Warning!

Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Donot lean against the door or window. Situpright in the center of the seat.

Being too close to the Side Air Bagsduring deployment could cause you to beseverely injured or killed.

Relying on the Side Air Bags alone couldlead to more severe injuries in a collision.The Side Air Bags work with your seat beltto restrain you properly. In some collisions,Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Alwayswear your seat belt even though you haveSide Air Bags.

03030101-121-001

Sun Visor Air Bag Labels

136

SA

FETY

SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria

This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type of collision (the illustrations are therepresentative cases of collisions).Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat beltpretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the OccupantRestraint Controller System serviced as well.

SRS Equipment

Types Of Collision

A Severe Frontal/NearFrontal Collision A Severe Side Collision (*) A Rear Collision

SRS Equipment

Seat Belt Pretensioner X (**) (Both Sides) X (**) (Impact Side Only)

No air bag and seat beltpretensioner will be activated in

a rear collision

Driver Air Bag X

Passenger Air Bag X (**)

Side Air Bag X (**) (Impact Side Only)

X: the SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision.(*) In a side collision, the seat belt pretensioners and the side air bags deploy (only on the side in which the collision occurs).

137

(**) Passenger OccupantClassification System: the passengerfront and side air bags and the seat beltpretensioner are designed to deploywhen the passenger occupantclassification sensor detects apassenger sitting on the passenger'sseat.Note: In a frontal offset collision, theequipped air bags and pretensionersmay all deploy depending on thedirection, angle, and rate of impact.

Warning!

Unapproved modifications or serviceprocedures to the passenger seatassembly, its related components, seatcover, or cushion may inadvertently changethe air bag deployment in case of a frontalcollision. This could result in death orserious injury to the front passenger if thevehicle is involved in a collision. A modifiedvehicle may not comply with requiredFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS).

If it is necessary to modify the air bagsystem for persons with disabilities, contactyour authorized dealer.

Warning!

Deployed air bags and seat beltpretensioners cannot protect you inanother collision. Have the air bags, seatbelt pretensioners, and the seat beltretractor assemblies replaced by anauthorized dealer immediately. Also, havethe Occupant Restraint Controller Systemserviced as well.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light inyour instrument panel could mean youwon’t have the air bags to protect you in acollision. If the light does not come on as abulb check when the ignition is first turnedon, stays on after you start the vehicle, or ifit comes on as you drive, have anauthorized dealer service the air bagsystem immediately.

Placing an object on the floor under thefront passenger seat may prevent theoccupant classification sensor fromworking properly, which may result inserious injury or death in a collision. Do notplace any objects on the floor under thefront passenger seat.

If there is a fault present in the occupantclassification sensor, both the IndicatorLight and the Air Bag Warning Light willilluminate to show that the PassengerAdvanced Front Air Bag is deactivated.Should this occur, the PassengerAdvanced Front Air Bag will remaindeactivated until the fault is cleared. Thisindicates that you should take the vehicleto an authorized dealer for serviceimmediately.

138

SA

FETY

Limitations To SRS AirBag

In severe collisions such as thosedescribed in "SRS Air Bag DeploymentCriteria" paragraph, the applicable SRSair bag equipment will deploy.However, in some accidents, theequipment may not deploy dependingon the type of collision and its severity.Limitations To Front / Near FrontCollision DetectionFront/near front collisions may not bedetected as severe enough to deploythe SRS air bag equipment:

Impacts involving trees or poles A.

Frontal offset impact to the vehicle B.

Rear-ending or running under atruck's tail gate.

Limitations To Side CollisionDetectionSide collisions may not be detected assevere enough to deploy the SRS airbag equipment:

Side impacts involving trees or polesA.

Side impacts with two-wheeledvehicles B.

Roll-over.

A

B

03040600-121-001

Front/Near Front Collision

03040600-122-001

Rear End Collision

139

Passenger OccupantClassification Sensor

Your vehicle is equipped with apassenger occupant classificationsensor as a part of the supplementaryrestraint system. This sensor isequipped in the passenger's seatcushion. This sensor measures theelectrostatic capacity of thepassenger's seat.The SRS unit is designed to prevent thepassenger front and side Air Bags andseat belt pretensioner system fromdeploying if the passenger Air Bagdeactivation indicator light turns on.To reduce the chance of injuries causedby deployment of the passenger AirBag, the system deactivates thepassenger front and side Air Bags andalso the seat belt pretensioner systemwhen the passenger Air Bagdeactivation indicator light turns on.This system shuts off the passengerfront and side Air Bags and seat beltpretensioner system, so make sure thepassenger Air Bag deactivationindicator light turns on.The air bag/seat belt pretensionersystem warning light flashes and thepassenger Air Bag deactivationindicator light illuminates if the sensorshave a possible malfunction. If thishappens, the passenger front and sideAir Bags and seat belt pretensionersystem will not deploy.

Note: If a passenger is seated asshown in the following figure thepassenger occupant classificationsensor cannot detect a passengersitting on the passenger's seat correctlyand the deployment/non-deployment ofthe Air Bags cannot be controlled asindicated in the passenger Air Bagdeactivation indicator light on/offcondition chart.

Warning!

If a child restraint system, child, smallteenager or adult in the front passengerseat is seated improperly, the occupantmay provide an output signal to theoccupant classification sensor that isdifferent from the occupant’s properlyseated weight input. This may result inserious injury or death in a collision.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light inyour instrument panel could mean youwon’t have the air bags to protect you in acollision. If the light does not come on as abulb check when the ignition is first turnedon, stays on after you start the vehicle, or ifit comes on as you drive, have anauthorized dealer service the air bagsystem immediately.

A

B

03040600-123-001

Side Collision

03040600-124-002

Roll-Over Collision

140

SA

FETY

Placing an object on the floor under thefront passenger seat may prevent theoccupant classification sensor fromworking properly, which may result inserious injury or death in a collision. Do notplace any objects on the floor under thefront passenger seat.

If there is a fault present in the occupantclassification sensor, both the IndicatorLight and the Air Bag Warning Light willilluminate to show that the PassengerAdvanced Front Air Bag is deactivated.Should this occur, the PassengerAdvanced Front Air Bag will remaindeactivated until the fault is cleared. Thisindicates that you should take the vehicleto an authorized dealer for serviceimmediately.

Warning!

Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g.,backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in thefront passenger seat. Holding an objectmay provide an output signal to theoccupant classification sensor that isdifferent than the occupant’s properlyseated weight input, which may result inserious injury or death in a collision.

Passenger Air Bag DeactivationIndicator LightsThese indicator lights turn on to remindyou that the passenger front and sideAir Bags and seat belt pretensioner willor will not deploy during a collision.

Warning!

If the Indicator Light remains illuminatedfor an adult passenger, have an authorizeddealer service the air bag systemimmediately. Failure to do so may causeserious injury or death. If the Indicator Lightis illuminated with the words “PASSAIRBAG OFF,” the Passenger AdvancedFront Air Bag will not deploy in the event ofa collision.

03040702-12A-001

Passenger Not Sitting Correct

06070400567567

Passenger Air Bag Deactivated

141

Never place a rear-facing child restraintin front of an air bag. A deployingpassenger front air bag can cause death orserious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rear-facingchild restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in avehicle with a rear seat.

Children 12 years or younger shouldalways ride buckled up in a vehicle with arear seat.

Note:

The system requires about10 seconds to alternate betweenturning the passenger front and sideAir Bags and seat belt pretensionersystem on or off.

The passenger air bag deactivationindicator light may turn on repeatedly ifluggage or other items are put on thepassenger seat, or if the temperatureof the vehicle's interior changessuddenly.

The passenger air bag deactivationindicator light may turn on for10 seconds if the electrostatic capacityon the passenger seat changes.

The air bag/seat belt pretensionersystem warning light might turn on ifthe passenger seat receives a severeimpact.

If the passenger Air Bagdeactivation indicator light does notturn on after installing a child restraintsystem on the passenger seat, first,reinstall your child restraint systemaccording to the procedure in thisOwner Handbook. Then, if thepassenger Air Bag deactivation OFFindicator light still does not turn on,contact an authorized dealer as soonas possible.

If the passenger Air Bagdeactivation indicator light turns onwhen an occupant is seated directly inthe passenger seat, have thepassenger readjust their posture bysitting with their feet on the floor, andthen refastening the seat belt. If thepassenger Air Bag deactivationindicator light remains turned on, slidethe passenger seat as far back aspossible. Contact an authorized dealeras soon as possible.

Passenger Air Bag DeactivationIndicator Light On/Off ConditionChartIf the passenger occupant classificationsensor is normal, the indicator lightturns on when the ignition is switchedON. The light turns off after a fewseconds. Then, the indicator light turnson or is off under the followingconditions:

142

SA

FETY

Condition Detected By ThePassenger OccupantClassification System

Passenger Air BagDeactivation Indicator Light

Passenger Front And SideAir Bags

Passenger Seat BeltPretensioner System

Empty (Not occupied) On Deactivated Deactivated

A child is seated in a childrestraint system (*) On Deactivated Deactivated

Adult (**) Off Ready Ready

(*) The occupant classification sensor may not detect a child seated on the seat, in a child restraint system, or a junior seatdepending on the child's physical size and seated posture.(**) If a smaller adult sits on the passenger seat, the sensors might detect the person as being a child depending on theperson's physique.If the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on when the ignition is switched ON and does not turn on asindicated in the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart, do not allow an occupant to sit in thepassenger seat and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to achild 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

143

Warning!

No objects should be placed over ornear the air bag on the instrument panel orsteering wheel because any such objectscould cause harm if the vehicle is in acollision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.

Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open themmanually. You may damage the air bagsand you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional. Theprotective covers for the air bag cushionsare designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.

Relying on the air bags alone could leadto more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrainyou properly. In some collisions, air bagswon’t deploy at all. Always wear your seatbelts even though you have air bags.

Maintaining Your Air BagSystem

Warning!

Modifications to any part of the air bagsystem could cause it to fail when youneed it. You could be injured if the air bagsystem is not there to protect you. Do notmodify the components or wiring, includingadding any kind of badges or stickers tothe steering wheel hub trim cover or theupper right side of the instrument panel. Donot modify the front bumper, vehicle bodystructure, or add aftermarket side steps orrunning boards.

It is dangerous to try to repair any partof the air bag system yourself. Be sure totell anyone who works on your vehicle thatit has an air bag system.

Do not attempt to modify any part ofyour air bag system. The air bag may inflateaccidentally or may not function properly ifmodifications are made. Take your vehicleto an authorized dealer for any air bagsystem service. If your seat, including yourtrim cover and cushion, needs to beserviced in any way (including removal orloosening/tightening of seat attachmentbolts), take the vehicle to your authorizeddealer. Only manufacturer approved seataccessories may be used. If it is necessaryto modify the air bag system for personswith disabilities, contact your authorizeddealer.

EVENT DATARECORDER (EDR)This vehicle is equipped with an eventdata recorder (EDR).The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle,data that will assist in understandinghow a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

How various systems in your vehiclewere operating.

Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

How far (if at all) the driver waspushing the accelerator and/or brakepedal.

How fast the vehicle was traveling.This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.

144

SA

FETY

Note:

EDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crash or nearcrash-like situation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDRdata with the type of personallyidentifying data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the information ifthey have access to the vehicle or theEDR.FCA will not disclose any of the

data recorded in an EDR to a third partyunless:

A written agreement from thevehicle owner or the lessee isobtained.

Officially requested by the police orother law enforcement authorities.

Used as a defense for FCA in a lawsuit, claim, or arbitration.

Ordered by a judge or court.However, if necessary, FCA will:

Use the data for research on FCAvehicle performance, including safety.

Disclose the data or thesummarized data to a third party forresearch purposes without disclosingvehicle or owner identificationinformation.

Recording Of Vehicle DataThis vehicle is equipped with acomputer which records the followingmain vehicle data related to vehiclecontrols, operation, and other drivingconditions.

Recorded Data

Vehicle conditions such as enginespeed and vehicle speed.

Driving operation conditions suchas accelerator and brake pedals, andinformation related to theenvironmental circumstances while thevehicle is driven.

Malfunction diagnosis informationfrom each on-vehicle computer.

Information related to controls ofother on-vehicle computers.

The recorded data may vary dependingon the vehicle grade and optionalequipment. Voice and images are notrecorded.

145

Data HandlingFCA and its subcontracting parties mayobtain and use the recorded data forvehicle malfunction diagnosis, researchand development, and qualityimprovement.FCA will not disclose or provide any ofthe obtained data to a third partyunless:

An agreement from the vehicleowner (agreements from lessor andlessee for leased vehicle) is obtained.

Officially requested by the police orother law enforcement authorities.

For statistical processing by aresearch institution, after processingthe data so that identification of theowner or the vehicle is impossible.

CONSTANTMONITORINGThe following components of the AirBag systems are monitored by adiagnostic system:

Crash Sensors, And DiagnosticModule (Sas Unit)

Front Air Bag Sensors

Air Bag Modules

Side Crash Sensors

Air Bag/Seat Belt PretensionerSystem Warning Light

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Related Wiring

With Passenger OccupantClassification System

Passenger Air Bag DeactivationIndicator Light

Passenger Occupant ClassificationSensor

Passenger Occupant ClassificationModule — If EquippedThe diagnostic module continuouslymonitors the system's readiness. Thisbegins when the ignition is switchedON and continues while the vehicle isbeing driven.

146

SA

FETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . .148BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . .149MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . . .151AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152SPORT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . .157SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .157RADAR SENSORS —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160REAR PARK ASSIST —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161PARKVIEW REAR BACKUPCAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .166REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . .172VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . .175TOWING TRAILERS . . . . . . . . . .177DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

147

STARTING THEENGINEStarting The Engine

Before starting the engine, adjust theseat, the interior rear view mirrors, andthe door mirrors, and fasten the seatbelt correctly.

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob from the vehicle and lock yourvehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the transmission gearselector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible tochildren, and do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with Advanced KeylessEntry in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A childcould operate power windows, othercontrols, or move the vehicle.

Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heatbuild-up may cause serious injury or death.

Never press the accelerator pedal forstarting the engine.

Models Equipped With AManual Transmission

Proceed as follows:

1. Engage the parking brake and placethe gear selector in NEUTRAL.

2. Place the start button in the ACCmode.

3. Fully depress the clutch pedalwithout touching the accelerator.

4. Place the start button in the ONmode, push and release it as soon asthe engine starts. If the engine does notstart within 10 seconds, push the startbutton to OFF mode and wait for10-15 seconds before repeating thestarting procedure.

Models Equipped WithAn AutomaticTransmission

Proceed as follows:

1. Engage the parking brake and placethe gear selector to P (PARK) or N(NEUTRAL).

2. Fully depress the brake pedalwithout touching the accelerator.

3. Place the start button in the ACCmode.

4. Place the start button in the ONmode, push and release it as soon asthe engine starts. If the engine does notstart within 10 seconds, push the startbutton to OFF mode and wait for10-15 seconds before repeating thestarting procedure.

Cold Weather Operation

Regarding Cold Start DisableWhen the ambient temperature isextremely low, the engine may notcrank even when the engine startingprocedure is performed. At this time,the Cold Start Disable Indicator light inthe instrument cluster flashes. However,this does not indicate a problem.Perform the necessary procedures (see“Warning lights And Messages”paragraph in “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” chapter).Regarding Ice BreakerWhen the ambient temperature is low,the start of cranking may be delayedafter engine starting procedure isperformed. At this time, the Cold StartDisable Indicator light in the instrumentcluster illumintes. However, this doesnot indicate a problem.Refer to your authorized dealerregarding other related parts which areto be input such as function name,operating scenario (condition) of eachfunction, indicator operation, and useroperation/procedure information.

148

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Extended Park StartingNote: Extended Park condition occurswhen the vehicle has not been startedor driven for at least 30 days.

1. Install a battery charger or jumpercables to the battery to ensure a fullbattery charge during the crank cycle.

2. Place the ignition in the STARTmode and release it when the enginestarts.

3. If the engine fails to start within10 seconds, place the ignition in theSTOP (OFF/LOCK) mode, wait fiveseconds to allow the starter to cool,then repeat the Extended Park Startingprocedure.

4. If the engine fails to start after eightattempts, allow the starter to cool for atleast 10 minutes, then repeat theprocedure.

Caution!

To prevent damage to the starter, do notcrank continuously for more than10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to15 seconds before trying again.

After Starting —Warming Up The Engine

Proceed as follows:

1. Travel slowly, letting the engine runat a reduced RPM, without acceleratingsuddenly.

2. It is recommended to wait until thedigital engine coolant temperatureindicator starts moving beforedemanding full performance.

Stopping The Engine

Proceed as follows:

1. Park the car in a position that is notdangerous for oncoming traffic, ifequipped with manual transmissionplace gear selector in FIRST (1st) orREVERSE (R) gear, if equipped withautomatic transmission place the gearselector to PARK (P).

2. Push and release the ignition buttonto STOP the engine.

BRAKE SYSTEMThis vehicle has power-assisted brakesthat adjust automatically throughnormal use. Should power-assist fail,you can stop by applying greater forcethan normal to the brake pedal. But thedistance required to stop will be greaterthan usual.Note: Always depress the brake pedalwith the right foot. Applying the brakeswith the unaccustomed left foot couldslow your reaction time to anemergency situation resulting ininsufficient braking operation.Do not drive with your foot held on theclutch pedal or brake pedal, or hold theclutch pedal depressed halfwayunnecessarily. Doing so could result inthe following:

The clutch and brake parts will wearout more quickly.

The brakes can overheat andadversely affect brake performance.

Warning!

Riding the brakes can lead to brakefailure and possibly a collision. Driving withyour foot resting or riding on the brakepedal can result in abnormally high braketemperatures, excessive lining wear, andpossible brake damage. You would nothave your full braking capacity in anemergency.

149

Driving a vehicle with the “BrakeWarning Light” on is dangerous. Asignificant decrease in braking performanceor vehicle stability during braking mayoccur. It will take you longer to stop thevehicle or will make your vehicle harder tocontrol. You could have a collision. Havethe vehicle checked immediately.

Caution!

Wear shoes appropriate for driving in orderto avoid your shoe contacting the brakepedal when depressing the acceleratorpedal.

Parking BrakeNote: Driving with the parking brake onwill cause excessive wear of the brakeparts.

Warning!

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the park brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle or in a location accessible tochildren. A child could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move thevehicle.

Be sure the park brake is fullydisengaged before driving; failure to do socan lead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the park brake whenleaving your vehicle, or it may roll andcause damage or injury. Also be certain toleave a manual transmission in REVERSE(R) or FIRST (1st) gear. Failure to do so mayallow the vehicle to roll and cause damageor injury.

Setting the Parking BrakeDepress the brake pedal and then firmlypull the parking brake lever fullyupwards with sufficient force to hold thevehicle in a stationary position.

Releasing the Parking BrakeDepress the brake pedal and pull theparking brake lever upwards, thenpress the release button. While holdingthe button, lower the parking brakelever all the way down to the releasedposition.

Warning LightThe warning light turns on when thesystem has a malfunction. Refer to“Warning Lights And Messages” in“Getting To Know Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

Brake Pad Wear IndicatorWhen the disc brake pads becomeworn, the built-in wear indicatorscontact the rotors. This causes ascreeching noise to warn that the padsshould be replaced. When you hear thisnoise contact your authorized dealer assoon as possible.

05050102-12A-001

Parking Brake

1 — Parking Brake Lever2 — Parking Brake Release Button

150

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Brake AssistDuring emergency braking situationswhen it is necessary to depress thebrake pedal with greater force, thebrake assist system provides brakingassistance, thus enhancing brakingperformance. When the brake pedal isdepressed hard or depressed morequickly, the brakes apply more firmly.

Note:

When the brake pedal is depressedhard or depressed more quickly, thepedal will feel softer but the brakes willapply more firmly. This is a normaleffect of the brake assist operation anddoes not indicate a malfunction.

When the brake pedal is depressedhard or depressed more quickly, amotor/pump operation noise may beheard. This is a normal effect of thebrake assist and does not indicate amalfunction.

The brake assist equipment doesnot supersede the functionality of thevehicle's main braking system.

MANUALTRANSMISSIONManual Transmission

Warning!

You or others could be injured if you leavethe vehicle unattended without having thepark brake fully applied. The park brakeshould always be applied when the driveris not in the vehicle, especially on anincline.

Caution!

Never drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicleon a hill with the clutch pedal partiallyengaged, as this will cause abnormal wearon the clutch.

To engage the gears, press the clutchpedal fully and put the gear selectorinto the required position. The diagramfor gear engagement is shown on theknob.

Depress the clutch pedal all the waydown while shifting, then release itslowly.Your vehicle is equipped with a deviceto prevent shifting to REVERSE (R) bymistake. Push the gear selectordownward and shift to REVERSE (R).A natural driving posture can beachieved by lightly gripping the gearselector from the side without having torest your elbow on the center console.If shifting to REVERSE (R) is difficult,shift back into neutral, release theclutch pedal, and try again.

With Parking Sensor SystemWhen the gear selector is shifted to theREVERSE (R) position with the ignitionplaced in the ON mode, the parkingsensor system is activated an audiblesound is heard.

05210101-12A-001

Gear Selector

151

Caution!

Keep your foot off the clutch pedalexcept when shifting gears. Also, do notuse the clutch to hold the vehicle on an hillor grade. Riding the clutch will causeneedless clutch wear and damage.

Do not apply any excessive lateral forceto the gear selector when changing fromfifth to fourth gear. This could lead to theaccidental selection of second gear, whichcould result in damage to the transmission.

Make sure the vehicle comes to acomplete stop before shifting to REVERSE(R). Shifting to REVERSE (R) while thevehicle is still moving may damage thetransmission.

Reverse can only be engaged when thevehicle is completely stationary. With theengine running, wait at least two secondswith the clutch pedal fully pressed beforeengaging reverse to prevent damage to thegears.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION — IFEQUIPPEDShift Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with aninterlock system that holds thetransmission gear selector in PARK (P)unless the brakes are applied. To shiftthe transmission out of PARK (P), theignition must be placed in the ON/RUNmode (engine running or not) and thebrake pedal must be pressed.

Warning!

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gearwhen the engine is idling normally and yourfoot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehiclecould injure those in or near the vehicle. Aswith all vehicles, you should never exit avehicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignitionis in the OFF mode, the transmission islocked in PARK, securing the vehicleagainst unwanted movement.

When leaving the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the transmission gearselector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible tochildren), and do not leave the ignition inthe ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, ormove the vehicle.

Caution!

Damage to the transmission may occur ifthe following precautions are not observed:

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSEonly after the vehicle has come to acomplete stop.

Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine isabove idle speed.

Before shifting into any gear, make sureyour foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

The gear selector must be in PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) to operate the starter.

152

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

The transmission gear selector hasPARK (P), REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N),DRIVE (D), and MANUAL (M)(+/–) shiftpositions.The transmission may be shifted freelyfrom REVERSE (R), to NEUTRAL (N), toDRIVE (D), to MANUAL (M)(+/–).

Note: Even if you intend to use theautomatic transmission functions as atraditional automatic, you should alsobe aware that you can inadvertentlyshift into manual shift mode and aninappropriate gear may be retained asthe vehicle speed increases. If you

notice the engine speed going higher orhear the engine racing, confirm youhave not accidentally slipped intomanual shift mode (refer to “ManualShift Mode” paragraph in this section).

Shift Position IndicationThe gear selector position (PRNDM) isilluminated when the ignition is placedin the ON mode.Note: If one of the following actions isperformed, the gear selector position isdisplayed for five minutes even if theignition is placed in a mode other thanON.

The ignition is placed in the OFFmode.

The driver's door is opened.

Gear Position IndicationIn MANUAL (M) shift mode, the “M” ofthe shift position indication illuminatesand the number of the selected gear isdisplayed.

Gear Selector Positions

PARK (P)PARK (P) locks the transmission andprevents the driveshaft from rotating.

Warning!

Never use the PARK position as asubstitute for the park brake. Always applythe park brake fully when parked to guardagainst vehicle movement and possibleinjury or damage.

Your vehicle could move and injure youand others if it is not in PARK. Check bytrying to move the gear selector out ofPARK with the brake pedal released. Makesure the transmission is in PARK beforeleaving the vehicle.

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gearwhen the engine is idling normally and yourfoot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehiclecould injure those in or near the vehicle. Aswith all vehicles, you should never exit avehicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignitionis in the OFF mode, the transmission islocked in PARK, securing the vehicleagainst unwanted movement.

When leaving the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock the vehicle.

05210200LHD12AT001

Gear Selector And Pattern

153

Never leave children alone in a vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children shouldbe warned not to touch the park brake,brake pedal or the transmission gearselector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible tochildren), and do not leave the ignition inthe ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, ormove the vehicle.

Caution!

Before moving the transmission gearselector out of PARK, you must place theignition from the LOCK/OFF mode to theON/RUN mode, and also press the brakepedal. Otherwise, damage to the gearselector could result.

DO NOT race the engine when shiftingfrom PARK or NEUTRAL into another gearrange, as this can damage the drivetrain.

Note:

Shifting into PARK (P), NEUTRAL(N) or REVERSE (R) while the vehicle ismoving can damage yourtransmission.

Shifting into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE(R) when the engine is running fasterthan idle can damage thetransmission.

REVERSE (R)This range is for moving the vehiclebackward. Shift into REVERSE onlyafter the vehicle has come to acomplete stop.With Parking Sensor system: whenthe gear selector is shifted to theREVERSE (R) position with the ignitionplaced in the ON mode, the parkingsensor system is activated and anaudible sound is heard.

NEUTRAL (N)In NEUTRAL (N), the wheels andtransmission are not locked. The vehiclewill roll freely even on the slightestincline unless the parking brake orbrakes are applied.

Warning!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turnoff the ignition to coast down a hill. Theseare unsafe practices that limit yourresponse to changing traffic or roadconditions. You might lose control of thevehicle and have a collision.

Note: Do not shift into NEUTRAL (N)when driving the vehicle. Doing so will

damage the transmission. Press theparking brake or depress the brakepedal before moving the gear selectorfrom NEUTRAL (N) to prevent thevehicle from moving unexpectedly.

DRIVE (D)DRIVE (D) is the normal driving position.From a stop, the transmission willautomatically shift through all availablegears.

MANUAL (M)MANUAL (M) is the manual shift modeposition. Gears can be shifted up ordown by operating the gear selector.(Refer to “Manual Shift Mode”paragraph in this section).

Warning!

Do not downshift for additional enginebraking on a slippery surface. The drivewheels could lose their grip and the vehiclecould skid, causing a collision or personalinjury.

Active Adaptive Shift(AAS)Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)automatically controls the transmissionshift points to best suit the roadconditions and driver input. Thisimproves driving feel.The transmission may switch to AASmode when driving up and down154

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

slopes, cornering, driving at highelevations, or depressing theaccelerator pedal quickly while the gearselector is in the DRIVE (D) position.Depending on the road and drivingconditions/vehicle operations, gearshifting could be delayed or not occur,however, this does not indicate aproblem because the AAS mode willmaintain the optimum gear position.

Shift-Lock System

The shift-lock system prevents shiftingout of PARK (P) unless the brake pedalis depressed.To shift from PARK (P):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUNmode.

3. Press and hold the lock-releasebutton on the gear selector.

4. Move the gear selector.When the ignition is in the ACC or OFFmode, the gear selector cannot beshifted from PARK (P).The ignition cannot be placed in theOFF mode if the gear selector is not inPARK (P).

Shift Lock Override

If the gear selector will not move fromPARK (P) using the proper shiftprocedure, continue to press the brakepedal and proceed as follows:

1. Remove the shift lock override coverusing a cloth wrapped flat headscrewdriver.

2. Insert a screwdriver or similar toolinto the Override Access Hole, andpush the override button down.

3. Push and hold the lock releasebutton on the gear selector and movethe gear selector.

4. Take the vehicle to an authorizeddealer.

For Some ModelsProceed as follows:

1. Push the lock release button on thegear selector while also pushing downon the Shift Lock Override button.

2. Move the gear selector.

3. Take the vehicle to an authorizeddealer.

Manual Shift Mode

The manual shift mode gives you thefeel of driving a manual transmissionvehicle by allowing you to operate thegear selector manually.This allows you to control engine rpmand torque to the drive wheels muchlike a manual transmission when morecontrol is desired.To change to MANUAL (M) shift mode,shift the gear selector from DRIVE (D) toMANUAL (M). To return to automaticshift mode, shift the gear selector fromMANUAL (M) to DRIVE (D).You can shift between DRIVE (D) andMANUAL (M) mode at any time, withouttaking your foot off the accelerator.

05210206-12A-002

Shift Lock Override Access Hole

005210206-122-001

Shift Lock Override

155

Note:

If you change to manual shift modewhen the vehicle is stopped, the gearwill shift to M1.

If you change to manual shift modewhile the vehicle is moving it will remainin the current gear until a manual shiftrequest is made.

Indicators

Manual Shift Mode IndicationIn manual shift mode, the “M” of theshift position indication in theinstrument panel illuminates.

Gear Position IndicationThe numeral for the selected gearilluminates.

Manually Shifting Up/DownTo shift up to a higher gear, tap thegear selector rearward once (or tap the[+] shift paddle on the steering wheel, ifequipped).To shift down to a lower gear, tap thegear selector forward once (or tap the[-] shift paddle on the steering wheel, ifequipped).

Note:

If a requested downshift wouldcause the engine to over-speed, thatshift will not occur.

The system will ignore attempts toupshift at too low of a vehicle speed.

Do not drive the vehicle with thetachometer needle in the red zonewhile in manual shift mode.

During deceleration, thetransmission may automatically shiftdown depending on vehicle speed.

You can start out, from a stop, infirst or second gear. Tapping the gearselector rearward (+) (at a stop) willallow starting in second gear. Startingout in second gear can be helpful insnowy or icy conditions.

Paddle Mode — IfEquipped

Tapping one of the steeringwheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), ifequipped, while the gear selector is inDRIVE (D), will activate Paddle Mode (a

temporary manual mode). The currentgear will be displayed in the instrumentcluster, with the "M" also illuminated.The transmission will revert back tonormal operation (if the gear selectorremains in DRIVE) after a period of time,depending on accelerator pedal activity.Note: Because Paddle mode is onlytemporary, use of the MANUAL (M)position is recommended if you need todrive the vehicle in a particular gear forlong periods.

Driving Tips

OvertakingFor extra power when passing anothervehicle or climbing steep grades, pressthe accelerator fully. The transmissionwill shift to a lower gear, depending onvehicle speed.

Note:

The accelerator pedal may initiallyfeel heavy as it is being pressed, thenfeel lighter as it is pressed further. Thischange in pedal force controls whetheror not kickdown should be performed.

While the gear selector is in theMANUAL (M) position and the DynamicStability Control (DSC) is turned off,manual shift mode does not switch toautomatic shift mode even if theaccelerator pedal is completelypressed. Tap the gear selector forwardor rearward to select the appropriategear.

05210207-12A-002

Instrument Panel

1 — Manual Shift Mode Indication2 — Gear Position Indication

156

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Climbing steep grades from a stopTo climb a steep grade from a stoppedposition:

1. Press the brake pedal.

2. Shift to DRIVE (D) or M1, dependingon the load weight and gradesteepness.

3. Release the brake pedal whilegradually accelerating.

Descending steep gradesWhen descending a steep grade, shiftto lower gears, depending on loadweight and grade steepness.Descend slowly, using the brakes onlyoccasionally to prevent them fromoverheating.

SPORT MODEThe Sport mode increases steeringfeedback to the driver with slightincrease in effort and changes thetransmission shift schedules for moreaggressive shifting. This driving mode isuseful while driving on twisty roadswhere more steering precision isdesired in spirited cornering.To activate Sport mode, toggle theSport Mode button forward and hold forapproximately 2 seconds. You will see“Sport” illuminate in the InstrumentPanel cluster.

SPEED CONTROLSpeed Control

This is an electronically controlleddriving assistance feature that allowsthe desired vehicle speed to bemaintained, without having to press theaccelerator pedal.This feature can be used at a speedabove 25 mph (40 km/h) on longstretches of dry, straight roads with fewvariations (e.g. motorways).It is therefore not recommended to usethis feature on city roads with traffic. Donot use it in town.

Warning!

Do not use Speed Control under thefollowing conditions:

hilly terrain

steep inclines

heavy or unsteady traffic

slippery or winding roads

similar restrictions that requireinconsistent speedUsing the Speed Control under thefollowing conditions is dangerous andcould result in loss of vehicle control.

05210101-12A-001AB

SPORT Button

157

Activation / Deactivation

Note: When the ignition is placed inthe OFF position, the system statusbefore it was turned off is stored. Forexample, if the ignition is placed in theOFF position while the Speed Control isoperating, the system will be operablewhen the ignition is placed in the ONposition the next time.

Activating Speed ControlPush the ON button located on theright side of the steering wheel with theother Speed Control buttons. Thewarning light (amber) in the instrumentcluster will illuminate.

Warning!

Leaving the Speed Control system onwhen not in use is dangerous. You couldaccidentally set the system or cause it togo faster than you want. You could losecontrol and have an accident. Always leavethe system off when you are not using it.

Deactivating Speed ControlPush the OFF/CAN button. The

warning light (amber) in theinstrument cluster turns off.When a speed has been set: the

warning light (green) in theinstrument cluster is illuminated, pushand hold the OFF/CAN button or pushthe OFF/CAN button twice todeactivate.When a speed has not been set: the

warning light (amber) in theinstrument cluster is illuminated, pushthe OFF/CAN button to deactivate.

Setting A Desired Speed

Proceed as follows:

1. Activate the Speed Control deviceby pushing the ON button. The cruisewarning light (amber) illuminates.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed,which must be more than 25 mph(40 km/h).

3. Set the Speed Control by pushingthe SET (-) button at the desired speed.The Speed Control is set at themoment the SET (-) button is pushed.Release the accelerator pedalsimultaneously. The warning light(green) illuminates.Note: The Speed Control settingcannot be performed under thefollowing conditions:

05100101-877-877AB

Speed Control Buttons

158

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Automatic transmission: the gearselector is in the PARK or NEUTRALposition.

Manual transmission: the gearselector is in the NEUTRAL position orwhen the clutch is disengaged (clutchis depressed).

The parking brake is applied.Release the SET (-) button at thedesired speed, otherwise the speed willcontinue decreasing while the SET (-)button is pushed and held (exceptwhen the accelerator pedal isdepressed).

Note:

Release the SET (-) button at thedesired speed, otherwise the speedwill continue decreasing while theSET (-) button is pushed and held(except when the accelerator pedal isdepressed).

On a steep grade, the vehicle maymomentarily slow down whileascending, or speed up whiledescending.

The Speed Control will cancel if thevehicle speed decreases below16 mph (25 km/h) when climbing asteep incline.

The Speed Control may cancel atabout 9 mph (15 km/h) below thepreset speed such as when climbing along, steep incline.

The vehicle’s set speed is displayed inthe instrument cluster.

Increasing Speed

To increase speed using the SpeedControl buttons:

Push the RES (+) button and hold it,your vehicle will accelerate. Release thebutton at the desired speed.

Push the RES (+) button and releaseit immediately, to adjust the set speed.Multiple pushes of the button willincrease the set speed according to thenumber of times it is pushed.Increasing speed with a single RES(+) button operation:

If the instrument cluster display forvehicle speed is indicated in mph:speed will increase in 1 mphincrements.

If the instrument cluster display forvehicle speed is indicated in km/h:speed will increase in 1 km/hincrements.To increase speed usingaccelerator pedal:

Press the accelerator pedal toaccelerate to the desired speed.

Push the SET (-) button and release itimmediately. This new set speed will besaved.Note: Accelerate the vehicle to speedup temporarily with the accelerator

pedal when the Speed Control is on.Increasing the speed will not interferewith, or change the set speed. Takeyour foot off the accelerator to return tothe set speed.

Decreasing Speed

To decrease speed using the SpeedControl buttons:

Push the SET (-) button and hold it,the vehicle will gradually slow down.Release the button at the desiredspeed.

Push the SET (-) button and releaseit immediately to adjust the set speed.Multiple button pushes will decreasethe set speed according to the numberof times it is pushed.Decreasing speed with a single SET(-) button operation:

If the instrument cluster display forvehicle speed is indicated in mph: thespeed will decrease in 1 mphincrements.

If the instrument cluster display forvehicle speed is indicated in km/h: thespeed will decrease in 1 km/hincrements.

Resume Speed

If any other method besides theOFF/CAN button was used to cancelcruising speed (such as applying thebrake pedal or pressing in the clutch

159

pedal) and the system is still activated,the most recent set speed willautomatically resume when the RES (+)button is pushed.If vehicle speed is below 25 mph(40 km/h), increase the vehicle speedup to 16 mph (25 km/h) or more andpush RES (+) button.

Temporarily CancelingThe System

Warning!

Leaving the Speed Control system onwhen not in use is dangerous. You couldaccidentally set the system or cause it togo faster than you want. You could losecontrol and have an accident. Always leavethe system OFF when you are not using it.

To temporarily cancel the system, useone of these methods:

Slightly press the brake pedal.

Press the clutch pedal (if equippedwith a manual transmission).

Push OFF/CAN button.If the RES (+) button is pushed whenthe vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h)or higher, the system reverts to thepreviously set speed.Note: If any of the following conditionsoccur, the Speed Control system istemporarily canceled:

The parking brake is applied.

Automatic Transmission: thegear selector is in the PARK orNEUTRAL position.

Manual Transmission: the gearselector is in the NEUTRAL position.

Automatic Transmission: theSpeed Control cannot be canceledwhile driving in manual mode (gearselector shifted from D to M position).Therefore, engine braking will not beapplied even if the transmission isshifted down to a lower gear. Ifdeceleration is required, lower the setspeed or press the brake pedal.

When the Speed Control system istemporarily canceled, the speed cannotbe reset.

RADAR SENSORS —IF EQUIPPEDRear Radar Sensors

The following systems use the rearradar sensors:

Blind Spot Monitoring System (BSM)

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)The radar sensors function by detectingthe radio waves reflected off of a vehicleapproaching from the rear, or anobstruction, sent from the radar sensor.The radar sensors are installed insidethe rear bumper, one each on the leftand right sides.

Always keep the surface of the rearbumper near the radar sensors clean sothat the radar sensors operate normally.Also, do not apply items such asstickers.

07080915112112

Radar Sensor Locations

160

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Caution!

If the rear bumper receives a severeimpact, the system may no longer operatenormally. Stop the system immediately andcontact an authorized dealer.

The detection ability of the radarsensors has limitations. In the followingcases, the detection ability may bedecreased, and the system may notoperate normally:

The rear bumper near the radarsensors has been damaged.

Snow, ice or mud has adhered to theradar sensors on the rear bumper.

Operating in weather conditions suchas rain, snow and fog.Note: Under the following conditions,the radar sensors cannot detect objectsor it may be difficult to detect them:

Stationary objects on a road or aroad side such as small, two-wheeledvehicles, bicycles, pedestrians,animals, and shopping carts.

Vehicle shapes which do not reflectradar waves well such as empty trailerswith a low vehicle height and sportscars.

Vehicles are shipped with the directionof the radar sensors adjusted for eachvehicle to a loaded vehicle condition so

that the radar sensors detectapproaching vehicles correctly. If thedirection of the radar sensors haschanged, contact an authorized dealer.The radar sensors are regulated by therelevant radio wave laws of the countryin which the vehicle is driven. If thevehicle is driven abroad, authorizationfrom the country in which the vehicle isdriven may be required.

Note:

For repairs or replacement of theradar sensors, bumper repairs, paintwork, or replacement near the radarsensors, consult an authorized dealer.

Turn off the radar system whenpulling a trailer or while an accessory,such as a bicycle carrier, is installed tothe rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, theradio waves emitted by the radar willbe blocked causing the system to notoperate normally.

REAR PARK ASSIST— IF EQUIPPEDRear Park Assist

Warning!

Do not rely completely on the parkingsensor system and be sure to confirm thesafety around your vehicle visually whendriving. This system can assist the driver inoperating the vehicle in the forward andbackward directions while parking. Thedetection ranges of the sensors are limited,therefore, driving the vehicle while relyingonly on the system may cause an accident.Always confirm the safety around yourvehicle visually when driving.

Parking and other potentially dangerousmaneuvers are, however, always thedriver’s responsibility. When performingthese operations, always make sure thatthere are no other people (especiallychildren) or animals on the route you wantto drive into. The parking sensors are anaid for the driver, but the driver must neverallow their attention to lapse duringpotentially dangerous maneuvers, eventhose executed at low speeds.

The Rear Park Assist System uses fourultrasonic sensors (two rear sensorsand two rear corner sensors) to detectobstructions around the vehicle whileparking the vehicle in a garage orduring parallel parking when the gearselector is in REVERSE. 161

The system is equipped with an assistdevice to notify the driver of theapproximate distance from the vehicleto the surrounding obstruction using aaudible alert.

Note:

Do not install any accessories withinthe detection ranges of the sensors. Itmay affect the system operation.

Depending on the type ofobstruction and the surroundingconditions, the detection range of asensor may narrow, or the sensorsmay not be able to detectobstructions.

The system may not operatenormally under the followingconditions:

Mud, ice, or snow adhered to thesensor area (operation will return tonormal when removed).

The sensor area is frozen (operationwill return to normal when the ice isthawed).

The sensor is covered by a hand orexcessive force has been applied tothe bumper.

The vehicle is on a steep incline.

Under extremely hot or coldweather conditions.

The vehicle is driven on bumps,inclines, gravel, or grass coveredroads.

Anything which generatesultrasound is near the vehicle, such asanother vehicle's horn, the enginesound of a motorcycle, the air brakesof a large-sized vehicle, or anothervehicle's sensors.

The vehicle is driven in heavy rain orin road conditions causing watersplash.

A antenna for a radio transmitter isinstalled to the vehicle.

The vehicle is moving towards a tallor square curbstone.

An obstruction is too close to thesensor.

The following types of obstructionsmay not be detected:

Thin objects such as wire or rope.

Things which absorb sonic waveseasily such as rain or snow.

Angular shaped objects.

Very tall objects, and those whichare wide at the top.

Small, short objects.

Obstructions under the bumpermay not be detected. Obstructionsthat are lower than the bumper or thinwhich may have been initially detectedbut are no longer detected as thevehicle approaches more closely.

Always have the system inspectedby an authorized dealer if any force isapplied to the bumpers, even in aminor accident. If the sensors havebeen repositioned in any way, theycannot detect obstructions.

The system may have a malfunctionif the audible signal does not operate.Contact an authorized dealer.

The beeper which indicates asystem malfunction may not be heardif the ambient temperature is extremelycold, or mud, ice, or snow adheres tothe sensor area. Remove any foreignmaterial from the sensor area.

When installing a trailer hitch,contact an authorized dealer.

05200100-121-001

Parking Sensor Locations

162

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Caution!

Only have repairs on the bumper in thearea of the sensors carried out by aauthorized dealer. Repairs on the bumperthat are not carried out properly maycompromise the operation of the parkingsensors.

Only have the bumpers repainted or anyretouches to the paint work in the area ofthe sensors carried out by a authorizeddealer. Incorrect paint application couldaffect the operation of the parking sensors.

Sensor Detection Range

The sensors detect obstructions withinthe following range:

Lateral Detection Range:19 inches (50 cm)

Rear Detection Range: 59 inches(150 cm)

System Operation

The system is operational when theignition is in the ON position and thegear selector is shifted to REVERSE.When an audible signal sounds, thesystem is enabled for use.

163

Parking Sensor Audible Alert

The audible alert will sound while the system is operating according to the following chart:

Rear Sensor

Distance Detection Area Distance Between Vehicle AndObstruction Audible Alert (*)

Farthest distance Approx. 59 - 23 inches (150 cm - 60 cm) Slow intermittent sound

Far distance Approx. 23 -17 inches (60 - 45 cm) Medium intermittent sound

Middle distance Approx. 17 -13 inches (45 - 35 cm) Fast intermittent sound

Close distance Within approx. 13 inches (35 cm) Continuous sound

(*) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction.

Rear Corner Sensor

Distance Detection Area Distance Between Vehicle AndObstruction Audible Alert (**)

Far distance Approx. 19 - 14 inches (50 - 38 cm) Medium intermittent sound

Middle distance Approx. 14 - 9.8 inches (38 - 25 cm) Fast intermittent sound

Close distance Within approx. 9.8 inches (25 cm) Continuous sound

(**) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction.Note: If an obstruction is detected in a zone for six seconds or more, the audible alert stops, unless the obstruction is withinthe close distance zone. If the same obstruction is detected in another zone, the corresponding audible alert is heard.

164

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

When A Warning Alert Is Activated

The system notifies the driver of an obstacle by activating the audible alert.

Beep How To Check

The audible alert is not heard. The system may have a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer as soon aspossible.

When the engine is turned ON, or if the parking sensordetects a problem while driving, an intermittent audible

alert is heard one to four times ( * ).

Remove any foreign material from the sensor area. If the system continues to soundthe audible alert, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

( * ) The number of times the audible alert is heard changes depending on the malfunction location.

165

PARKVIEW REARBACKUP CAMERA —IF EQUIPPEDOperation

The camera is located on the trunk lid,above the license plate.

Switching The Display To Rear ViewCamera Mode:Place the gear selector in the REVERSEposition, after the ignition is turned toON, to switch the display to rear-viewcamera mode.

Note:

When the gear selector is movedfrom the REVERSE position and put inany other position, the screen returnsto the previous display mode.

When parking in REVERSE, takecare over obstacles that may be aboveor under the camera’s display range.

When the display is cold, theimages could be more blurred thanusual, making it difficult to check theconditions of the area around thevehicle. Always use extreme cautionand verify the real conditions of thearea behind the vehicle with you owneyes.

If water, snow, or mud is depositedon the camera lens, clean it with a softcloth. If this does not clean it, use amild detergent.

If the camera is subjected to abrupttemperature changes (from hot to coldor vice versa), the rear-view monitormay not work properly.

When replacing tires, contact anauthorized dealer. Replacing the tirescan cause the guide lines that appearon the display to be misaligned.

Warning!

Always use extreme caution and verifythe real conditions of the area behind thevehicle. Backing up while looking only atthe screen is dangerous and can lead to anaccident or collision with an object. Therear-view monitor is simply a system to aidreversing. The view on the display canshow a situation that differs from the realone.

Do not use the rear-view monitor underthe following conditions:

Roads covered in ice or snow.

When snow chains are mounted or thetemporary space saver spare wheel isfitted.

The rear trunk is not completely closed.

The vehicle is on a sloping road.

Using the rear-view monitor under theconditions listed above is dangerous andcan cause damage to persons and/or thevehicle.

07040110-124-008

Rear Camera Location

166

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Caution!

Do not apply excessive force to thecamera. You could alter the position andangle of the camera. Do not disassemble,modify or remove it as this couldcompromise the seal.

The camera’s cover is made of plastic.Do not apply degreasers, organic solvents,wax or glass polish to the camera’s cover.If some substance ends up on the cover,clean it off immediately with a soft cloth.

Do not rub the cover too much, norpolish it with abrasive compounds or hardbrushes. The cover could be damaged andcreate image problems.

If the vehicle has been involved in afrontal, lateral or rear collision, the rearparking camera’s alignment (location orinstallation angle) may have been altered.Contact a authorized dealer.

If the display shows "no video signal",there may be a problem with the camera.Contact an authorized dealer.

DisplayNote: The images on the display canshow a situation that differs from theactual view.

The field of view varies depending onthe vehicle and the road conditions. Thefield of view is limited. Objects belowthe bumper or around it’s sides may notbe displayed.

The distance displayed by the cameraview differs from the actual view, as therear parking camera is equipped with aspecial lens.The camera could capture anynon-standard accessories installed onthe vehicle. Do not install non-standardaccessories that could interfere with thecamera’s view, such as lights orreflectors.

07080913987987

Camera View

1 — Blocked Area2 — Rear Bumper

07080913988988

Camera Field Of View

167

Note: If it is difficult to see the displayunder the following conditions, it doesnot mean that there is a malfunction:

In dark areas.

When the temperature around thelens is particularly high or low.

When the camera is wet from rainor due to a high atmospheric humidity.

When there is some foreign depositaround the camera, such as mud.

When the camera lens reflectssunlight or a headlight beam.

The image on the display may bedelayed if the temperature around thecamera is low.

Caution!

To avoid vehicle damage, ParkViewshould only be used as a parking aid. TheParkView camera is unable to view everyobstacle or object in your drive path.

To avoid vehicle damage, the vehiclemust be driven slowly when using ParkViewto be able to stop in time when an obstacleis seen. It is recommended that the driverlook frequently over his/her shoulder whenusing ParkView.

Looking At The Display

The vehicle width guide lines aredisplayed on the screen as a referenceto show the width of the vehiclecompared to the width of the parkingspace to be entered while in REVERSE.

Vehicle Width Guide Lines: theseguide lines serve as a referenceshowing the width of the vehicle.

Distance Guide Lines: these linesindicate the approximate distance fromthe rear of the vehicle (the rear edge ofthe bumper). The red and yellow linesindicates the points at about 19 inches(50 cm), for the red line and 39 inches(1 m) for the yellow line, from the rearbumper (central point of each line).

Warning!

Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using the ParkView Rear BackUp Camera. Always check carefully behindyour vehicle, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles,obstructions, or blind spots before backingup. You are responsible for the safety ofyour surroundings and must continue topay attention while backing up. Failure todo so can result in serious injury or death.

Rear View CameraOperation

The operating modes of the rear viewcamera when the vehicle is inREVERSE vary depending on traffic,road, and vehicle conditions. Also, theamount of turning and the duration ofthe maneuver vary depending on theconditions. Therefore, it is important tocheck the surrounding conditions andadapt the steering as necessary.Note: The images from the rearparking camera shown on the monitorare reversed (mirror image).

1. Place the gear selector in theREVERSE position to switch the displayto rear view camera mode.

2. Check the surrounding conditionsand begin backing up.

07080913-111-111

Vehicle Width Guide Lines

168

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

3. Once the vehicle starts to enter theparking space, proceed slowly inREVERSE while keeping the vehiclewidth guide lines away from the twosides of the parking space.

4. Continue to adjust the steeringwheel until the vehicle width guide linesare parallel with the two sides of theparking space.

5. Once the guide lines are parallel,straighten the steering wheel andreverse slowly into the parking space.Continue to check the vehicle’ssurroundings and stop in the bestposition possible (if the parking spacehas dividing lines, check that the vehiclewidth guide lines are parallel with them).

6. When the gear selector is movedfrom the REVERSE position and put inany other position, the screen returns tothe previous display mode.

Note:

Since there may be somedifferences between the displayedimage and the real conditions, alwaysvisually inspect the area behind thevehicle, and the surrounding areas, tomake sure they are completely clear.

In the image of the parking space(or garage) shown above, the rear ofthe vehicle and the distance guide linesmay seem parallel on the monitor, butmay not be when the parked vehicle isinspected.

When you enter a parking spacewith a dividing line only on one side,the dividing line and the vehicle widthguide lines may appear parallel on themonitor, but may not be when theparked vehicle is inspected.

Road Conditions AndDisplayed Image

There are some differences betweenwhat is shown on the display, and theactual road conditions.The different perceptions of distancecould lead to an accident. Theconditions that can lead to the differentperceptions of distance, listed below,must be taken into consideration:

07080913989989

Entering Parking Spot

A — Rear Camera ViewB — Check Surrounding Area

07080913990990

Entering Parking Spot

A — Rear Camera ViewB — Check Surrounding Area

169

When The Vehicle Slopes Due ToThe Weight Of Passengers AndLoad:

When the vehicle is rear heavy, theobject on the screen seems to befurther away than it really is.

When The Road Behind TheVehicle Slopes Steeply:

When the vehicle is on a steep uphill(downhill) slope, the object on thescreen seems to be further away than itreally is.

Three Dimensional Object BehindThe Vehicle:

Since the distance guide line display isbased on a flat surface, the distance toa three dimensional object on thescreen differs from the actual distance.

07080913991991

Loaded Vehicle Camera Angle

1 — Object2 — Variance

07080913992992

Downhill Camera Angle

1 — Distance Between The Vehicle AndObject Displayed On The Screen2 — Actual Distance Between The Ve-hicle And Object3 — Appears Farther Than Actual Di-stance4 — Object At Actual Position5 — Object On Screen

07080913993993

Downgrade Camera Angle

1 — Distance Between The Vehicle AndObject Displayed On The Screen2 — Actual Distance Between The Ve-hicle And Object3 — Appears Closer Than Actual Di-stance4 — Object On Screen5 — Object At Actual Position

170

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Adjusting The ImageQuality

The image quality can be adjusted withthe gear selector in the REVERSEposition.

Four adjustments can be made:brightness, contrast, tint and color. Giveattention to the vehicle’s surroundingswhile making adjustments:

1. Select the icon on the top left of thescreen to display the tabs.

2. Select the desired tab.

3. Use the cursor to adjust thebrightness, contrast, tint and color. If areset is needed, press the reset button.

4. Select the icon on the top left of thescreen to close the tabs.

Warning!

Adjusting the rear-view camera imagequality must always be done when thevehicle is stationary. Do not adjust therear-view camera image quality whilevehicle driving. Adjusting the image quality(brightness, contrast, color and tint) of therear-view camera while driving the vehicleis dangerous since it could distract thedriver and cause a serious accident.

07080913994994

Three-Dimensional Object CameraView

A — Object In ViewB — Actual Distance To ObjectC — Appears Farther Than Actual

07080914-111-111

Image Quality Adjustments

171

REFUELING THEVEHICLERefueling The Vehicle

Stop the engine before refueling.

Fuel RequirementsVehicles with catalytic converters oroxygen sensors must use ONLYUNLEADED FUEL, which will reduceexhaust emissions and keep spark plugfouling to a minimum.Fuel: Premium unleaded fuel.

Octane Rating(Anti-knock index): 91(R + M)/2 method orabove (96 RON orabove) (U.S. federallaw requires thatoctane ratings be

posted on gasoline station pumps).Regular unleaded fuel with an octanerating from 87 to 90 (91 to 95 RON) canbe used, but this will reduceperformance slightly, such as reducedengine output, and engine knocking.Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane(91 RON) will negatively affect theemission control system performanceand could also cause engine knockingand serious engine damage.While operating on gasoline with anoctane number of 87, hearing a lightknocking sound from the engine is nota cause for concern. However, if theengine is heard making a heavy

knocking sound, see your authorizeddealer immediately. Use of gasoline withan octane number lower than 87 cancause engine failure and may void ornot be covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Poor quality gasolinecan cause problems such as hardstarting, stalling, and hesitations. If youexperience these symptoms, tryanother brand of gasoline beforeconsidering service for the vehicle.Gasoline blended with oxygenates suchas alcohol or ether compounds aregenerally referred to as oxygenatedfuels.The common gasoline blend that canbe used with your vehicle is ethanolblended at no more than 15%. Gasolinecontaining alcohol, such as ethanol ormethanol, may be marketed under thename "Gasohol".Vehicle damage and problems resultingfrom the use of the following may notbe covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty:

Alcohol containing more than 15%ethanol.

Gasoline or alcohol containingmethanol.

Leaded fuel or leaded alcohol.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require theuse of cleaner burning gasoline referredto as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline containsoxygenates and are specifically blendedto reduce vehicle emissions andimprove air quality.The use of reformulated gasoline isrecommended. Properly blendedreformulated gasoline will provideimproved performance and durability ofengine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/OxygenateBlends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleadedgasoline with oxygenates such asethanol.

Caution!

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanolor gasoline containing more than 15%ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends mayresult in starting and drivability problems,damage critical fuel system components,cause emissions to exceed the applicablestandard, and/or cause the “MalfunctionIndicator Light” to illuminate. Pleaseobserve pump labels as they should clearlycommunicate if a fuel contains greater than15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from usinggasoline containing more than 15%ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containingmethanol are not the responsibility ofthe manufacturer and may void or not

172

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

be covered under New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-FlexFuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) arecompatible with gasoline containing upto 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline withhigher ethanol content may void theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertentlyfueled with E-85 fuel, the engine willhave some or all of these symptoms:

Operate in a lean mode.

OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light”on.

Poor engine performance.

Poor cold start and cold drivability.

Increased risk for fuel systemcomponent corrosion.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl ManganeseTricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that isblended into some gasoline to increaseoctane. Gasoline blended with MMTprovides no performance advantagebeyond gasoline of the same octanenumber without MMT. Gasoline blendedwith MMT reduces spark plug life andreduces emissions system performancein some vehicles. The manufacturerrecommends that gasoline without

MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMTcontent of gasoline may not beindicated on the gasoline pump;therefore, you should ask your gasolineretailer whether the gasoline containsMMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal andCalifornia reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating, gasolines thatcontain detergents, corrosion andstability additives are recommended.Using gasolines that have theseadditives will help improve fueleconomy, reduce emissions, andmaintain vehicle performance.

Designated TOP TIERDetergent Gasolinecontains a higher levelof detergents to furtheraide in minimizingengine and fuel systemdeposits. When

available, the usage of Top TierDetergent gasoline is recommended.Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.Indiscriminate use of fuel systemcleaning agents should be avoided.Many of these materials intended forgum and varnish removal may containactive solvents or similar ingredients.These can harm fuel system gasket anddiaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

Caution!

Follow these guidelines to maintain yourvehicle’s performance:

The use of leaded gasoline is prohibitedby Federal law. Using leaded gasoline canimpair engine performance and damagethe emissions control system.

An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel orignition malfunctions can cause thecatalytic converter to overheat. If you noticea pungent burning odor or some lightsmoke, your engine may be out of tune ormalfunctioning and may require immediateservice. Contact your authorized dealer forservice assistance.

The use of fuel additives, which are nowbeing sold as octane enhancers, is notrecommended. Most of these productscontain high concentrations of methanol.Fuel system damage or vehicleperformance problems resulting from theuse of such fuels or additives is not theresponsibility of the manufacturer and mayvoid or not be covered under the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

Note: Intentional tampering with theemissions control system can result incivil penalties being assessed againstyou.

173

Carbon MonoxideWarnings

Warning!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases isdeadly. Follow the precautions below toprevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

Do not inhale exhaust gases. Theycontain carbon monoxide, a colorless andodorless gas, which can kill. Never run theengine in a closed area, such as a garage,and never sit in a parked vehicle with theengine running for an extended period. Ifthe vehicle is stopped in an open area withthe engine running for more than a shortperiod, adjust the ventilation system toforce fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

Guard against carbon monoxide withproper maintenance. Have the exhaustsystem inspected every time the vehicle israised. Have any abnormal conditionsrepaired promptly. Until repaired, drive withall side windows fully open.

Refueling Procedure

Fuel Filler DoorNote: Always use only a designatedFCA fuel filler cap or an approvedequivalent, available at your authorizeddealer. The wrong cap can result in aserious malfunction of the fuel andemission control systems.

When the fuel filler door end is pressedwith the doors unlocked, the fuel fillerdoor rises.

The fuel filler door operates inconjunction with the doorlocking/unlocking mechanism.To close, press the fuel filler door until aclick sound is heard.

Note:

Make sure to lock both the doorswhen leaving the vehicle.

Lock the doors after closing the fuelfiller door. If the fuel filler door is closedafter locking the doors, the fuel fillerdoor cannot be locked.

Fuel Filler CapTo remove the fuel filler cap, turn itcounterclockwise. Attach the removedcap to the inner side of the fuel fillerdoor.

To close the fuel filler cap, turn itclockwise until a click is heard.

Warning!

Never have any smoking materials lit inor near the vehicle when the gas cap isremoved or the tank is being filled.

Never add fuel when the engine isrunning. This is in violation of most stateand federal fire regulations and may causethe MIL to turn on.

04040201-12A-002

Fuel Filler Door04040202-12A-001

Fuel Filler Cap

174

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

A fire may result if gasoline is pumpedinto a portable container that is inside of avehicle. You could be burned. Always placegas containers on the ground while filling.

Do not apply any object/plug to the endof the filler which is not provided for thevehicle. The use of non-compliantobjects/plugs could cause a pressureincrease inside the tank, resulting indangerous situations.

Do not use a mobile phone near therefueling pump: risk of fire.

Emergency Fuel FillerDoor ReleaseIf the battery is discharged, the fuel fillerdoor cannot be opened. In this case,the fuel filler door can be opened bytaking care of the discharged batterysituation.If the fuel filler door cannot be openedeven if the discharged battery situationhas been resolved, the electrical systemmay have a malfunction.In this case, the fuel filler door can beopened using the following procedureas an emergency measure:

1. Open the trunk and pull the centersection of the plastic fastener andremove the fastener.

2. Partially peel back the cover insidethe trunk, then pull the emergencyrelease lever.

VEHICLE LOADINGCertification Label

As required by National Highway TrafficSafety Administration regulations, yourvehicle has a certification label affixed tothe driver's side door or pillar.This label contains the month and yearof manufacture, Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) front and rear, andVehicle Identification Number (VIN). AMonth-Day-Hour (MDH) number isincluded on this label and indicates theMonth, Day and Hour of manufacture.The bar code that appears on thebottom of the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissibleweight of your vehicle including driver,passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.The label also specifies maximumcapacities of front and rear axlesystems (GAWR). Total load must belimited so GVWR and front and rearGAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined asthe allowable load weight a truck cancarry, including the weight of the driver,all passengers, options and cargo.

08100100-121-002

Trunk Interior

1 — Plastic Fasteners2 — Cover

08100100-122-001

Fuel Door Emergency Release

3 — Emergency Release Lever

175

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissibleload on the front and rear axles. Theload must be distributed in the cargoarea so that the GAWR of each axle isnot exceeded.Each axle GAWR is determined by thecomponents in the system with thelowest load carrying capacity (axle,springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axlesor suspension components sometimesspecified by purchasers for increaseddurability does not necessarily increasethe vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle CertificationLabel represents the actual tire size onyour vehicle. Replacement tires must beequal to the load capacity of this tiresize.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriatefor the tire size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure foryour vehicle for all loading conditions upto full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is definedas the total weight of the vehicle with allfluids, including vehicle fuel, at fullcapacity conditions, and with nooccupants or cargo loaded into thevehicle. The front and rear curb weightvalues are determined by weighing yourvehicle on a commercial scale beforeany occupants or cargo are added.

Loading

The actual total weight and the weightof the front and rear of your vehicle atthe ground can best be determined byweighing it when it is loaded and readyfor operation.

The entire vehicle should first beweighed on a commercial scale toinsure that the GVWR has not beenexceeded. The weight on the front andrear of the vehicle should then bedetermined separately to be sure thatthe load is properly distributed over thefront and rear axle. Weighing the vehiclemay show that the GAWR of either thefront or rear axles has been exceededbut the total load is within the specifiedGVWR. If so, weight must be shiftedfrom front to rear or rear to front asappropriate until the specified weightlimitations are met. Store the heavieritems down low and be sure that theweight is distributed equally. Stow allloose items securely before driving.Improper weight distributions can havean adverse effect on the way yourvehicle steers and handles and the waythe brakes operate.

Caution!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe GVWR or the maximum front and rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could cause you tolose control. Also overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

176

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

TOWING TRAILERSTrailer Towing

Your car is not designed for towing.

Recreational TowingAn example of "recreational towing" istowing your vehicle behind amotorhome.The transmission is not designed fortowing this vehicle on all four wheels.

Caution!

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage tothe drivetrain will result. If this vehiclerequires towing, make sure the drivewheels are OFF the ground.

Towing this vehicle in violation of theabove requirements can cause severetransmission damage. Damage fromimproper towing is not covered under theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

DRIVING TIPSEngine Break-InRecommendation

No special break-in is necessary, but afew precautions in the first 620 miles(1000 km) may add to the performance,economy, and life of the vehicle:

Do not race the engine.

Do not maintain one constant speed,either slow or fast, for a long period oftime.

Do not drive constantly at full-throttleor high engine rpm for extendedperiods of time.

Avoid unnecessary hard stops.

Avoid full-throttle starts.

Saving Fuel AndProtection Of TheEnvironmentHow you operate your vehicledetermines how far it will travel on atank of fuel.Use these suggestions to help save fueland reduce CO 2:

Avoid long warm-ups. Once theengine runs smoothly, begin driving.

Avoid fast starts.

Drive at lower speeds.

Anticipate when to apply the brakes(avoid sudden braking).

Follow the maintenance scheduleand contact your authorized dealer.

Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

Slow down on rough roads.

Keep the tires properly inflated.

Do not carry unnecessary weight.

Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving.

Keep the wheels in correctalignment.

Keep windows closed at highspeeds.

Slow down when driving incrosswinds and headwinds.

Hazardous DrivingWhen driving on ice or in water, snow,mud, sand, or similar hazards:

Be cautious and allow extra distancefor braking.

Avoid sudden braking and suddenmaneuvering.

Do not pump the brakes. Continue topress down on the brake pedal.

If you get stuck, select a lower gearand accelerate slowly. Do not spin therear wheels.

For more traction in starting onslippery surfaces such as ice or packedsnow, use sand, rock salt, chains,

177

carpeting, or other nonslip materialunder the rear wheels.Note: Use snow chains only on therear wheels.

Floor Mat SafetyInformation

Always use floor mats designed to fitthe footwell of your vehicle. Use onlyfloor mats that leave the pedal areaunobstructed and that are firmlysecured so that they cannot slip out ofposition and interfere with the pedals orimpair safe operation of your vehicle inother ways.

Warning!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded,or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor matfasteners may cause your floor mat tointerfere with the accelerator, brake, orclutch pedals and cause a loss of vehiclecontrol. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY orDEATH:

ALWAYS securely attach your floormat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOTinstall your floor mat upside down or turnyour floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirmmat is secured using the floor matfasteners on a regular basis.

ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTINGFLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE

before installing any other floor mat.NEVER install or stack an additional floormat on top of an existing floor mat.

ONLY install floor mats designed to fityour vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat thatcannot be properly attached and securedto your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to bereplaced, only use a FCA approved floormat for the specific make, model, and yearof your vehicle.

ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat onthe driver’s side floor area. To check forinterference, with the vehicle properlyparked with the engine off, fully depress theaccelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal(if present) to check for interference. If yourfloor mat interferes with the operation ofany pedal, or is not secure to the floor,remove the floor mat from the vehicle andplace the floor mat in your trunk.

ONLY use the passenger’s side floor maton the passenger’s side floor area.

ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fallor slide into the driver’s side floor areawhen the vehicle is moving. Objects canbecome trapped under accelerator, brake,or clutch pedals and could cause a loss ofvehicle control.

NEVER place any objects under the floormat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objectscould change the position of the floor matand may cause interference with theaccelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.

If the vehicle carpet has been removedand re-installed, always properly attachcarpet to the floor and check the floor matfasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.Fully depress each pedal to check forinterference with the accelerator, brake, orclutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.

It is recommended to only use mild soapand water to clean your floor mats. Aftercleaning, always check your floor mat hasbeen properly installed and is secured toyour vehicle using the floor mat fastenersby lightly pulling mat.

Rocking The VehicleNote: Too much rocking may causeengine overheating, transmission failure,and tire damage.

If you must rock the vehicle to free itfrom snow, sand or mud, depress theaccelerator slightly and slowly move thegear selector from 1 (D) to R.

04090400-USA-001

Floor Mat Retention Post Location

178

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Warning!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.Forces generated by excessive wheelspeeds may cause damage, or evenfailure, of the axle and tires. A tire couldexplode and injure someone. Do not spinyour vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 secondscontinuously without stopping when youare stuck and do not let anyone near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Caution!

When “rocking” a stuck vehicle byshifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, donot spin the wheels faster than 15 mph(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.

Revving the engine or spinning thewheels too fast may lead to transmissionoverheating and failure. It can also damagethe tires. Do not spin the wheels above30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (notransmission shifting occurring).

Winter DrivingCarry emergency gear, including tirechains, window scraper, flares, a smallshovel, jumper leads, and a small bagof sand or salt.

Contact an authorized dealer to checkthe following:

Have the proper ratio of antifreeze inthe radiator.

Inspect the battery and its leads.Cold reduces battery capacity.

Use an engine oil appropriate for thelowest ambient temperatures that thevehicle will be driven in.

Inspect the ignition system fordamage and loose connections.

Use winter windshield washer fluidthat will not freeze.

Note:

Remove snow before driving. Snowleft on the windshield is dangerous asit could obstruct vision.

Drive slowly. Braking performancecan be adversely affected if snow orice adheres to the brake components.If this situation occurs, drive the vehicleslowly, releasing the accelerator pedaland lightly applying the brakes severaltimes until the brake performancereturns to normal.

Do not open or close the soft top whenthe temperature is 41 °F (5 °C) or less.The material of the soft top could bedamaged by freezing.Do not apply excessive force to awindow scraper when removing ice orfrozen snow on the mirror glass andwindshield.

Never use warm or hot water forremoving snow or ice from windowsand mirrors as it could result in theglass cracking.

Snow TiresIf your vehicle is equipped with the tirepressure monitoring system (vehiclewith run-flat tires), the system may notfunction correctly when using tires withsteel wire reinforcement in thesidewalls.Use Snow Tires on all Four Wheels:Do not exceed the maximumpermissible speed for your snow tires orlegal speed limits.When snow tires are used, select thespecified size and pressure.

Tire ChainsCheck local regulations before using tirechains.If your vehicle is equipped with theTPMS system, the system may notfunction correctly when using tirechains.Install the chains on the rear tires only.Do not use chains on the front tires.

Note:

Chains may affect handling.

Do not go faster than 30 mph(50 km/h) or the chain manufacturer'srecommended limit, whichever is lower.

Drive carefully and avoid bumps,holes, and sharp turns.

179

Avoid locked-wheel braking.

Do not use chains on roads that arefree of snow or ice. The tires andchains could be damaged.

Chains may scratch or chipaluminium wheels.

Warning!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S,Snow) between front and rear axles cancause unpredictable handling. You couldlose control and have a collision.

Caution!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,observe the following precautions:

Because of restricted traction deviceclearance between tires and othersuspension components, it is importantthat only traction devices in good conditionare used. Broken devices can causeserious damage. Stop the vehicleimmediately if noise occurs that couldindicate device breakage. Remove thedamaged parts of the device before furtheruse.

Install device as tightly as possible andthen retighten after driving about ½ mile(0.8 km).

Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

Drive cautiously and avoid severe turnsand large bumps, especially with a loadedvehicle.

Do not drive for a prolonged period ondry pavement.

Observe the traction devicemanufacturer’s instructions on the methodof installation, operating speed, andconditions for use. Always use thesuggested operating speed of the devicemanufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph(48 km/h).

Do not use traction devices on acompact spare tire.

Driving In Flooded AreaNote: Do not drive the vehicle onflooded roads as it could cause shortcircuit of electrical/electronic parts, orwater enters the engine and causes itto lock up (hydro-lock) and stall. If thevehicle has been immersed in watercontact your authorized dealer.Although your vehicle is capable ofdriving through shallow standing water,consider the following Cautions andWarnings before doing so.

Warning!

Driving through standing water limitsyour vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do notexceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when drivingthrough standing water.

Driving through standing water limitsyour vehicle’s braking capabilities, whichincreases stopping distances. Therefore,after driving through standing water, driveslowly and lightly press on the brake pedalseveral times to dry the brakes.

Failure to follow these warnings mayresult in injuries that are serious or fatal toyou, your passengers, and others aroundyou.

180

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DO

PE

RAT

ING

Caution!

Always check the depth of the standingwater before driving through it. Never drivethrough standing water that is deeper thanthe bottom of the tire rims mounted on thevehicle.

Determine the condition of the road orthe path that is under water and if there areany obstacles in the way before drivingthrough the standing water.

Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) whendriving through standing water. This willminimize wave effects.

Driving through standing water maycause damage to your vehicle’s drivetraincomponents. Always inspect your vehicle’sfluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle,etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluidthat is milky or foamy in appearance) afterdriving through standing water. Do notcontinue to operate the vehicle if any fluidappears contaminated, as this may result infurther damage. Such damage is notcovered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Getting water inside your vehicle’sengine can cause it to lock up and stall out,and cause serious internal damage to theengine. Such damage is not covered bythe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

OverloadingNote: Be careful not to overload yourvehicle. The gross axle weight rating(GAWR) and the gross vehicle weightrating (GVWR) of the vehicle are on theMotor Vehicle Safety Standard Label onthe driver's door frame. Exceedingthese ratings can cause an accident orvehicle damage. You can estimate theweight of the load by weighing theitems (or people) before putting them inthe vehicle.

Driving On Uneven Road

Your vehicle's suspension andunderbody can be damaged if drivenon rough/uneven roads or over speedbumps at excessive speeds.Use care and reduce speed whentraveling on rough/uneven roads or overspeed bumps.Use care not to damage the vehicle'sunderbody, bumpers or muffler(s) whendriving under the following conditions:

Ascending or descending a slopewith a sharp transition angle.

Ascending or descending a drivewayor trailer ramp with a sharp transitionangle.This vehicle is equipped with low profiletires allowing class-leading performanceand handling. As a result, the sidewallof the tires are very thin and the tiresand wheels can be damaged if driventhrough potholes or on rough/unevenroads at excessive speeds.Use care and reduce speed whentraveling on rough/uneven roads orthrough potholes.

181

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . .183REPLACING A BULB. . . . . . . . . .183REPLACING FUSES . . . . . . . . . .194JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . .202TIRE SERVICE KIT . . . . . . . . . . .207JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . .216IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . .218TOWING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . .219EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .221

182

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

HAZARD WARNINGLIGHTSControl

The Hazard Warning Lights shouldalways be used when you stop on ornear a roadway in an emergency.The Hazard Warning Light switch islocated on the center instrument panelbelow the radio. Push the switch to turnthe Hazard Warning Lights on or off.Note: The Hazard Warning Lights warnother drivers that your vehicle is a traffichazard and that they must take extremecaution when near it.

When the switch is pushed, the HazardWarning Lights are active and alldirectional turn signals will flash on andoff to warn oncoming traffic of anemergency. Push the switch a secondtime to turn off the Hazard WarningLights. The hazard warning indicatorlights in the instrument cluster will flashsimultaneously.

Note:

The turn signals do not work whilethe Hazard Warning Lights areactivated.

Check local regulations about theuse of Hazard Warning Lights while thevehicle is being towed to verify that it isnot in violation of the law.

If the brake pedal is pressed whiledriving on slippery roads, theemergency stop signal system couldoperate causing all of the directionalturn signals to flash.

While the emergency stop signalsystem is operating, all of thedirectional turn signals automaticallyflash rapidly to caution the driver of avehicle following behind of a suddenbraking situation.

REPLACING A BULBGeneral Instructions

Warning!

Before proceeding with the replacementof the lamp wait for the exhaust pipes arecool: DANGER OF BURNS!

Modifications or repair of the electricalsystem performed incorrectly and withouttaking into account the technicalcharacteristics can cause malfunctions withthe risk of fire.

Halogen lamps contain gas underpressure, in the event of breakage becareful of the projection of fragments ofglass.

Halogen lamps must be handled bytouching only the metallic part. If thetransparent bulb is in contact with thefingers, reduces the intensity of the emittedlight and you can also affect the life of thelamp. In case of accidental contact, rub thebulb with a cloth dampened with alcoholand allow to dry.

05031100-L12A

Hazard Warning Light Switch

183

Before replacing a bulb check thecontacts for oxidation.

Replace blown bulbs with others ofthe same type and power.

After replacing a headlight bulb,always check its alignment.

To replace the bulb, contact yourauthorized dealer.

When a light is not working, checkthat the corresponding fuse is intactbefore replacing the bulb. For thelocation of fuses, refer to the section on“Replacing Fuses” in this chapter.

Caution!

Use the protective cover and carton for thereplacement bulb to dispose of the old bulbpromptly and out of the reach of children.

Note:

When removing the lens or light unitusing a flathead screwdriver, makesure that the flathead screwdriver doesnot contact the interior terminal. If theflathead screwdriver contacts theterminal, a short circuit may occur.

When the weather is cold or dampor after heavy rain or washing, thesurface of headlights or rear lights maysteam up and/or form drops ofcondensation on the inside. This is anatural phenomenon due to thedifference in temperature and humiditybetween the inside and the outside ofthe glass which does not indicate afault and does not compromise thenormal operation of lighting devices.The mist disappears quickly when thelights are turned on, starting from thecenter of the diffuser, extendingprogressively towards the edges.

184

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Replacement Bulbs

Light Bulbs Type Power

Front Position LED –

Front Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) W5W 5 W

Front Positions/Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) WY5W 5 W

High Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED –

High Beam/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) HB3 60 W

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED –

Low Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED –

Low Beam (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) H11 55 W

Front Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W

Side Direction Indicator Light WY5W 5 W

Fog Light H11 55 W

Rear Position Lights LED –

Stop Lights LED –

Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED –

Rear Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W

Rear Side Marker W5W 5 W

Reverse Light W21W 21 W

License Plate Light W5W 5 W

Overhead Light 10 W

Trunk Lid Light 5 W

185

Light Bulbs

Front LightsThe bulbs are arranged as follows :

Rear LightsThe bulbs are arranged as follows :

Replacing ExteriorLights

Headlights (low beam)(If Equipped with halogen bulb)Proceed as follows:

1. If you are changing the right bulb,start the engine, turn the steering wheelall the way to the right, and turn offengine. If you are changing the left bulb,turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is placed inthe OFF mode, and the headlightswitch is off.

3. Remove the fasteners in the sevenlocations and partially peel back themud guard.

4. Turn the cover counterclockwise andremove it, disconnect the connectorfrom the unit by pressing the tab on theconnector with your finger and pullingthe connector.

5. Turn the socket and bulb assemblycounterclockwise and remove it.

6. Disconnect the bulb from thesocket.

7. Install the new bulb in the reverseorder of the removal procedure.

04110102-L38-008

Head Lights

1 — High Beam with Daytime RunningLights (DRL)/Position Light/Low Beam/Side Marker2 — Front Indicator Light3 — Fog Light

04110102-L40-010

Rear Lights

4 — Side Marker — If Equipped5 — Position Light/Stop Light/Rear Di-rection Indicator Light6 — Reverse Light — If Equipped7 — Third Stop Light

08020499000002

Mud Guard

1 — Fasteners2 — Mud Guard

186

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Headlights (High Beam) WithDaytime Running Lights(If Equipped With LED Lamps)Proceed as follows:

1. If you are changing the right bulb,start the engine, turn the steering wheelall the way to the right, and turn offengine. If you are changing the left bulb,turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is placed inthe OFF mode, and the headlightswitch is off.

3. Remove the fasteners in the sevenlocations and partially peel back themud guard.

4. Turn the socket and bulb assemblycounterclockwise and remove it.

5. Turn the cover counterclockwise andremove it, disconnect the connectorfrom the unit by pressing the tab on theconnector with your finger and pullingthe connector.

6. Turn the socket and bulb assemblycounterclockwise and remove it.

7. Disconnect the bulb from thesocket.

8. Install the new bulb in the reverseorder of the removal procedure.

Front Direction Indicator LightsProceed as follows:

1. If you are changing the right bulb,start the engine, turn the steering wheelall the way to the right, and turn offengine. If you are changing the left bulb,turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is placed inthe OFF mode, and the headlightswitch is off.

3. Remove the fasteners in the fivelocations and partially peel back themud guard.

4. Disconnect the connector from theunit by pressing the tab on theconnector with your finger and pullingthe connector rearward.

5. Turn the socket and bulb assemblycounterclockwise and remove it.

08020499000010

Head Lamp Assembly

1 — High Beam Lamp2 — Position Lamp3 — Daytime Running Lamp

07031501206002

Mud Guard

187

6. Disconnect the bulb from thesocket.

7. Install the new bulb in the reverseorder of the removal procedure.

Fog LightsProceed as follows:

1. If you are changing the right bulb,start the engine, turn the steering wheelall the way to the right, and turn offengine. If you are changing the left bulb,turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is switchedoff, and the headlight switch is off.

3. Remove the fasteners in the fivelocations and partially peel back themud guard.

4. Disconnect the connector from theunit by pressing the tab on theconnector with your finger and pullingthe connector.

5. Turn the socket and bulb assemblycounterclockwise, extract the bulb andremove it.

6. Disconnect the bulb from thesocket.

7. Install the new bulb in the reverseorder of the removal procedure.

Brake lights / Tail lightsGo to your authorized dealer when thereplacement of this lights is necessary.

Side Direction Indicator LightsProceed as follows:

1. Make sure the ignition is placed inthe OFF mode, and the headlightswitch is off.

2. If you are changing the right bulb,start the engine, turn the steering wheelall the way to the right, and turn offengine. If you are changing the left bulb,turn the steering wheel to the left.

3. Remove the fasteners in the fivelocations and partially peel back themud guard.

4. Disconnect the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pressing the tab onthe connector with your finger andpulling the connector.

5. Remove the lens assembly bypressing the tab on the unit with yourfinger and pulling the unit forward tocompress in the internal catch, then pullthe cluster outwards.

6. Lift up the lens assembly, and thenremove the cluster and install the newside direction indicator lens assembly inthe reverse order of the removalprocedure.

07031501-207-001

Front Direction Indicator Housing

1 — Socket Assembly2 — Bulb

07031501208002

Direction Indicator Lamp Connector

188

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Front Side Marker(If Equipped With Halogen Bulb)Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the fasteners in the sevenlocations and partially peel back theupper side of the mud guard.

2. Turn the socket counterclockwise,remove socket assembly then removethe bulb.

3. Install the new bulb in the reverseorder of the removal procedure.

08020499000011

Side Direction Indicator

1 — Fasteners

07031501210001

Side Direction Indicator

2 — Lens Assembly

07031501211001

Side Direction Indicator

3 — Internal Catch4 — Lens Assembly 08070604-123-100

Front Side Marker

1 — Socket2 — Bulb Assembly

189

Rear Direction Indicator LightsProceed as follows:

1. Remove the retainers and the trunklid end trim.

2. Disconnect the connector from theunit by pressing the tab on theconnector with your finger.

3. Remove the screw and nuts.

4. Pull the taillight housing rearward toremove it.

5. Turn the socket and bulb assemblycounterclockwise to remove fromtaillight housing, and remove bulb.

07031501-212-002

Trunk Trim

1 — Retainers

07031501214002

Trunk Trim

2 — Connector

07031501213002

Rear Direction Indicator Socket

3 — Connector

07031501-215-001

Taillight Housing Fasteners

4 — Screw5 — Nuts

07031501-216-001

Rear of Vehicle

6 — Taillight Housing

190

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

6. Install the new bulb in the reverseorder of the removal procedure.

Reverse LightProceed as follows:

1. Make sure the ignition is placed inthe OFF mode, and the headlightswitch is off.

2. Turn the socket assemblycounterclockwise to remove, andremove bulb.

3. Install the new bulb in the reverseorder of the removal procedure.

Rear Side MarkerProceed as follows:

1. Push the lens assembly rearward tocompress the internal catch, then pullthe lens assembly outwards.

2. Turn the socket and bulb assemblycounterclockwise to remove, andremove bulb.

07031501-203-002

Taillight Housing

7 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

07031501-219-001

Reverse Light

1 — Socket Assembly2 — Bulb

08070605-123-100

Rear Side Marker

1 — Rear Side Marker Lens Assembly

191

3. Install the new bulb and thenreinstall the socket in the reverse orderof the removal procedure.

License Plate LightsProceed as follows:

1. Make sure the ignition is placed inthe OFF mode, and the headlightswitch is off.

2. Slide the unit as shown in the figureto remove it.

3. Turn the socket and bulb assemblycounterclockwise and remove, removebulb.

4. Install the new bulb in the reverseorder of the removal procedure. Insertcatch and push the housing back intoplace.

08070606-123-100

Side Marker Housing

2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

07031501220001

Trunk Lid

1 — License Plate Light Assembly

07031501-221-001

License Plate Light Housing

2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

192

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Replacing Interior LightBulbs

Overhead LightProceed as follows:

1. Using a suitable tool to preventdamage to the lens, remove theoverhead light by carefully prying on theedge of the lens.

2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.

3. Install the new bulb in the reverseorder of the removal procedure.

Trunk LightProceed as follows:

1. Using a suitable tool to preventdamage to the to the lens, remove thetrunk light lens by carefully prying onthe edge of the lens.

2. Disconnect the connector from thetrunk light lens.

3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.

4. Install the new bulb in the reverseorder of the removal procedure.

07031502-201-001

Overhead Light Location

1 — Overhead Light Lens

07031502-202-001

Trunk Light

1 — Trunk Light Lens

07031502-203-001

Trunk Light Housing

2 — Connector

193

REPLACING FUSESGeneral Information

Warning!

When replacing a blown fuse, alwaysuse an appropriate replacement fuse withthe same amp rating as the original fuse.Never replace a fuse with another fuse ofhigher amp rating. Never replace a blownfuse with metal wires or any other material.Failure to use proper fuses may result inserious personal injury, fire and/or propertydamage.

Before replacing a fuse, make sure thatthe ignition is off and that all the otherservices are switched off and/ordisengaged.

If the replaced fuse blows again, contactan authorized dealer.

If a general protection fuse for safetysystems (air bag system, braking system),power unit systems (engine system,transmission system) or steering systemblows, contact an authorized dealer.

Your vehicle's electrical system isprotected by fuses.If any lights, accessories, or controls donot work, inspect the appropriate circuitprotector. If a fuse has blown, the insideelement will be melted. If the same fuseblows again, go to an authorized dealeras soon as possible.

Fuse locationFuses are grouped together in two fuseboxes located in the interior on the leftside of the vehicle and under the hood.

Interior FusesIf the electrical system does not work,first inspect the fuses on the vehicle'sleft side.Proceed as follows:

1. Make sure the ignition is placed inthe OFF mode, and other switches areturned off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover (locatednear the door).

3. Press retaining clip and removeprotection cover.

4. Pull the fuse straight out with thefuse puller provided on the fuse blocklocated in the engine compartment.

5. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it isblown.

07031601-121-001

Fuse Panel Cover

07031601-122-001

Fuse Puller

07031601-ALL-001

Fuses

1 — Normal Fuse2 — Blown Fuse

194

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

6. Insert a new fuse of the sameamperage rating, and make sure it fitstightly. If it does not fit tightly, contactyour authorized dealer. If you have nospare fuses, borrow one of the samerating from a circuit not essential tovehicle operation, such as the audio oroutlet circuit.

7. Reinstall the cover and make surethat it is securely installed.Note: Always replace a fuse with agenuine FCA fuse or equivalent of thesame rating. Otherwise you maydamage the electric system.

Underhood FusesIf the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work and the fusesin the cabin are normal, inspect the fuseblock in the engine compartment. If afuse is blown, it must be replaced.Make sure the ignition is placed in theOFF mode, and other switches areturned off and remove the fuse blockcover. If the lock is forcefully opened,the fuse block cover may come incontact with the frame when it isremoved and become scratched.When removing the cover, remove itslowly according to the followingprocedure:

1. Disengage the rear lock by pressingdown on the front tab with your fingers.

2. Remove the front tab while slightlylifting the front of the cover.

3. Remove the cover while lifting it andsliding it to the rear.

4. If any fuse but the main fuse isblown, replace it with a new one of thesame amperage rating.

5. Reinstall the cover and make surethat it is securely installed.

07031601-123-001

Underhood Fuse Block

1 — Lock2 — Cover

07031601-ALL-002AB

Fuse

1 — Normal Fuse2 — Blown Fuse

195

Fuse Block (Engine Compartment)

07031602-121-001

196

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT

F01 ENG IG3 5 A Engine Control Systems

F02 ENG IG2 5 A Engine Control Systems

F03 HORN2 7.5 A Horn

F04 C/U IG1 15 A For Protection Of Various Circuits

F05 ENG IG1 7.5 A Engine Control System

F06 — — —

F07 INTERIOR 15 A Overhead Light

F08 — — —

F09 AUDIO2 15 A Audio System

F10 METER1 10 A Instrument Cluster

F11 SRS1 7.5 A Air Bag

F12 — — —

F13 RADIO 7.5 A Audio System

F14 ENGINE3 20 A Engine Control System

F15 ENGINE1 10 A Engine Control System

F16 ENGINE2 15 A Engine Control System

F17 AUDIO1 25 A Audio System

F18 A/C MAG 7.5 A Air Conditioner

F19 AT PUMP H/L HI 20 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped)

F20 AT 15 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped)

F21 D LOCK 25 A Power Door Locks

F22 H/L RH 20 A Headlight (RH)

F23 ENG + B2 7.5 A Engine Control System

197

DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT

F24 TAIL 20 A Taillights/Number Plate Lights/Position Lights

F25 — — —

F26 ROOM 25 A Overhead Light

F27 FOG 15 A Fog Lights

F28 H/CLEAN 20 A Headlight Washer (If Equipped)

F29 STOP 10 A Stop Lights/Rear Fog Light (If Equipped)

F30 HORN 15 A Horn

F31 H/L LH 20 A Headlight (LH)

F32 ABS/DSC S 30 A ABS/DSC System

F33 HAZARD 15 A Hazard Warning Flashers/Direction Indicators Lights

F34 FUEL PUMP 15 A Fuel System

F35 ENG + B3 5 A Engine Control System

F36 WIPER 20 A Windshield Wipers

F37 CABIN + B 50 A For Protection Of Various Circuits

F38 — — —

F39 — — —

F40 ABS/DSC M 50 A ABS/DSC System

F41 EVVT A/R PUMP 20 A Engine Control System

F42 — — —

F43 — — —

F44 FAN2 40 A Cooling Fan

F45 ENG.MAIN 40 A Engine Control System

F46 EPS 60 A Power Steering System

198

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT

F47 DEFOG 30 A Rear Window Defogger

F48 IG2 30 A For Protection Of Various Circuits

F49 — — —

F50 HEATER 40 A Air Conditioner

F51 — — —

F52 — — —

199

Fuse Block Interior

07031602-03F-002

200

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT

F01 RHT R 30 A —

F02 RHT L 30 A —

F03 — — —

F04 — — —

F05 F.OUTLET 15 A Accessory Sockets

F06 — — —

F07 AT IND 7.5 A AT Shift Indicator — If Equipped

F08 MIRROR 7.5 A Power Control Mirror

F09 R_DECK R 30 A —

F10 R_DECK L 30 A —

F11 F.WASHER 15 A Windshield Washer

F12 P.WINDOW 30 A Power Windows

F13 — — —

F14 SRS2/ESCL 15 A —

F15 — — —

F16 — — —

201

JACKING AND TIRECHANGING

Warning!

Do not attempt to change a tire on theside of the vehicle close to moving traffic.Pull far enough off the road to avoid thedanger of being hit when operating the jackor changing the wheel.

Being under a jacked-up vehicle isdangerous. The vehicle could slip off thejack and fall on you. You could be crushed.Never put any part of your body under avehicle that is on a jack. If you need to getunder a raised vehicle, take it to a servicecenter where it can be raised on a lift.

The jack is designed to be used as atool for changing tires only. The jack shouldnot be used to lift the vehicle for servicepurposes. The vehicle should be jacked ona firm level surface only. Avoid ice orslippery areas.

Tools Location

Your vehicle may be equipped with aspare tire, jack, lug wrench and toweyes. For details, contact an authorizeddealer.Tools are stored in the trunk.

Preparations ForJacking

To Remove The JackProceed as follows:

1. In the right side of the trunk, pull thecover tab to remove cover.

2. Turn the wing bolt and jack screwcounterclockwise.

08020100-122-002

Jack Tools

1 — Jack Lever2 — Lug Wrench (If Equipped)3 — Tow Eyes (If Equipped)

08020101-124-001

Jack Location

1 — Cover Tab2 — Jack And Tools Cover

202

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

To Secure The JackProceed as follows:

1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack withthe jack screw pointing back, and turnthe wing bolt clockwise to temporarilytighten it.

2. Turn the jack screw clockwise.

3. Turn the wing bolt completely tosecure the jack.

4. Insert the cover tabs and install thecover.

Warning!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in acollision or hard stop could endanger theoccupants of the vehicle. Always stow thejack parts and the spare tire in the placesprovided. Have the deflated (flat) tirerepaired or replaced immediately.

Maintenance

Always keep the jack clean.

Make sure the moving parts are keptfree from dirt or rust.

Make sure the screw thread isadequately lubricated.

Conditions Of Non-Use

Temperatures below -40°F (−40°C)

On sandy or muddy ground

On uneven ground

On steep roads

In extreme weather conditions

In direct contact with the engine orfor repairs under the vehicle

On boats

Jacking InstructionsNote: Make sure the jack is welllubricated before using it.

Warning!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the sideof the vehicle close to moving traffic, pullfar enough off the road to avoid being hitwhen operating the jack or changing thewheel.

Proceed as follows:

1. Stop the vehicle in a position thatdoes not cause any danger to trafficand lets you change the tire in safety, asfar as possible from the edge of thedriving lane. The ground must be flatand sufficiently compact.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Lightsand engage the parking brake.

3. For vehicles with automatictransmission, place the gear selector inPARK. For vehicles with manualtransmission, place gear selector inREVERSE and turn the engine to OFF.

4. Stop the engine. The motor must bekept off as long as the vehicle is liftedoff the ground.

5. Remove the jack and tools.

08020101-122-001

Jack Components

3 — Wing Bolt4 — Jack Screw

203

6. Block both the front and rear of thewheel diagonally opposite of the jackingposition. For example, if changing theright front tire, block the left rear wheel.

Removing A Tire

Warning!

Carefully follow these tire changingwarnings to help prevent personal injury ordamage to your vehicle:

Always park on a firm, level surface asfar from the edge of the roadway aspossible before raising the vehicle.

Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

Block the wheel diagonally opposite thewheel to be raised.

Set the parking brake firmly and set thetransmission in PARK.

Do not let any passenger sit in thevehicle when it is on a jack.

Do not get under the vehicle when it ison a jack. If you need to get under a raisedvehicle, take it to a service center where itcan be raised on a lift.

Only use the jack in the positionsindicated and for lifting this vehicle during atire change.

If working on or near a roadway, beextremely careful of motor traffic.

Proceed as follows:

1. Loosen the lug nuts by turning themcounterclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any lug nuts until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

2. Place the jack under the lift pointclosest to the tire being changed withthe jack head squarely under thejacking location.

3. Turn the jack screw in the directionshown and adjust the jack head so thatit is close to the jacking location.

4. Continue raising the jack headgradually by rotating the screw withyour hand until the jack head is insertedinto the lift point.

Caution!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle byjacking on locations other than thoseindicated in the Jacking Instructions for thisvehicle.

08020300-121-001

Blocking Right Front Tire And LeftRear Tire

08020301-123-001

Loosen Lug Nuts Counterclockwise

08020301-ALL-003

Raising The Jack

1 — Jack Head

204

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

5. Insert the jack lever and attach thelug wrench to tire jack.

Warning!

Being under a jacked-up vehicle isdangerous. The vehicle could slip off thejack and fall on you. You could be crushed.Never get any part of your body under avehicle that is on a jack. If you need to getunder a raised vehicle, take it to a servicecenter where it can be raised on a lift.

6. Turn the jack handle clockwise andraise the vehicle high enough so thatthe tire is just raised off the ground andcan be removed. Before removing thelug nuts, make sure your vehicle isfirmly in position and that it cannot slipor move.

Warning!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessarycan make the vehicle less stable. It couldslip off the jack and hurt someone near it.Raise the vehicle only enough to removethe tire.

7. Remove the lug nuts by turningthem counterclockwise, then removethe wheel.

Locking Lug Nuts — If EquippedIf your vehicle has optional anti-theftwheel lug nuts, one on each wheel willlock the tires and you must use aspecial key to unlock them. This key willattach to the lug wrench.Register them with the lockmanufacturer by filling out the cardprovided in the glove compartment andmailing it in the accompanyingenvelope. If you lose this key, contactan authorized dealer or use the lockmanufacturer's order form, which iswith the registration card.Accessory wheel locks cannot be usedon steel wheels. This includes situationswhen the spare tire is installed. If thespare tire is installed, one of the originallug nuts (which should still be in thevehicle) must be installed in place of thewheel lock.To Remove An Anti-theft Lug NutProceed as follows:

1. Obtain the special key for theanti-theft lug nut.

2. Place the special key on top of theanti-theft lug nut, and be sure to holdthe key square to it. If you hold the keyat an angle, you may damage both keyand nut. Do not use a power impactwrench.

3. Place the lug wrench on top of thekey and apply pressure. Turn thewrench counterclockwise.

08020301-121-001

Front Jacking Location

08020301-ALL-006

Jack With Lug Wrench Attached

205

To Install The Anti-theft Lug NutProceed as follows:

1. Place the special key on top of thenut, and be sure to hold the key squareto it. If you hold the key at an angle, youmay damage both key and nut. Do notuse a power impact wrench.

2. Place the lug wrench on top of thespecial key, apply pressure, and turn itclockwise.Mounting The TireProceed as follows:

1. Remove dirt and grime from themounting surfaces of the wheel andhub, including the hub bolts, with acloth.

2. Mount the tire and install the lugnuts with the beveled edge inward, thentighten them by hand.

Caution!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with thevalve stem facing outward. The vehiclecould be damaged if the spare tire ismounted incorrectly.

3. Turn the lug wrenchcounterclockwise and lower the vehicle.Use the lug wrench to tighten the nutsin the order shown.

Warning!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle offthe jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fullyuntil the vehicle has been lowered. Failureto follow this warning may result in seriousinjury.

4. After tightening the lug nuts, havethem checked with a torque wrench byyour authorized dealer or service stationto verify correct tightness.

5. Remove the tire blocks and storethe tools and jack.

6. Check the inflation pressure. Referto “Recommended Tire InflationPressure” in “Technical Specifications”for more information.With TPMSDo not push the tire pressuremonitoring system set switch afterinstalling the spare tire. The switch isonly to be pushed after installing therepaired flat tire or installing areplacement tire.Note: To prevent the jack and tool fromrattling, store them properly.

Warning!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in acollision or hard stop could endanger theoccupants of the vehicle. Always stow thejack parts and the spare tire in the placesprovided. Have the deflated (flat) tirerepaired or replaced immediately.

08020303-XX4-001

Clean Mounting Surface

08020303-122-001

Lug Nut Tightening Order

206

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

TIRE SERVICE KITTire Service Storage

The Tire Service Kit is located inside thetrunk.

The Tire Service Kit included with yourvehicle is for a temporary repair of aslightly damaged flat tire resulting fromrunning over nails or similar sharpobjects on the road surface.Perform the emergency flat tire repairwithout removing the nail or similarsharp object which punctured the tire.Note: Your vehicle is not equipped witha spare tire. In the event of a flat tire,use the Tire Service Kit to repair the tiretemporarily. When doing the repair, referto the instructions included in the TireService Kit. If an emergency repair wasperformed on a flat tire using the TireService Kit, contact an authorizeddealer to repair or replace the tire assoon as possible.

Tire Service KitComponents AndOperation

The Tire Service Kit includes thefollowing items:U.S.A. And Canada Markets:

Mexico Market:

08020202-121-003

Tire Service Kit Location

08070606457457

Tire Service Kit Components —U.S.A. And Canada Markets

1— Sealant Bottle2— Compressor3— Speed Restriction Sticker4— Repaired Tire Sticker5— Instructions

08070606456456

Tire Service Kit Components —Mexico Markets

1— Tire Sealant2— Compressor3— Valve Core Tool4— Injection Hose5— Spare Valve Core6— Speed Restriction Sticker7— Instructions

207

Tire Service UsagePrecautions

The tire sealant cannot be reused. If thesealant has been used, or is expired,purchase new tire sealant at anauthorized dealer.Note: The Tire Service Kit cannot beused in the following cases. Consult anauthorized dealer if any of theseconditions exist:

The period of effective use for thetire sealant has expired (the period ofeffectiveness is indicated on the bottlelabel)

The tear or puncture in the tireexceeds about 0.16 inches (4 mm)

The damage has occurred to anarea of the tire other than the tread

The vehicle has been driven withnearly no air remaining in the tire

The tire has come off the wheel rim

Damage to the wheel rim hasoccurred

The tire has two or more punctures

Sealing A Tire With TireService Kit

Warning!

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the sideof the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull farenough off the road to avoid the danger ofbeing hit when using the Tire Service Kit.

Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive thevehicle under the following circumstances:

If the puncture in the tire tread isapproximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

If the tire has any sidewall damage.

If the tire has any damage from drivingwith extremely low tire pressure.

If the tire has any damage from drivingon a flat tire.

If the wheel has any damage.

If you are unsure of the condition of thetire or the wheel.

Keep Tire Service Kit away from openflames or heat sources.

A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forwardin a collision or hard stop could endangerthe occupants of the vehicle. Always stowthe Tire Service Kit in the place provided.Failure to follow these warnings can resultin injuries that are serious or fatal to you,your passengers, and others around you.

Take care not to allow the contents ofTire Service Kit to come in contact withhair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kitsealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, orabsorbed through the skin. It causes skin,eye, and respiratory irritation. Flushimmediately with plenty of water if there isany contact with eyes or skin. Changeclothing as soon as possible, if there is anycontact with clothing.

Tire Service Kit Sealant solution containslatex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,consult a physician immediately. Keep TireService Kit out of reach of children. Ifswallowed, rinse mouth immediately withplenty of water and drink plenty of water.Do not induce vomiting! Consult aphysician immediately.

U.S.A. And CANADA Markets:Proceed as follows:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turnon the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on thewheel with the deflated tire) is in aposition that is near to the ground. Thiswill allow the Tire Service Kit hoses toreach the valve stem and keep the TireService Kit flat on the ground. This willprovide the best positioning of the kitwhen injecting the sealant into thedeflated tire and running the air pump.Move the vehicle as necessary to placethe valve stem in this position beforeproceeding.

208

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

3. Place the gear selector in REVERSEfor a manual transmission, and PARKfor automatic transmission.

4. Apply the parking brake with thebrake pedal pressed and turn theengine OFF.

5. Unload passengers and cargo, thenremove the Tire Service Kit.

6. Gently shake the sealant bottle tomix the contents. Then extend theinjection hose.

Note:Do not shake the bottle

excessively. Otherwise, the sealantcould spray out of the injection hose. Ifthe sealant contacts clothing or otherobjects, you may not be able toremove it.

The sealant hardens easily, andinjecting it will be difficult under coldweather conditions (32 °F (0 °C) orbelow). Warm the sealant inside thevehicle to facilitate injection.

7. Pull out the air compressor hoseand the air compressor plug from theair compressor.

8. Install the air compressor hose,which was pulled out of the aircompressor, into the injection valve ofthe bottle.

08020202-121-003

Tire Service Kit Location

08020202-03A-666

Sealant Bottle With Injection Hose

1 — Injection Hose

08020202-36A-004

Air Compressor With Hose AndPlug

2 — Air Compressor Hose

209

Note: Make sure that the aircompressor switch is off beforeinserting the air compressor hose intothe injection valve of the bottle. If the aircompressor hose is not installed to theinjection valve of the bottle securely, thesealant may leak.

9. Remove the valve cap from the valveof the flat tire, install the injection hoseto the tire valve, and turn the sleeve tothe right to tighten.

10. Install the bottle to the aircompressor and push it in until the leftand right tabs are engaged securely.

11. Insert the air compressor plug intothe accessory socket inside the vehicleand place the ignition to ACC.

Note: When inserting the aircompressor plug into or removing itfrom the accessory socket, make surethat the air compressor switch is off.When turning the air compressor on/off,use the air compressor switch. Beforechecking the tire inflation pressure usingthe tire pressure gauge, turn the aircompressor switch off.

12. The sealant is injected into the tirewhen the air compressor is switchedon. After the sealant is injectedcompletely, wait until the tire inflationpressure increases to the specified tireinflation pressure. For the correctpressure, check the tire inflationpressure label on the driver's doorframe.

Note: The inflation pressure mayincrease to about 43.5 psi (3 Bar)temporarily to inject the sealant throughthe valve. Normally, the inflationpressure decreases gradually and itreaches the actual inflation pressureafter about 30 seconds.

08020202-031-670

Install Air Compressor To SealantBottle

3 — Air Compressor Hose4 — Injection Valve

08020202-03A-004

Valve And Valve Cover

5 — Valve Cap6 — Valve

08020202-031-669

Sealant Bottle Into Air Compressor

7 — Air Compressor Tabs

210

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Warning!

Never use the air compressor above 3 Bar(43.5 psi). Using the air compressor at aninflation pressure above 3 Bar (43.5 psi)continuously is dangerous. If the aircompressor overheats, hot air will beexhausted and you could get burned.

Caution!

If the tire inflation pressure does notincrease, repair of the tire is not possible. Ifthe tire does not reach the specified tireinflation pressure within 10 minutes, it mayhave received extensive damage. In thiscase, the repair using the tire service kitwas not successful.

Do not operate the air compressor for acontinuous 10 minutes or longer becauseusing it for long periods could cause amalfunction.

13. Adhere the speed restriction stickerto an area where it can be viewed easilyby the driver.

Warning!

Do not adhere the speed restriction stickerto the padded area on the steering wheel.Adhering the speed restriction sticker tothe padded area on the steering wheel isdangerous because the air bag may notoperate (deploy) normally resulting inserious injury. In addition, do not adherethe sticker to areas where warning lights orthe speedometer cannot be viewed.

14. Adhere the repaired tire sticker tothe wheel of the flat tire.

15. When the tire inflates to thespecified tire inflation pressure, turn theair compressor switch off, turn thesleeve of the injection hose to the left,and pull it out of the tire valve.

16. Remove the air compressor hosefrom the injection valve of the bottle.Then, install the injection hose to theinjection valve of the bottle to preventleakage of any remaining sealant.

Note: The remaining sealant in thehose may spray out when the hose isremoved. Remove the hose carefullybecause you may not be able toremove the sealant contacting clothingor other objects.

17. Install the tire valve cap.

18. Place the Tire Service Kit back intoits storage location.

19. Start driving immediately to spreadthe sealant in the tire.Note: Carefully drive the vehicle at aspeed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. Ifthe vehicle is driven at a speed of50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehiclemay vibrate.

08020202-031-667

Repaired Tire Sticker

08020202-031-668

Install Injection Hose To SealantBottle

211

Note: With TPMS System: if the tireis not properly inflated, the warninglight will illuminate.

After driving the vehicle for about10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connectthe air compressor to the tire usingStep nine of the procedure, and checkthe tire inflation pressure using the tirepressure gauge on the air compressor.If the tire inflation pressure is lower thanthe specified tire inflation pressure, turnthe air compressor on and wait until itreaches the specified tire inflationpressure.

The Tire Service Kit is completedsuccessfully if the tire inflation pressuredoes not decrease. Carefully drive thevehicle to the nearest authorized dealerimmediately and have the flat tirereplaced. Replacement with a new tireis recommended. If the tire is to berepaired or reused, consult anauthorized dealer.

Note:

If an emergency flat tire repair hasbeen performed using the Tire ServiceKit, FCA recommends that the tire bereplaced with a new one as soon aspossible. If the tire is to be repaired orreused, contact an authorized dealer.

The wheel can be reused if thesealant adhering to it is removed.However, replace the valve with a newone.

Sealing A Tire With TireService Kit

Warning!

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the sideof the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull farenough off the road to avoid the danger ofbeing hit when using the Tire Service Kit.

Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive thevehicle under the following circumstances:

If the puncture in the tire tread isapproximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

If the tire has any sidewall damage.

If the tire has any damage from drivingwith extremely low tire pressure.

If the tire has any damage from drivingon a flat tire.

If the wheel has any damage.

If you are unsure of the condition of thetire or the wheel.

Keep Tire Service Kit away from openflames or heat sources.

A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forwardin a collision or hard stop could endangerthe occupants of the vehicle. Always stowthe Tire Service Kit in the place provided.Failure to follow these warnings can resultin injuries that are serious or fatal to you,your passengers, and others around you.

Take care not to allow the contents ofTire Service Kit to come in contact withhair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kitsealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, orabsorbed through the skin. It causes skin,eye, and respiratory irritation. Flushimmediately with plenty of water if there isany contact with eyes or skin. Changeclothing as soon as possible, if there is anycontact with clothing.

Tire Service Kit Sealant solution containslatex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,consult a physician immediately. Keep TireService Kit out of reach of children. Ifswallowed, rinse mouth immediately withplenty of water and drink plenty of water.Do not induce vomiting! Consult aphysician immediately.

Mexico MarketProceed as follows:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turnon the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on thewheel with the deflated tire) is in aposition that is near to the ground. Thiswill allow the Tire Service Kit hoses toreach the valve stem and keep the TireService Kit flat on the ground. This willprovide the best positioning of the kitwhen injecting the sealant into thedeflated tire and running the air pump.Move the vehicle as necessary to placethe valve stem in this position beforeproceeding.

212

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

3. Place the gear selector in REVERSEfor a manual transmission, or PARK forautomatic transmission.

4. Apply the parking brake with thebrake pedal pressed and turn theengine OFF.

5. Unload passengers and cargo, thenremove the Tire Service Kit.

6. Gently shake the tire sealant. If thebottle is shaken after the injection hoseis screwed on, tire sealant could sprayout from the injection hose. Tire sealantcontacting clothing or other objectsmay be impossible to remove. Shakethe bottle before screwing on theinjection hose.

Note:Do not shake the bottle

excessively. Otherwise, the sealantcould spray out of the injection hose,and if the sealant contacts clothing orother objects, you may not be able toremove it.

The sealant hardens easily andinjecting it will be difficult under coldweather conditions 32 °F (0 °C) orbelow. Warm the sealant inside thevehicle to facilitate injection.

7. Remove the cap from the bottle andscrew on the injection hose with thebottle's inner cap left on to break theinner cap.

8. Remove the valve cap from the flattire. Push the back of a valve core toolto the core of the tire valve and bleedout all of the remaining air.

Note: If there is air remaining in thetire when the valve core is removed, thevalve core could fly out. Remove thevalve core carefully.

9. Turn the valve core counterclockwise with the valve core tool andremove the valve core.0802020203A003

Attaching Injection Hose To SealantBottle

08020202-03A-004

Valve And Valve Cover

5 — Valve Cap6 — Tire Valve

08020202-03A-005

Turn Valve Core Counterclockwise

213

Note: Store the valve core in a placewhere it will not get dirty.

10. Insert the injection hose into thevalve.

11. Hold the bottom of the bottleupright, squeeze the bottle with yourhands, and inject the entire amount oftire sealant into the tire.

12. Pull out the injection hose from thevalve.

13. Reinsert the valve core into thevalve and turn it clockwise to install.

Note:The tire sealant cannot be reused.

If the tire sealant kit has been used, oris expired, purchase new one at anauthorized dealer.

Do not throw away the empty tiresealant bottle after use. Return theempty tire sealant bottle to anauthorized dealer when replacing thetire. The empty tire sealant bottle willneed to be used to extract anddispose of the used sealant from thetire.

14. Install the injection hose to the tabof the bottle to prevent leakage of anyremaining sealant.

15. Adhere the speed restriction stickerto an area where it can be viewed easilyby the driver.

Warning!

Do not adhere the speed restriction stickerto the padded area on the steering wheel.Adhering the speed restriction sticker tothe padded area on the steering wheel isdangerous because the air bag may notoperate (deploy) normally resulting inserious injury. In addition, do not adherethe sticker to areas where warning lights orthe speedometer cannot be viewed.

16. Pull out the air compressor hoseand the air compressor plug from theair compressor.

17. Install the air compressor hose tothe tire valve.

08020202-03A-005

Injection Hose Into Valve

08020202-03A-008

Squeeze Sealant Into Tire

08020202-03A-007

Turn Valve Core Clockwise ToReinstall

08020202-36A-004

Air Compressor With Hose AndPlug

2 — Air Compressor Hose

214

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

18. Insert the air compressor plug intothe accessory socket inside the vehicleand place the ignition to ACC.

19. Turn the air compressor switch onand inflate the tire carefully to thecorrect inflation pressure. For thecorrect pressure, check the tire inflationpressure label on the driver's doorframe.

Note: When inserting the aircompressor plug into or removing itfrom the accessory socket, make surethat the air compressor switch is off.When turning the air compressor on/off,use the air compressor switch. Beforechecking the tire inflation pressure usingthe tire pressure gauge, turn the aircompressor switch off.

Caution!

If the tire inflation pressure does notincrease, repair of the tire is not possible. Ifthe tire does not reach the specified tireinflation pressure within 10 minutes, it mayhave received extensive damage. In thiscase, the repair using the tire service kitwas not successful.

Do not operate the air compressor for acontinuous 10 minutes or longer becauseusing it for long periods could cause amalfunction.

Note: If the tire has been overinflated, loosen the screw cap on the aircompressor and bleed some of the airout.

20. When the tire inflates to thespecified tire inflation pressure, turn theair compressor switch off, turn thesleeve of the air compressor hose tothe left, and pull it out of the tire valve.

21. Install the tire valve cap.

22. Place the Tire Service Kit back intoits storage location.

23. Start driving immediately to spreadthe sealant in the tire.

Note:

Carefully drive the vehicle at aspeed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. Ifthe vehicle is driven at a speed of50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehiclemay vibrate.

With TPMS System: if the tire isnot properly inflated, the warninglight will illuminate.

After driving the vehicle for about10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connectthe air compressor to the tire usingstep nine of the procedure, and checkthe tire inflation pressure using the tirepressure gauge on the air compressor.If the tire inflation pressure is lowerthan the specified tire inflationpressure, turn the air compressor onand wait until it reaches the specifiedtire inflation pressure;

The emergency flat tire repair iscompleted successfully if the tireinflation pressure does not decrease.Carefully drive the vehicle to thenearest authorized dealer and have theflat tire replaced. Replacement with anew tire is recommended. If the tire isto be repaired or reused, contact aauthorized dealer.

If an emergency flat tire repair hasbeen performed using the Tire ServiceKit, FCA recommends that the tire bereplaced with a new one as soon aspossible. If the tire is to be repaired orreused, contact an authorized dealer.

08020202-03A-00B

Air Compressor Hose Into Valve

215

The tire can be reused if the sealantadhering to it is removed. However,replace the valve with a new one.

Replacing The BottleNote: The tire sealant has a period ofeffective use. Check the period ofeffective use indicated on the bottlelabel and do not use it if it has expired.Have the tire sealant replaced at anauthorized dealer before the period ofeffective use has expired.

Inspect the Tire Service Kit at regularintervals as well as the operation of thetire compressor.

JUMP STARTINGPreparations For JumpStarting

If the battery is discharged, a jumpstarting procedure can be performedusing the battery and the cables ofanother vehicle, or using a boosterbattery.Jump starting is dangerous if doneincorrectly, so follow the procedure inthis section carefully. If you feel unsureabout jump starting, it is stronglyrecommended that you have acompetent service technician do thework.Note: When a booster battery is beingused, comply with the utilization andprecaution instructions specified by themanufacturer.

Warning!

Do not attempt jump starting if the batteryis frozen. It could rupture or explode andcause personal injury.

08030100121001

Jump Start Locations

216

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Caution!

Do not use a portable battery booster packor any other booster source with a systemvoltage greater than 12 Volts or damage tothe battery, starter motor, alternator orelectrical system may occur.

Jump-StartingProcedure

Warning!

Failure to follow this jump startingprocedure could result in personal injury orproperty damage due to battery explosion.

Caution!

Failure to follow these procedures couldresult in damage to the charging system ofthe booster vehicle or the dischargedvehicle.

To jump start the vehicle, follow thisprocedure:

1. Remove the positive terminal cover.

2. Make sure the booster battery is12 Volts and that the negative terminalis grounded.

3. Turn off the engine of the vehiclewith the booster battery and allunnecessary electrical loads in bothvehicles.

Warning!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each otheras this could establish a groundconnection and personal injury couldresult.

4. Connect the positive end of thejumper cable to the positive terminal onthe discharged battery.

5. Connect the opposite end of thepositive jumper cable to the positiveterminal on the booster battery.

6. Connect the negative end of thenegative jumper cable to the negativeterminal of the booster battery.

7. Connect the opposite end of thenegative jumper cable to a good engineground of the vehicle with thedischarged battery (exposed metal partof the engine) away from the batteryand the fuel injection system.

8. Start the engine of the boostervehicle and run it a few minutes. Thenstart the engine of the other vehicle.

9. Once the engine is started, removethe jumper cables in the reversesequence.

10. Replace the positive terminal cover.Make sure cover is secure.

Bump Starting

Never jump start the engine by pushing,towing or coasting downhill.

Note:

You cannot start a vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushing it.

Do not push-start a vehicle that hasa manual transmission. It can damagethe emission control system.

08030100-122-001

Positive Terminal Cover

217

Starting A FloodedEngine

If the engine fails to start, it may beflooded (excessive fuel in the engine).Follow this procedure:

1. If the engine does not start within5 seconds on the first try, wait10 seconds and try again.

2. Make sure the parking brake is on.

3. Press the accelerator all the way andhold it there.

4. Press the clutch pedal (manualtransmission) or the brake pedal(automatic transmission), then push thepush button start. If the engine starts,release the accelerator immediatelybecause the engine will suddenly revup.

5. If the engine fails to start, crank itwithout pressing the accelerator.If the engine still does not start usingthe above procedure, have your vehicleinspected an authorized dealer.

IF YOUR ENGINEOVERHEATSIf Your Engine Overheats

In any of the following situations, youcan reduce the potential for overheatingby taking the appropriate action.

On highways — slow down.

In city traffic — while stopped, placethe transmission in NEUTRAL, but donot increase engine idle speed.

Note: There are steps that you cantake to slow down an impendingoverheat condition:

If your air conditioner (A/C) is on,turn it off. The A/C system adds heatto the engine cooling system andturning the A/C off can help removethis heat.

You can also turn the temperaturecontrol to maximum heat, the modecontrol to floor and the blower controlto high. This allows the heater core toact as a supplement to the radiatorand aids in removing heat from theengine cooling system.

Warning!

You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steam fromyour radiator. If you see or hear steamcoming from under the hood, do not openthe hood until the radiator has had time tocool. Never try to open a cooling systempressure cap when the radiator or coolantbottle is hot.

Caution!

Driving with a hot cooling system coulddamage your vehicle. If temperature gaugereads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle.Idle the vehicle with the air conditionerturned off until the pointer drops back intothe normal range. If the pointer remains onthe “H”, turn the engine off immediately,and call for service.

If Steam Is Coming From TheEngine Compartment:Do not go near the front of the vehicle.Stop the engine. Wait until the steamdissipates, then open the hood andstart the engine.

218

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

If Neither Coolant Nor Steam IsEscaping:Open the hood and idle the engine untilit cools.

Note:

If the cooling fan does not operatewhile the engine is running, the enginetemperature will increase. Stop theengine and contact an authorizeddealer.

If the engine continues to overheator frequently overheats, have thecooling system inspected. The enginecould be seriously damaged unlessrepairs are made. Contact anauthorized dealer.

TOWING THEVEHICLEAttaching The Tow Eyes— If Equipped

Warning!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling withtow eyes.

Do not use a chain with a tow eye.Chains may break, causing serious injury ordeath.

Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye.Tow straps may break or becomedisengaged, causing serious injury ordeath.

Failure to follow proper tow eye usagemay cause components to break resultingin serious injury or death.

Caution!

The tow eye must be used exclusivelyfor roadside assistance operations. Onlyuse the tow eye with an appropriate devicein accordance with the highway code (arigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle fora short distance to the nearest servicelocation.

Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to towvehicles off the road or where there areobstacles.

In compliance with the aboveconditions, towing with a tow eye musttake place with two vehicles (one towing,the other towed) aligned as much aspossible along the same center line.Damage to your vehicle may occur if theseguidelines are not followed.

When towing, only use a facility that cantow vehicles with low ground clearances asextensive damage can result by using astandard tow truck platform.

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the towing eyelet and thelug wrench from the luggagecompartment.

2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver orsimilar tool with a soft cloth to preventdamage to a painted bumper, and openthe cap located on the front or rearbumper.

219

Note: Do not use excessive force as itmay damage the cap or scratch thepainted bumper surface. Remove thecap completely and store it so as not tolose it.

3. Securely install the tow eye in frontor rear using the lug wrench orequivalent.

4. Hook the towing rope to the toweye.

Caution!

Tow eyes are for emergency use only, torescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do notuse tow eyes for tow truck hookup orhighway towing. You could damage yourvehicle.

When using the tow eyes, always pullthe lead or chain in a straight directionwith respect to the eyelet. Never applya sideways force.

Note: Follow the precautions below toavoid damage to the towing eyelet andtowing hook, vehicle body, ortransmission system when towing:

Do not tow a vehicle heavier thanyours.

Do not suddenly accelerate yourvehicle as it will apply a severe shockto the tow eye and towing hook orrope.

Do not attach any rope other thanto the tow eye and towing hook.

08060203121001

Front Bumper Cap Location

1— Front Bumper Cap

08060203-122-001

Rear Bumper Cap Location

2— Rear Bumper Cap

08060201-121-001

Installing Front Towing Eye

08060201-122-001

Installing Rear Tow Eye

220

INC

AS

EO

FE

ME

RG

EN

CY

Emergency Towing

Towing DescriptionProper lifting and towing are necessaryto prevent damage to the vehicle.Government and local laws must befollowed.A towed vehicle usually should have itsdrive wheels (rear wheels) OFF of theground. If excessive damage or otherconditions prevent this, use wheeldollies.When towing with the rear wheels onthe ground, release the parking brake.

Caution!

DO NOT use sling-type equipment whentowing. When securing the vehicle to aflatbed truck, do not attach to front or rearsuspension components. Damage to yourvehicle may result from improper towing.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, the vehicle may be towedwith all four wheels on the ground usingthe towing hook at the front of thevehicle. Only tow the vehicle on pavedsurfaces for short distances at lowspeeds.

Follow these instructions when towingthe vehicle with all wheels on theground:

1. Shift to NEUTRAL for manualtransmission or automatic transmission.

2. Place the ignition to ACC.

3. Release the parking brake.Note: Remember that power assist forthe brakes and steering will not beavailable when the engine is notrunning.

EVENT DATARECORDER (EDR)This vehicle is equipped with an EventData Recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record datathat will assist in understanding how avehicle’s systems performed undercertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle.Please refer to “Occupant RestraintSystems” in “Safety” for furtherinformation on the Event Data Recorder(EDR).

221

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . .223ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . .230BATTERY RECHARGING . . . . . . .234MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES. . .234RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . .237WHEELS AND TIRES. . . . . . . . . .237DEPARTMENT OFTRANSPORTATION UNIFORMTIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . .252STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .253BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

222

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

INTRODUCTIONBe extremely careful and prevent injuryto yourself and others or damage toyour vehicle when using this Owner’sManual for inspection and maintenance.If you are unsure about any procedure itdescribes, we strongly urge you to havea reliable and qualified service shopperform the work, preferably at yourauthorized dealer.Factory-trained FCA technicians andgenuine FCA parts are best for yourvehicle. Without this expertise and theparts that have been designed andmade especially for your vehicle,inadequate, incomplete, and insufficientservicing may result in problems. Thiscould lead to vehicle damage or anaccident and injuries.For expert advice and quality service,contact your authorized dealer.Note: Under no circumstances shouldoil change intervals exceed 10,000miles (16,000 kilometers) or 1 year.To continue New Vehicle LimitedWarranty eligibility and to protect yourinvestment, it is your responsibility toproperly maintain your vehicleaccording to factory recommendedschedules outlined in this Owner’sManual. As part of this you must keepyour maintenance records, receipts,repair orders and any other documentsas evidence this maintenance wasperformed. You must present thesedocuments, should any New Vehicle

Limited Warranty coveragedisagreement occur. Failure to do socan result in your New Vehicle LimitedWarranty being voided either in wholeor in part.This evidence may consist of thefollowing:

The FCA Scheduled MaintenanceRecord, refer to the Warranty Booklet,must be completely filled out showingmileage, repair order number, date foreach service, and signed by a qualifiedautomotive service technician whoservice vehicles.

Original copies of repair orders orother receipts that include the mileageand date the vehicle was serviced.Each receipt should be signed by aqualified automotive service technician.

For self maintenance, a statementthat you completed the maintenanceyourself, displaying mileage and thedate the work was performed. Also,receipts for the replacement parts (fluid,filters, etc.) indicating the date andmileage must accompany thisstatement.Note: If you elect to performmaintenance yourself or have yourvehicle serviced at a location other thanan authorized dealer, FCA requires thatall fluids, parts and materials must meetFCA standards for durability andperformance as described in thisOwner’s Manual.

Claims against the warranty resultingfrom lack of maintenance, as opposedto defective materials or authorized FCAworkmanship, will not be honored.Any auto repair shop using partsequivalent to your vehicle's originalequipment may perform maintenance.But we recommend that it always bedone by an authorized dealer usinggenuine FCA parts. Selecting“Maintenance Monitor” enables thesystem to notify you of your vehicle'sapproaching inspection/servicingperiod.

Owner MaintenancePrecautions

The owner or a qualified servicetechnician should make these vehicleinspections at the indicated intervals toensure safe and dependable operation.Bring any problem to the attention of anauthorized dealer or qualified servicetechnician as soon as possible.

When refueling perform inspectionof:

Brake and clutch fluid level

Engine coolant level

Engine oil level

Washer fluid level

223

At least monthly perform inspectionof:Tire inflation pressures

At least twice a year (for example,every spring and fall) performinspection of:

Engine coolant

Engine oilAs explained in the “Introduction”paragraph, several procedures can bedone only by a qualified servicetechnician with special tools.For details, read the separate WarrantyBooklet provided with the vehicle. If youare unsure about any servicing ormaintenance procedure, have it doneby an authorized dealer.There are strict environmental lawsregarding the disposal of waste oil andfluids. Please dispose of your wasteproperly and with due regard to theenvironment.We recommend that you entrust the oiland fluid changes of your vehicle to anauthorized dealer.

Periodic ChecksEvery 620 miles (1,000 km) or beforelong trips check and, if necessary, topoff:

Engine coolant level.

Brake fluid level.

Windshield washer fluid level.

Tire inflation pressure and condition.

Operation of lighting system(headlights, direction indicators, hazardwarning lights, etc.).

Operation of windshieldwasher/wiper system andpositioning/wear of windshield wiperblades.Every 1860 miles (3,000 km) checkand top off the engine oil level ifrequired.

Heavy-Duty Use Of TheVehicleIf the vehicle is used under one of thefollowing conditions:

Dusty roads.

Short, repeated trips less than 4.4 -5 miles (7 - 8 km) at sub-zero outsidetemperatures.

Engine idling for long periods of timeor driving long distances at low speedsor long periods of inactivity.The following checks must be carriedout more often than indicated in theScheduled Servicing Plan:

Check front disc brake pad conditionand wear.

Check cleanliness of underhood areaand all door and trunk locks, cleanlinessand lubrication of linkage.

Visually inspect conditions of the:engine, transmission, lines and hoses

(exhaust/fuel system/brakes) andrubber elements (hoses/belts/etc.).

Check battery charge and batteryfluid level.

Visually inspect conditions of theaccessory drive belts.

Check and, if necessary, changeengine oil and replace oil filter.

Check and, if necessary, replacecabin air filter.

Check and, if necessary, replace aircleaner.Severe Duty All ModelsChange Engine Oil at 4,000 miles(6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in adusty and off road environment or isoperated predominately at idle or onlyvery low engine RPM’s. This type ofvehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

224

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Scheduled Servicing Plan

Mileage or time passed(whichever comes first)

10,0

00

20,0

00

30,0

00

40,0

00

50,0

00

60,0

00

70,0

00

80,0

00

90,0

00

100,

000

110,

000

120,

000

130,

000

140,

000

150,

000

Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

16,0

00

32,0

00

48,0

00

64,0

00

80,0

00

96,0

00

112,

000

128,

000

144,

000

160,

000

176,

000

192,

000

208,

000

224,

000

240,

000

Check tire condition/wearand adjust pressure, ifnecessary, check TIREKITexpiration date (ifprovided).

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Check operation of lightingsystem (headlamps,direction indicators, hazardwarning lights, luggagecompartment, passengercompartment, glovecompartment, instrumentpanel warning lights, etc.).

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Check and, if necessary,top up fluid levels(brakes/hydraulic clutch,windshield washer, battery,engine coolant, etc.).

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

225

Mileage or time passed(whichever comes first)

10,0

00

20,0

00

30,0

00

40,0

00

50,0

00

60,0

00

70,0

00

80,0

00

90,0

00

100,

000

110,

000

120,

000

130,

000

140,

000

150,

000

Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

16,0

00

32,0

00

48,0

00

64,0

00

80,0

00

96,0

00

112,

000

128,

000

144,

000

160,

000

176,

000

192,

000

208,

000

224,

000

240,

000

Check engine controlsystem operation (viadiagnostic tool).

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Visually inspect conditionof: exterior bodywork,underbody protection,pipes and hoses (exhaust -fuel system - brakes),rubber elements (boots,sleeves, bushings, etc.).

• • • • • • •

Visually inspect conditionsof steering elements andcheck their operation.

• • • • • • •

Check the front and rearsuspension, tie rods, CVJoints, and replace ifnecessary.

• • • • • • •

Check endfloat of wheelbearings.

• • • • • • •

226

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Mileage or time passed(whichever comes first)

10,0

00

20,0

00

30,0

00

40,0

00

50,0

00

60,0

00

70,0

00

80,0

00

90,0

00

100,

000

110,

000

120,

000

130,

000

140,

000

150,

000

Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

16,0

00

32,0

00

48,0

00

64,0

00

80,0

00

96,0

00

112,

000

128,

000

144,

000

160,

000

176,

000

192,

000

208,

000

224,

000

240,

000

Check windshield/rearwindow wiper bladeposition/wear.

• • • • • • • •

Check operation ofwindshield washer systemand adjust jets ifnecessary.

• • • • • • • •

Check cleanliness of hoodand trunk locks andcleanliness and lubricationof linkages.

• • • • • • • •

Check parking brake levertravel and adjust, ifnecessary.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Visually check thecondition and wear of thefront and rear brakes.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Visually inspect conditionof evaporation controlsystem.

• • • • •

227

Mileage or time passed(whichever comes first)

10,0

00

20,0

00

30,0

00

40,0

00

50,0

00

60,0

00

70,0

00

80,0

00

90,0

00

100,

000

110,

000

120,

000

130,

000

140,

000

150,

000

Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

16,0

00

32,0

00

48,0

00

64,0

00

80,0

00

96,0

00

112,

000

128,

000

144,

000

160,

000

176,

000

192,

000

208,

000

224,

000

240,

000

Visual inspect thecondition and tensioning ofthe accessory drive belt.

• • •

Replace the accessorydrive belt. ****

•

Inspect and replace PCVvalve if necessary.

•

Change engine oil andreplace oil filter.*

In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage, whichever occurs first.

Replace spark plugs (1.4LTurbo engine).**

• • • • •

****Replace belt every 40,000 miles (60,000 km) for use on dusty roads.*The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed oneyear.

**The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage tothe engine:

Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Engine” in “TechnicalSpecifications” for further information).

Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the scheduled servicing plan for spark plug replacement.

Contact your authorized dealer if you have any questions.

228

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Mileage or time passed(whichever comes first)

10,0

00

20,0

00

30,0

00

40,0

00

50,0

00

60,0

00

70,0

00

80,0

00

90,0

00

100,

000

110,

000

120,

000

130,

000

140,

000

150,

000

Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

16,0

00

32,0

00

48,0

00

64,0

00

80,0

00

96,0

00

112,

000

128,

000

144,

000

160,

000

176,

000

192,

000

208,

000

224,

000

240,

000

Replace engine air filter.# • • • • •

Replace Cabin Air Filter – IfEquipped. ***

• • • • • • •

Flush and replace theengine coolant at 10 yearsor 150,000 miles(240,000 km) whichevercomes first.

• •

Replace the timing belt(1.4L Turbo Engine).

•

#The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.***Replace every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or two years. Replacement every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or one year in dusty conditions or as optional/suggested

replacement.

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the rightequipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.This could cause an accident.

229

ENGINE COMPARTMENTChecking Levels

07030300-121-003

1 — Window Washer Reservoir 4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir3 — Engine Oil Cap 6 — Battery

230

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Engine Oil

Warning!

Be very careful when working in theengine compartment when the engine ishot: you may get burned.

Do not get too close to the radiatorcooling fan: the electric fan may start;danger of injury.

Loose clothing might be pulled bymoving parts.

Recommended OilRefer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in“Technical Specifications” for furtherinformation.

Inspecting engine oil levelProceed as follows:

1. Be sure the vehicle is on a levelsurface.

2. Warm up the engine to normaloperating temperature.

3. Turn it off and wait at least fiveminutes for the oil to return to thesump.

4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean,and reinsert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again andexamine the level. The level is normal ifit is between Low and Full. If it is nearor below Low, open the engine oilcap/filler 2 and add enough oil to bringthe level to Full.

Note: Do not overfill the engine oil.This may cause engine damage.

6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstickis positioned properly before reinsertingthe dipstick.

7. Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Engine oil consumptionDuring the initial period of use theengine oil consumption conditionsshould stabilize after the first 3000 –3500 miles (5000 – 6000 km).

Engine Coolant

Warning!

Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fanmotor lead before working near the radiatorcooling fan.

You or others can be badly burned byhot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steamfrom your radiator. If you see or hear steamcoming from under the hood, do not openthe hood until the radiator has had time tocool. Never open a cooling systempressure cap when the radiator or coolantbottle is hot.

Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelryaway from the radiator cooling fan whenthe hood is raised. The fan startsautomatically and may start at any time,whether the engine is running or not.

When working near the radiator coolingfan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turnthe ignition to the OFF mode. The fan istemperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition is in the ON mode.

You or others can be badly burned byhot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steamfrom your radiator. If you see or hear steamcoming from under the hood, do not openthe hood until the radiator has had time tocool. Never try to open a cooling systempressure cap when the radiator is hot.

07030403-121-001

Engine Compartment

1 — Engine Oil Dipstick2 — Engine Oil Cap

231

Inspecting Coolant LevelNote: Changing the coolant should bedone by your authorized dealer.Inspect the antifreeze protection andcoolant level in the coolant reservoir atleast once a year, at the beginning ofthe winter season, and before travelingwhere temperatures may drop belowfreezing.Inspect the condition and connectionsof all cooling system and heater hoses.Replace any that are worn ordeteriorated.

Warning!

Do not open hot engine cooling system.Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) whenthe engine is overheated. Do not loosen orremove the cap to cool an overheatedengine. Heat causes pressure to build up inthe cooling system. To prevent scalding orinjury, do not remove the pressure capwhile the system is hot or under pressure.

Do not use a pressure cap other thanthe one specified for your vehicle. Personalinjury or engine damage may result.

The coolant should be at full in theradiator and between the F (Full) and L(Low) marks on the coolant reservoirwhen the engine is cool.

If it is at or near L (Low), add coolant bymixing a minimum solution of 50%Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentratefor FIAT Spider. Use higherconcentrations (not to exceed 70%) iftemperatures below −34°F (−37°C) areanticipated. Bring the level to F (Full).Please contact your authorized dealerfor assistance.Securely tighten the coolant reservoirtank cap after adding coolant.If the coolant reservoir is empty or newcoolant is required frequently, contactyour authorized dealer.

Brake/Clutch Fluid

Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level

The brakes and clutch draw fluidfrom the same reservoir.

Inspect the fluid level in the reservoirregularly.

It should be kept between the MAXand MIN lines.

The level normally drops withaccumulated use, a conditionassociated with wear of brake andclutch linings. If it is excessively low,have the brake/clutch systeminspected. Contact your authorizeddealer.

Warning!

Use only manufacturer's recommendedbrake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”in “Technical Specifications” for furtherinformation. Using the wrong type of brakefluid can severely damage your brakesystem and/or impair its performance. Theproper type of brake fluid for your vehicle isalso identified on the original factoryinstalled hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

07030501-121-001

Coolant Reservoir

07030601-121-002

Brake Fluid Reservoir

232

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

To avoid contamination from foreignmatter or moisture, use only new brakefluid or fluid that has been in a tightlyclosed container. Keep the master cylinderreservoir cap secured at all times. Brakefluid in a open container absorbs moisturefrom the air resulting in a lower boilingpoint. This may cause it to boilunexpectedly during hard or prolongedbraking, resulting in sudden brake failure.This could result in a collision.

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir canresult in spilling brake fluid on hot engineparts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.Brake fluid can also damage painted andvinyl surfaces, care should be taken toavoid its contact with these surfaces.

Do not allow petroleum based fluid tocontaminate the brake fluid. Brake sealcomponents could be damaged, causingpartial or complete brake failure. This couldresult in a collision.

Windshield AndHeadlight Washer Fluid

Inspecting Washer Fluid LevelInspect fluid level in the washer fluidreservoir, open the cap and add fluid ifnecessary.

Use plain water if washer fluid isunavailable. But use only washer fluid incold weather to prevent it from freezing.

Automatic TransmissionControl Unit

The transmission oil level should only bechecked at your authorized dealer.

Battery MaintenanceTo get the best service from a battery:

Keep it securely mounted.

Keep the top clean and dry.

Keep terminals and connectionsclean, tight, and coated with petroleumjelly or terminal grease.

Rinse off spilled electrolyteimmediately with a solution of waterand baking soda.

If the vehicle will not be used for anextended time, disconnect the batteryleads and charge the battery every sixweeks.

Battery ReplacementContact your authorized dealer topurchase a replacement battery.

Warning!

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solutionand can burn or even blind you. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your eyes,skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a batterywhen attaching clamps. If acid splashes ineyes or on skin, flush the area immediatelywith large amounts of water. Refer to“Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case OfEmergency” for further information.

Battery gas is flammable and explosive.Keep flame or sparks away from thebattery. Do not use a booster battery orany other booster source with an outputgreater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cableclamps to touch each other.

Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands after handling.

07030901-121-001

Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir

233

BATTERYRECHARGINGBATTERY CHARGINGPROCEDURE

Warning!

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solutionand can burn or even blind you. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your eyes,skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a batterywhen attaching clamps. If acid splashes ineyes or on skin, flush the area immediatelywith large amounts of water. Refer to“Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case OfEmergency” for further information.

Battery gas is flammable and explosive.Keep flame or sparks away from thebattery. Do not use a booster battery orany other booster source with an outputgreater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cableclamps to touch each other.

Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands after handling.

Caution!

It is essential when replacing the cableson the battery that the positive cable isattached to the positive post and thenegative cable is attached to the negativepost. Battery posts are marked positive (+)and negative (-) and are identified on thebattery case. Cable clamps should be tighton the terminal posts and free of corrosion.

If a “fast charger” is used while thebattery is in the vehicle, disconnect bothvehicle battery cables before connectingthe charger to the battery. Do not use a“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Charge battery as follows:

Before recharging the battery, turn offall accessories and turn the engine offby placing the ignition in the OFF mode.

Disconnect the negative batterycable.

Connect the charger cables to thebattery terminals, observing the polarity(+,–).

Turn on the charger.

When finished, turn the charger offbefore disconnecting the battery.

Reconnect the negative batteryterminal.

MAINTENANCEPROCEDURESThe following pages containinstructions on the requiredmaintenance from the technicalpersonnel who designed the vehicle.In addition to these specificmaintenance instructions specified forroutine scheduled servicing, there areother components which may requireperiodic maintenance or replacementover the vehicle’s life cycle.

Body LubricationEnsure that the locks and bodyworkjunction points, including componentssuch as the seat guides, door hinges(and rollers), trunk and hood areperiodically lubricated with lithiumbased grease to ensure correct, silentoperation and to protect them from rustand wear.Thoroughly clean the components,eliminating every trace of dirt and dust.After lubricating, eliminate excess oiland grease. Also pay particularattention to the hood closing devices,to ensure correct operation.During operations on the hood, be sureto perform with the engine cold, alsoremember to check, clean and lubricatethe locking, release and safety devices.Make sure the hood's secondary latchkeeps the hood from opening when theprimary latch is released.

234

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Lubricate the external lock cylinderstwice a year. Apply a small amount ofhigh-quality lubricant directly into thelock cylinder. If necessary, contact yourauthorized dealer.

Wiper BladesContamination of either the windshieldor the blades with foreign matter canreduce wiper effectiveness. Commonsources are insects, tree sap, and hotwax treatments used by somecommercial car washes.If the blades are not wiping properly,clean the window and blades with agood cleaner or mild detergent; thenrinse thoroughly with clean water.Repeat if necessary.When the wiper lever is in the AUTOposition and the ignition is placed in theON mode, the wipers may moveautomatically in the following cases:

If the windshield above the rainsensor is touched.

If the windshield above the rainsensor is wiped with a cloth.

If the windshield is struck with a handor other object.

If the rain sensor is struck with ahand or other object from inside thevehicle.

Note:

Hot waxes applied by automatic carwashers have been known to affectthe wiper's ability to clean windows.

To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gas, paraffin, paintthinner, or other solvents on or nearthem.

Be careful not to pinch hands orfingers as it may cause injury, ordamage the wipers. When washing orservicing the vehicle, make sure thewiper lever is in the OFF position.

Replacing Windshield Wiper BladesWhen the wipers no longer clean well,the blades are probably worn orcracked. Replace them.When raising both windshield wiperarms, raise the driver's side wiper armfirst.When lowering the wiper arms, slowlylower the wiper arm from thepassenger's side first while supportingit with your hand. Forcefully loweringthe wiper arms could damage the wiperarm and blade, and may scratch orcrack the windshield.Note: To prevent damage to the wiperarms and other components, do not tryto sweep the wiper arm by hand.

Blade ReplacementProceed as follows:

1. Raise the wiper arm.

2. Open the clip and slide the bladeassembly in the direction of the arrow.

07031101-36A-001

Clip

235

3. Tilt the blade assembly and removeit from the arm.

Warning!

To prevent damage to the windshield letthe wiper arm down easily, do not let it slapdown on the windshield.

4. Pull down the blade rubber and slideit out of blade holder.

5. Remove the metal stiffeners fromeach blade rubber and install them inthe new blade.

6. Carefully insert the new bladerubber. Then install the blade assemblyin the reverse order of removal.

07031101-36A-002

Blade Assembly and Arm

07031101-36A-003

Blade Holder

07031101-36A-004

Metal Stiffeners

07031101-36A-005

Reassemble Blade

236

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

RAISING THEVEHICLEIf the vehicle needs to be raised, see anauthorized dealer which is equippedwith arm hoists or workshop lifts.The vehicle’s lifting points are markedon the side skirts with the symbols.

WHEELS AND TIRESTire Safety Information

Tire safety information will coveraspects of the following information:Tire Markings, Tire IdentificationNumbers, Tire Terminology andDefinitions, Tire Pressures, and TireLoading.

Tire Markings

Note:

P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing isbased on U.S. design standards.P-Metric tires have the letter “P”molded into the sidewall preceding thesize designation. Example:P215/65R15 95H.

European — Metric tire sizing isbased on European design standards.Tires designed to this standard havethe tire size molded into the sidewallbeginning with the section width. Theletter "P" is absent from this tire sizedesignation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizingis based on U.S. design standards.The size designation for LT-Metric tiresis the same as for P-Metric tires exceptfor the letters “LT” that are molded intothe sidewall preceding the sizedesignation. Example: LT235/85R16.

Temporary spare tires are designedfor temporary emergency use only.Temporary high pressure compactspare tires have the letter “T” or “S”molded into the sidewall preceding thesize designation. Example:T145/80D18 103M.

High flotation tire sizing is based onU.S. design standards and it beginswith the tire diameter molded into thesidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

0601085395US

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOTSafety StandardsCode (TIN)

4 — MaximumLoad

2 — Size Desi-gnation

5 — MaximumPressure

3 — Service De-scription

6 — Treadwear,Traction andTemperatureGrades

237

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

"R" means radial construction, or

"D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure,vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

238

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

EXAMPLE:

Load Identification:Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

LL = Light load tire or

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with whitesidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on theoutboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find iton the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved forhighway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

03 means the 3rd week

239

EXAMPLE:

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

01 means the year 2001

Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the frontdoor.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has notbeen driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sittingfor a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (poundsper square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflationpressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on thetire placard.

Tire PlacardA label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loadingcapacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflationpressures.

240

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Tire Loading And Tire PressureNote: The proper cold tire inflationpressure is listed on the driver’s sideB-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver'sside door.

Tire And Loading InformationPlacard

This placard tells you importantinformation about the:

1. Number of people that can becarried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for thefront, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tiremust not exceed the load carryingcapacity of the tire on your vehicle. Youwill not exceed the tire's load carryingcapacity if you adhere to the loadingconditions, tire size, and cold tireinflation pressures specified on the Tireand Loading Information placard in“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting AndOperating” section of this manual.

Note: Under a maximum loadedvehicle condition, gross axle weightratings (GAWRs) for the front and rearaxles must not be exceeded.For further information on GAWRs,vehicle loading, and trailer towing, referto “Vehicle Loading” in the “StartingAnd Operating” section of this manual.To determine the maximum loadingconditions of your vehicle, locate thestatement “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tireand Loading Information placard. Thecombined weight of occupants,cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight(if applicable) should never exceed theweight referenced here.Steps For Determining CorrectLoad Limit—(1) Locate the statement “Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXX kgor XXX lbs.” on your vehicle'splacard.(2) Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkg or XXX lbs.(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and

0806115150US

Example Tire Placard Location(Door)

0806115151US

Example Tire Placard Location(B-Pillar)

GUID-054900418-high.tif

Tire And Loading InformationPlacard

241

luggage load capacity. Forexample, if “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)(5) Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.Metric Example For Load LimitFor example, if “XXX” amount equals635 kg and there will be five 68 kgpassengers in your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) =295 kg) as shown in step 4.

Note:

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be transferredto your vehicle. The following tableshows examples on how to calculatetotal load, cargo/luggage, and towingcapacities of your vehicle with varyingseating configurations and number andsize of occupants. This table is forillustration purposes only and may notbe accurate for the seating and loadcarry capacity of your vehicle.

For the following example, thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 865 lbs(392 kg).

242

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Usetires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

GUID-054900419-high.tif

243

Tires — GeneralInformation

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essentialto the safe and satisfactory operation ofyour vehicle. Four primary areas areaffected by improper tire pressure:

Safety and Vehicle Stability

Economy

Tread Wear

Ride ComfortSafety

Warning!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerousand can cause collisions.

Underinflation increases tire flexing andcan result in overheating and tire failure.

Overinflation reduces a tire's ability tocushion shock. Objects on the road andchuckholes can cause damage that resultin tire failure.

Overinflated or underinflated tires canaffect vehicle handling and can failsuddenly, resulting in loss of vehiclecontrol.

Unequal tire pressures can causesteering problems. You could lose controlof your vehicle.

Unequal tire pressures from one side ofthe vehicle to the other can cause thevehicle to drift to the right or left.

Always drive with each tire inflated to therecommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflationaffect the stability of the vehicle and canproduce a feeling of sluggish responseor over responsiveness in the steering.

Note:

Unequal tire pressures from side toside may cause erratic andunpredictable steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side toside may cause the vehicle to drift leftor right.

Fuel EconomyUnderinflated tires will increase tirerolling resistance resulting in higher fuelconsumption.Tread WearImproper cold tire inflation pressurescan cause abnormal wear patterns andreduced tread life, resulting in the needfor earlier tire replacement.Ride Comfort And Vehicle StabilityProper tire inflation contributes to acomfortable ride. Over-inflationproduces a jarring and uncomfortableride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure islisted on the driver's side B-Pillar or rearedge of the driver's side door.At least once a month:

Check and adjust tire pressure with agood quality pocket-type pressuregauge. Do not make a visual judgementwhen determining proper inflation. Tiresmay look properly inflated even whenthey are under-inflated.

Inspect tires for signs of tire wear orvisible damage.

Caution!

After inspecting or adjusting the tirepressure, always reinstall the valve stemcap. This will prevent moisture and dirtfrom entering the valve stem, which coulddamage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on theplacard are always “cold tire inflationpressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure isdefined as the tire pressure after thevehicle has not been driven for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum ofthree hours. The cold tire inflationpressure must not exceed themaximum inflation pressure molded intothe tire sidewall.

244

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Check tire pressures more often ifsubject to a wide range of outdoortemperatures, as tire pressures varywith temperature changes.Tire pressures change by approximately1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of airtemperature change. Keep this in mindwhen checking tire pressure inside agarage, especially in the Winter.Example: If garage temperature = 68°F(20°C) and the outside temperature =32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflationpressure should be increased by 3 psi(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) forevery 12°F (7°C) for this outsidetemperature condition.Tire pressure may increase from 2 to6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation.DO NOT reduce this normal pressurebuild up or your tire pressure will be toolow.

Tire Pressures For High SpeedOperation

The manufacturer advocates driving atsafe speeds and within posted speedlimits. Where speed limits or conditionsare such that the vehicle can be drivenat high speeds, maintaining correct tireinflation pressure is very important.Increased tire pressure and reducedvehicle loading may be required forhigh-speed vehicle operation. Refer toyour authorized tire dealer or originalequipment vehicle dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds,loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

Warning!

High speed driving with your vehicle undermaximum load is dangerous. The addedstrain on your tires could cause them tofail. You could have a serious collision. Donot drive a vehicle loaded to the maximumcapacity at continuous speeds above75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

Warning!

Combining radial ply tires with other typesof tires on your vehicle will cause yourvehicle to handle poorly. The instabilitycould cause a collision. Always use radialply tires in sets of four. Never combinethem with other types of tires.

Tire RepairIf your tire becomes damaged, it maybe repaired if it meets the followingcriteria:

The tire has not been driven on whenflat.

The damage is only on the treadsection of your tire (sidewall damage isnot repairable).

The puncture is no greater than a ¼of an inch (6 mm).Consult an authorized tire dealer for tirerepairs and additional information.Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flattires that have experienced a loss ofpressure should be replacedimmediately with another Run Flat tireof identical size and service description(Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability todrive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph(80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflationpressure. This rapid loss of inflation isreferred to as the Run Flat mode. A RunFlat mode occurs when the tire inflationpressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flatmode it has limited driving capabilitiesand needs to be replaced immediately.A Run Flat tire is not repairable.It is not recommended driving a vehicleloaded at full capacity or to tow a trailerwhile a tire is in the run flat mode.See the tire pressure monitoring sectionfor more information.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or iceconditions, do not spin your vehicle'swheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or forlonger than 30 seconds continuouslywithout stopping.

245

Warning!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.Forces generated by excessive wheelspeeds may cause tire damage or failure. Atire could explode and injure someone. Donot spin your vehicle's wheels faster than30 mph (48 km/h) for more than30 seconds continuously when you arestuck, and do not let anyone near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the originalequipment tires to help you indetermining when your tires should bereplaced.

These indicators are molded into thebottom of the tread grooves. They willappear as bands when the tread depth

becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).When the tread is worn to the treadwear indicators, the tire should bereplaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires”in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependentupon varying factors including, but notlimited to:

Driving style.

Tire pressure - Improper cold tireinflation pressures can cause unevenwear patterns to develop across the tiretread. These abnormal wear patternswill reduce tread life, resulting in theneed for earlier tire replacement.

Distance driven.

Performance tires, tires with a speedrating of V or higher, and Summer tirestypically have a reduced tread life.Rotation of these tires per the vehiclemaintenance schedule is highlyrecommended.

Warning!

Tires and the spare tire should be replacedafter six years, regardless of the remainingtread. Failure to follow this warning canresult in sudden tire failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting inserious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dryplace with as little exposure to light aspossible. Protect tires from contact withoil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide abalance of many characteristics. Theyshould be inspected regularly for wearand correct cold tire inflation pressures.The manufacturer strongly recommendsthat you use tires equivalent to theoriginals in size, quality andperformance when replacement isneeded. Refer to the paragraph on“Tread Wear Indicators” in this section.Refer to the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the VehicleCertification Label for the sizedesignation of your tire. The Load Indexand Speed Symbol for your tire will befound on the original equipment tiresidewall.See the Tire Sizing Chart examplefound in the “Tire Safety Information”section of this manual for moreinformation relating to the Load Indexand Speed Symbol of a tire.It is recommended to replace the twofront tires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling. If youever replace a wheel, make sure thatthe wheel’s specifications match thoseof the original wheels.

0806104865NA

Tire Tread

1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire

246

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

It is recommended you contact yourauthorized tire dealer or originalequipment dealer with any questionsyou may have on tire specifications orcapability. Failure to use equivalentreplacement tires may adversely affectthe safety, handling, and ride of yourvehicle.

Warning!

Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,or speed rating other than that specified foryour vehicle. Some combinations ofunapproved tires and wheels may changesuspension dimensions and performancecharacteristics, resulting in changes tosteering, handling, and braking of yourvehicle. This can cause unpredictablehandling and stress to steering andsuspension components. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting inserious injury or death. Use only the tireand wheel sizes with load ratings approvedfor your vehicle.

Never use a tire with a smaller loadindex or capacity, other than what wasoriginally equipped on your vehicle. Using atire with a smaller load index could result intire overloading and failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision.

Failure to equip your vehicle with tireshaving adequate speed capability canresult in sudden tire failure and loss ofvehicle control.

Caution!

Replacing original tires with tires of adifferent size may result in falsespeedometer and odometer readings.

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for allseasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, andWinter). Traction levels may varybetween different all season tires. Allseason tires can be identified by theM+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation onthe tire sidewall. Use all season tiresonly in sets of four; failure to do so mayadversely affect the safety and handlingof your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires— If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in bothwet and dry conditions, and are notintended to be driven in snow or on ice.If your vehicle is equipped with Summertires, be aware these tires are notdesigned for Winter or cold drivingconditions. Install Winter tires on yourvehicle when ambient temperatures areless than 40°F (5°C) or if roads arecovered with ice or snow. For moreinformation, contact an authorizeddealer.

Summer tires do not contain the allseason designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.Use Summer tires only in sets of four;failure to do so may adversely affect thesafety and handling of your vehicle.

Warning!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/iceconditions. You could lose vehicle control,resulting in severe injury or death. Drivingtoo fast for conditions also creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require theuse of snow tires during the Winter.Snow tires can be identified by a“mountain/snowflake” symbol on thetire sidewall.

If you need snow tires,select tires equivalentin size and type to theoriginal equipmenttires. Use snow tiresonly in sets of four;failure to do so mayadversely affect the

safety and handling of your vehicle.Snow tires generally have lower speedratings than what was originallyequipped with your vehicle and shouldnot be operated at sustained speedsover 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds 247

above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer tooriginal equipment or an authorized tiredealer for recommended safe operatingspeeds, loading and cold tire inflationpressures.While studded tires improveperformance on ice, skid and tractioncapability on wet or dry surfaces maybe poorer than that of non-studdedtires. Some states prohibit studdedtires; therefore, local laws should bechecked before using these tire types.

Spare Tires — IfEquippedNote: For vehicles equipped with TireService Kit instead of a spare tire,please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “InCase Of Emergency” for furtherinformation.

Caution!

Because of the reduced ground clearance,do not take your vehicle through anautomatic car wash with a compact orlimited use temporary spare installed.Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching OriginalEquipped Tire And Wheel — IfEquipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with aspare tire and wheel equivalent in lookand function to the original equipment

tire and wheel found on the front or rearaxle of your vehicle. This spare tire maybe used in the tire rotation for yourvehicle. If your vehicle has this option,refer to an authorized tire dealer for therecommended tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — IfEquipped

The compact spare is for temporaryemergency use only. You can identify ifyour vehicle is equipped with acompact spare by looking at the sparetire description on the Tire and LoadingInformation Placard located on thedriver’s side door opening or on thesidewall of the tire. Compact spare tiredescriptions begin with the letter “T” or“S” preceding the size designation.Example: T145/80D18 103M.T, S = Temporary Spare TireSince this tire has limited tread life, theoriginal equipment tire should berepaired (or replaced) and reinstalled onyour vehicle at the first opportunity.Do not install a wheel cover or attemptto mount a conventional tire on thecompact spare wheel, since the wheelis designed specifically for the compactspare tire. Do not install more than onecompact spare tire and wheel on thevehicle at any given time.

Warning!

Compact and collapsible spares are fortemporary emergency use only. With thesespares, do not drive more than 50 mph(80 km/h). Temporary use spares havelimited tread life. When the tread is worn tothe tread wear indicators, the temporaryuse spare tire needs to be replaced. Besure to follow the warnings, which apply toyour spare. Failure to do so could result inspare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Collapsible Spare Tire — IfEquipped

The collapsible spare is for temporaryemergency use only. You can identify ifyour vehicle is equipped with acollapsible spare by looking at thespare tire description on the Tire andLoading Information Placard located onthe driver’s side door opening or on thesidewall of the tire.Collapsible spare tire descriptionexample: 165/80-17 101P.Since this tire has limited tread life, theoriginal equipment tire should berepaired (or replaced) and reinstalled onyour vehicle at the first opportunity.Inflate collapsible tire only after thewheel is properly installed to thevehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire usingthe electric air pump before loweringthe vehicle.

248

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Do not install a wheel cover or attemptto mount a conventional tire on thecollapsible spare wheel, since the wheelis designed specifically for thecollapsible spare tire.

Warning!

Compact and Collapsible spares are fortemporary emergency use only. With thesespares, do not drive more than 50 mph(80 km/h). Temporary use spares havelimited tread life. When the tread is worn tothe tread wear indicators, the temporaryuse spare tire needs to be replaced. Besure to follow the warnings, which apply toyour spare. Failure to do so could result inspare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporaryemergency use only. This tire may looklike the originally equipped tire on thefront or rear axle of your vehicle, but it isnot. This spare tire may have limitedtread life. When the tread is worn to thetread wear indicators, the temporaryuse full size spare tire needs to bereplaced. Since it is not the same asyour original equipment tire, replace (orrepair) the original equipment tire andreinstall on the vehicle at the firstopportunity.

Limited Use Spare — IfEquipped

The limited use spare tire is fortemporary emergency use only. This tireis identified by a label located on thelimited use spare wheel. This labelcontains the driving limitations for thisspare. This tire may look like the originalequipped tire on the front or rear axle ofyour vehicle, but it is not. Installation ofthis limited use spare tire affects vehiclehandling. Since it is not the same asyour original equipment tire, replace (orrepair) the original equipment tire andreinstall on the vehicle at the firstopportunity.

Warning!

Limited use spares are for emergency useonly. Installation of this limited use sparetire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,do not drive more than the speed listed onthe limited use spare wheel. Keep inflatedto the cold tire inflation pressures listed onyour Tire and Loading Information Placardlocated on the driver’s side B-Pillar or therear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace(or repair) the original equipment tire at thefirst opportunity and reinstall it on yourvehicle. Failure to do so could result in lossof vehicle control.

Wheel And Wheel TrimCare

All wheels and wheel trim, especiallyaluminum and chrome plated wheels,should be cleaned regularly using mild(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintaintheir luster and to prevent corrosion.Wash wheels with the same soapsolution recommended for the body ofthe vehicle.Your wheels are susceptible todeterioration caused by salt, sodiumchloride, magnesium chloride, calciumchloride, etc., and other road chemicalsused to melt ice or control dust on dirtroads. Use a soft cloth or sponge andmild soap to wipe away promptly. Donot use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.They can damage the wheel’sprotective coating that helps keep themfrom corroding and tarnishing.Note: Many aftermarket wheelcleaners contain strong acids or strongalkaline additives that can harm thewheel surface.

249

Caution!

Avoid products or automatic car washesthat use acidic solutions or strong alkalineadditives or harsh brushes. These productsand automatic car washes may damagethe wheel's protective finish. Such damageis not covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Only car wash soap, MoparWheel Cleaner or equivalent isrecommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheelsincluding excessive brake dust, caremust be taken in the selection of tireand wheel cleaning chemicals andequipment to prevent damage to thewheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment orMopar Chrome Cleaner or theirequivalent is recommended or select anon-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner foraluminum or chrome wheels. Do notuse any products on Dark Vapor orBlack Satin Chrome Wheels. They willpermanently damage this finish andsuch damage is not covered by theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Caution!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, abristle brush, metal polishes or ovencleaner. These products may damage thewheel's protective finish. Such damage isnot covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Only car wash soap, MoparWheel Cleaner or equivalent isrecommended.

Note: If you intend parking or storingyour vehicle for an extended periodafter cleaning the wheels with wheelcleaner, drive your vehicle for a fewminutes before doing so. Driving thevehicle and applying the brakes whenstopping will reduce the risk of brakerotor corrosion.Dark Vapor Or Black Satin ChromeWheels

Caution!

If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vaporor Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOTUSE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishingcompounds. They will permanently damagethis finish and such damage is not coveredby the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USEONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH ASOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; thisis all that is required to maintain this finish.

Snow ChainsThe use of snow chains should be incompliance with local regulations ofeach country. In certain countries, tiresmarked with code M+S (Mud andSnow) are considered as winterequipment; therefore their use isequivalent to that of the snow chains.The snow chains may be applied onlyto the front wheel tires. Check thetension of the snow chains after the firstfew feet have been driven.

Warning!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S,Snow) between front and rear axles cancause unpredictable handling. You couldlose control and have a collision.

250

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Caution!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,observe the following precautions:

Because of restricted traction deviceclearance between tires and othersuspension components, it is importantthat only traction devices in good conditionare used. Broken devices can causeserious damage. Stop the vehicleimmediately if noise occurs that couldindicate device breakage. Remove thedamaged parts of the device before furtheruse.

Install device as tightly as possible andthen retighten after driving about ½ mile(0.8 km).

Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

Drive cautiously and avoid severe turnsand large bumps, especially with a loadedvehicle.

Do not drive for a prolonged period ondry pavement.

Observe the traction devicemanufacturer’s instructions on the methodof installation, operating speed, andconditions for use. Always use thesuggested operating speed of the devicemanufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph(48 km/h).

Do not use traction devices on acompact spare tire.

Caution!

Using snow chains with tires withnon-original dimensions may damage thevehicle.

Using different size or type (M+S, snow,etc.) tires between front and rear axle mayadversely affect vehicle driveability, with therisk of losing control of the vehicle andresulting accidents.

Tire RotationRecommendations

The front and rear tires are subject todifferent loads and stress due tosteering, maneuver and braking. Forthis reason they are subject to unevenwear. To resolve this problem, tiresshould be rotated at the appropriatetime.

The following rotation methods mustNOT be used with one-wayunidirectional tires! This type of tires canonly be switched from the front axle tothe rear axle and vice versa, keepingthem on the same side of the vehicle.

Rotate one-way unidirectional tiresand radial tires that have anasymmetrical tread pattern only fromfront to rear, not from side to side. Tireperformance will be reduced if rotatedfrom side to side.

Tire rotation means moving the wheelsto a different position, with respect tothe vehicle. During rotation, inspect tiresfor correct balance.

The single wheel will therefore operateon a different axle and, where possible,on the opposite side of the vehicle.

Note:

Rotate tires periodically. Irregular tirewear is dangerous. To equalize treadwear for maintaining goodperformance in handling and braking,rotate the tires every 6,200 miles(10,000 km), or sooner if irregular weardevelops.

To equalize tread wear, rotate thetires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) atthe latest or sooner if irregular weardevelops. FCA recommends to rotateevery 5,000 miles (8,000 km) to helpincrease tire life and distribute wearmore evenly.

07031402-FRT-001

Rotation Diagram

251

Because your vehicle is notequipped with a spare tire, you cannotdo a tire rotation safely with the jackthat may come with your vehicle if soequipped. Contact an authorizeddealer for tire rotation.

Also, inspect them for uneven wear anddamage. Abnormal wear is usuallycaused by one or a combination of thefollowing:

Incorrect tire pressure

Improper wheel alignment

Out-of-balance wheel

Severe brakingAfter rotation, inflate all tire pressures tospecification and inspect the wheel nutsfor tightness.

With Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS)The TPM system must be initializedafter adjusting the tire pressure, tomake the system operate normally.Refer to “Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem” in “Safety” for furtherinformation.Rotate unidirectional tires and radialtires that have an asymmetrical treadpattern only from front to rear, not fromside to side. Tire performance will bereduced if rotated from side to side.

DEPARTMENT OFTRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIREQUALITY GRADESThe following tire gradingcategories were established by theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration. The specific graderating assigned by the tire'smanufacturer in each category isshown on the sidewall of the tireson your vehicle.All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal safetyrequirements in addition to thesegrades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is acomparative rating, based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tiresdepends upon the actualconditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices, anddifferences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.These grades represent the tire'sability to stop on wet pavement, asmeasured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.

Warning!

The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-aheadbraking traction tests, and doesnot include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The Temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire's resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heat,252

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level ofperformance, which all passengervehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory testwheel, than the minimum requiredby law.

Warning!

The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

STORING THEVEHICLEIf the vehicle is left inactive for longerthan a month, the following precautionsshould be observed:

Park the vehicle in covered, dry and ifpossible well-ventilated premises andslightly open the windows.

Check that the parking brake is notactivated.

Disconnect the negative batteryterminal and check the battery charge.Repeat this check once every threemonths during storage.

If the battery is not disconnectedfrom the electrical system, check itsstate of charge every thirty days.

Clean and protect the painted partsusing protective wax.

Clean and protect the shiny metalparts using special compoundsavailable commercially.

Sprinkle talcum powder on thewindshield and rear window wiperrubber blades and lift them off theglass.

Cover the vehicle with a fabric orperforated plastic sheet, payingparticular care not to damage thepainted surface by dragging any dustthat may have accumulated on it. Donot use compact plastic sheets which

do not allow humidity to evaporate fromthe surface of the vehicle.

Inflate the tires at a pressure of+7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) higher thanrecommended on the tire placard andcheck it periodically.

Do not drain the engine coolingsystem.

Any time the vehicle is left inactive fortwo weeks or more, operate the airconditioning system with engine idlingfor at least five minutes, setting externalair and with fan set to maximum speed.This operation will ensure appropriatelubrication for the system, thusminimizing the possibility of damage tothe compressor when the system isoperated again.Note: After placing the ignition in theOFF mode and having closed the driverside door, wait at least one minutebefore disconnecting the electricalsupply from the battery. Whenreconnecting the electrical supply to thebattery, make sure that the ignition inthe OFF mode and the driver side dooris closed.

253

BODYWORKProtection FromAtmospheric AgentsThe vehicle is equipped with the bestavailable technological solutions toprotect the bodywork against corrosion.These include:

Painting products and systemswhich give the vehicle resistance tocorrosion and abrasion.

Use of galvanized (or pre-treated)steel sheets, with high resistance tocorrosion.

Spraying of plastic parts, with aprotective function in the more exposedpoints: underdoor, inner fender, edges,etc.

Use of “open” boxed sections toprevent condensation and pockets ofmoisture which could favor theformation of rust inside.

Use of special films to protectagainst abrasion in exposed areas (e.g.rear fender, doors, etc.).

Corrosion WarrantyYour vehicle is covered by CorrosionWarranty against perforation due to rustof any original element of the structureor bodywork. For the general terms ofthis Corrosion Warranty, refer to theWarranty Booklet.

Preserving ThePaintwork

Touch up abrasions and scratchesimmediately to prevent the formation ofrust.Maintenance of paintwork consists ofwashing the vehicle: the frequencydepends on the conditions andenvironment in which the vehicle isused.For example, it is advisable to wash thevehicle more often in areas with highlevels of atmospheric pollution or saltedroads.To correctly wash the vehicle, followthese instructions:

If high pressure jets or cleaners areused to wash the vehicle, keep adistance of at least 1.3 ft (40 cm) fromthe bodywork to avoid damage oralteration. Build up of water couldcause damage to the vehicle in the longterm.

Wash the vehicle using a lowpressure jet of water if possible.

Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapysolution over the bodywork, frequentlyrinsing the sponge.

Rinse well with water and dry with ajet of air or a chamois leather.Dry the less visible parts (e.g. doorframes, hood, headlight frames, etc.)with special care, as water maystagnate more easily in these areas. Do

not wash the vehicle after it has beenleft in the sun or with the hood hot: thismay alter the shine of the paintwork.Exterior plastic parts must be cleanedin the same way as the rest of thevehicle.

Note:

Avoid parking under trees; the sapdropped by trees makes the paintwork go dull and increases thepossibility of corrosion.

Bird droppings must be washed offimmediately and thoroughly as the acidthey contain is particularly aggressive.

Etching caused by acid rain orindustrial falloutCause:Industrial pollutants and vehicleemissions drift into the air and mix withrain or dew to form acids. These acidscan settle on a vehicle's finish. As thewater evaporates, the acid becomesconcentrated and can damage thefinish.The longer the acid remains on thesurface, the greater the chance is fordamage.Prevention:It is necessary to wash and wax yourvehicle to preserve its finish accordingto the instructions in this section. Thesesteps should be taken immediately afteryou suspect that acid rain has settledon your vehicle's finish.

254

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Damage caused by birddropping/insects/tree sapProblem:Bird droppings contain acids. If theseare not removed they can eat away theclear and color base coat of thevehicle's paintwork.When insects stick to the paint surfaceand decompose, corrosive compoundsform. These can erode the clear andcolor base coat of the vehicle'spaintwork if they are not removed.Tree sap will harden and adherepermanently to the paint finish. If youscratch the sap off while it is hard,some vehicle paint could come off withit.Prevention:It is necessary to have your vehiclewashed and waxed to preserve its finishaccording to the instructions in thissection. This should be done as soonas possible.Bird droppings can be removed with asoft sponge and water. If you aretravelling and these are not available, amoistened tissue may also take care ofthe problem. The cleaned area shouldbe waxed according to the instructionsin this section. Insects and tree sap arebest removed with a soft sponge andwater or a commercially availablechemical cleaner.

Another method is to cover the affectedarea with dampened newspaper for oneto two hours. After removing thenewspaper, rinse off the looseneddebris with water.

Water marksProblem:Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water cancontain harmful minerals such as saltand lime. If moisture containing theseminerals settles on the vehicle andevaporates, the minerals willconcentrate and harden to form whiterings. The rings can damage yourvehicle's finish.Prevention:It is necessary to wash and wax yourvehicle to preserve its finish accordingto the instructions in this section. Thesesteps should be taken immediately afteryou find water marks on your vehicle'sfinish.

Paint chippingProblem:Paint chipping occurs when gravelthrown in the air by another vehicle'stires hits your vehicle.How to avoid paint chipping:Keeping a safe distance between youand the vehicle ahead reduces thechances of having your paint chippedby flying gravel.

Note:

The paint chipping zone varies withthe speed of the vehicle. For example,when travelling at 55 mph (90 km/h),the paint chipping zone is 164 ft(50 m).

In low temperatures, a vehicle'sfinish hardens. This increases thechance of paint chipping.

Chipped paint can lead to rustforming on your vehicle. Before thishappens, repair the damage by usingFCA touch-up paint according to theinstructions in this section. Failure torepair the affected area could lead toserious rusting and expensive repairs.

Follow all label and container directionswhen using a chemical cleaner orpolish. Read all warnings and cautions.

Maintaining The Finish

WashingTo help protect the finish from rust anddeterioration, wash your vehiclethoroughly and frequently, at least oncea month, with lukewarm or cold water.If the vehicle is washed improperly, thepaint surface could be scratched. Hereare some examples of how scratchingcould occur:

The vehicle is washed without firstrinsing off dirt and other foreign matter.

The vehicle is washed with a rough,dry, or dirty cloth.

255

The vehicle is washed at a car washthat uses brushes that are dirty or toostiff.

Cleansers or wax containingabrasives are used.Note: FCA is not responsible forscratches caused by automatic carwashes or improper washing.Scratches are more noticeable onvehicles with darker paint finishes.When the wiper lever is in the AUTOposition and the ignition is placed in theON mode, the wipers may moveautomatically in the following cases:

If the windshield above the rainsensor is touched or wiped with a cloth.

If the windshield is struck with a handor other object from either outside orinside the vehicle.

Note:

Keep hands and scrapers clear ofthe windshield when the wiper lever isin the AUTO position and the ignition isplaced in the ON mode as fingerscould be pinched or the wipers andwiper blades damaged when thewipers activate automatically. If you aregoing to clean the windshield, be surethe wipers are turned off completely(when it is most likely that the engine isleft running) this is particularlyimportant when clearing ice and snow.

Do not spray water in the enginecompartment. Otherwise, it couldresult in engine-starting problems ordamage to electrical parts.

When washing and waxing thevehicle, be careful not to applyexcessive force to any single area ofthe vehicle hood. Otherwise, you coulddent the vehicle.

Do not use automatic car washingmachines and car washing devicesusing high water pressure.

Make sure that the fuel door isclosed and lock the doors. Otherwise,the fuel door may be forcefully openedby water pressure causing damage tothe vehicle or fuel door.

To minimize scratches on the vehicle'spaint finish:

Rinse off any dirt or other foreignmatter using lukewarm or cold waterbefore washing.

Use plenty of lukewarm or cold waterand a soft cloth when washing thevehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.

Rub gently when washing or dryingthe vehicle.

Take your vehicle only to a car washthat keeps its brushes well maintained.

Do not use abrasive cleansers orwax that contain abrasives.

Caution!

Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, orstrong detergents containing highly alkalineor caustic agents on chrome plated oranodized aluminium parts. This maydamage the protective coating; also,cleaners and detergents may discolor ordeteriorate the paint.

Pay special attention to removing salt,dirt, mud, and other foreign materialfrom the underside of the fenders, andmake sure the drain holes in the loweredges of the doors and rocker panelsare clean.Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial fallout, and similar depositscan damage the finish if not removedimmediately. When prompt washingwith plain water is ineffective, use a mildsoap made for use on vehicles.Thoroughly rinse off all soap withlukewarm or cold water. Do not allowsoap to dry on the finish.After washing the vehicle, dry it with aclean chamois to prevent water spotsfrom forming.

256

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

WaxingYour vehicle needs to be waxed whenwater no longer beads on the finish.Always wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing it. In addition to the vehiclebody, wax the metal trim to maintain itslustre:

Use wax which contains noabrasives. Waxes containing abrasivewill remove paint and could damagebright metal parts.

Use a good grade of natural wax formetallic, mica, and solid colors.

When waxing, coat evenly with thesponge supplied or a soft cloth.

Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.Note: A spot remover to remove oil,tar, and similar materials will usually alsotake off the wax. Rewax these areaseven if the rest of the vehicle does notneed it.

Repairing Damage ToThe FinishDeep scratches or chips on the finishshould be repaired promptly. Exposedmetal quickly rusts and can lead tomajor repairs.Note: If your vehicle is damaged andneeds metal parts repaired or replaced,make sure the body shop appliescorrosion prevention materials to allparts, both repaired and new. This willprevent them from rusting.

Bright-MetalMaintenanceUse tar remover to remove road tar andinsects. Never do this with a knife orsimilar tool.To prevent corrosion on brigh-tmetalsurfaces, apply wax or chromepreservative and rub it to a high lustre.During cold weather or in coastal areas,cover bright-metal parts with a coatingof wax or preservative heavier thanusual. It would also help to coat themwith noncorrosive petroleum jelly orsome other protective compound.

Caution!

Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, orstrong detergents containing highly alkalineor caustic agents on chrome plated oranodized aluminium parts. This may resultin damage to the protective coating andcause discoloration or paint deterioration.

Underbody MaintenanceRoad chemicals and salt used for iceand snow removal and solvents usedfor dust control may collect on theunderbody. If not removed, they willspeed up rusting and deterioration ofsuch underbody parts as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system,even though these parts may be coatedwith anti-corrosive material.

Thoroughly flush the underbody andwheel housings with lukewarm or coldwater at the end of each winter. Try alsoto do this every month.Pay special attention to these areasbecause they easily hide mud and dirt.It will do more harm than good to wetdown the road grime without removingit.The lower edges of doors, rockerpanels, and frame members have drainholes that should not be clogged.Water trapped there will cause rusting.

Aluminium WheelMaintenanceA protective coating is provided overthe aluminium wheels. Special care isneeded to protect this coating.Note: Do not use any detergent otherthan mild detergent. Before using anydetergent, verify the ingredients.Otherwise, the product could discoloror stain the aluminium wheels.

Caution!

Do not use a wire brush or any abrasivecleaner, polishing compound, or solvent onaluminium wheels. They may damage thecoating.

Note: Always use a sponge or softcloth to clean the wheels. Rinse thewheels thoroughly with lukewarm or 257

cold water. Also, be sure to clean thewheels after driving on dusty or saltedroads to help prevent corrosion.

Convertible TopMaintenanceThe convertible top is made of a specialhigh-grade material, but if it's not takengood care of, hardening, staining, andloss of lustre will result. Maintain itunder these guidelines.

WashingDo not wait until the convertible topgets really dirty before cleaning it. Dirtthat's there too long will causedeterioration.

Before washing, remove dust andcoarse particulate with a soft brush.

Gently clean the convertible top witha synthetic neutral detergent, lots ofwater, and a soft brush.

Rinse it thoroughly with clean waterto remove all the soap.

Wipe it as dry as you can before thewater dries on it.

Then allow it to dry completely beforelowering it.

Caution!

Automatic and high-pressure carwashes are harmful to a convertible top.Avoid them.

Do not spray water directly on the areawhere the window glass and theconvertible top meet. This would probablycause water to enter the interior.

Do not spray water directly on the seamarea of the body and the convertible top asit could result in water penetrating theinterior.

Do not wipe the convertible top usingalcohol, chlorine bleach, or organicsolvents such as thinner, benzene, orgasoline. Otherwise, they may causediscoloration or stains.

Too much treatment on the convertibletop can be as damaging as too little. Followthe manufacturer's directions. Do not overdo it!

Note:

Some leather treatment productscan ruin the convertible top's gloss. Becareful of the one you choose.

Test on an inconspicuous, smallcorner of the convertible top if you arenot sure.

Do not get any car wax on theconvertible top.

If you do, remove it with a goodleather cleaner or mild detergent(about 5% solution).

Let the convertible top drycompletely before lowering afterapplying treatment or dressing.

Drain Filter CleaningIf leaves or other matter block the drainfilter, water may enter the vehicle. Cleanthe drain filter at least once a year.

Proceed as follows:

1. Check the position of the drain filterwith your hand from behind the bow.

07040110122001

Drain Filter

258

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

2. Remove the drain filter whilepressing the tab.

3. Remove leaves and other matteraccumulated in the drain filter.

4. Reinstall the drain filter in the reverseorder of the removal procedure.Note: Make sure that the drain filter issecurely attached to its designatedposition by pushing it until the tablocks. Water may enter the vehicle if thedrain filter is not secured to itsdesignated position. For this operationgo to an authorized dealer.

Plastic PartMaintenanceWhen cleaning the plastic lenses of thelights, do not use gasoline, paraffin,rectified spirit, paint, thinner, highlyacidic detergents, or strongly alkalinedetergents.Otherwise, these chemical agents candiscolor or damage the surfacesresulting in a significant loss infunctionality. If plastic parts becomeinadvertently exposed to any of thesechemical agents, flush with waterimmediately.If plastic parts such as the bumpersbecome inadvertently exposed tochemical agents or fluids such asgasoline, oil, engine coolant, or batteryfluid, it could cause discoloration,staining, or paint peeling. Wipe off anysuch chemical agents or fluids using asoft cloth immediately.

Caution!

High water temperature and high waterpressure car washers are availabledepending on the type of high pressure carwasher device. If the car washer nozzle isput too close to the vehicle or aimed at onearea for an extended period of time, itcould deform plastic parts or damage thepaint.

Do not use wax containing compounds(polish). Otherwise, it could result in paintdamage.

In addition, do not use an electrical or airtool to apply wax. Otherwise, the frictionalheat generated could result in deformationof plastic parts or paint damage.

07040110123001

Drain Filter Location

1 — Drain Filter2 — Bow

07040110124001

Drain Filter Tab

259

INTERIORSSeats And Fabric Parts

Warning!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaningpurposes. Many are potentially flammable,and if used in closed areas they may causerespiratory harm.Do not keep aerosol cans in the car: theymight explode. Aerosol cans must not beexposed to a temperature exceeding122°F (50°C). When the vehicle is exposedto sunlight the internal temperature cangreatly exceed this value.

Caution!

Direct contact of air fresheners, insectrepellents, suntan lotions, or handsanitizers, to the plastic, painted, ordecorated surfaces of the interior maycause permanent damage. Wipe awayimmediately.

Damage caused by these type ofproducts may not be covered by your NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

Rubbing the interior side of theconvertible top vigorously with a stiff brushor cloth may cause damage.

VinylRemove dust and loose dirt from vinylwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinylcleaner.

FabricRemove dust and loose dirt from fabricwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean it with a mild soap solution goodfor upholstery and carpets.Remove fresh spots immediately with afabric spot cleaner.To keep the fabric looking clean andfresh, take care of it. Otherwise its colorwill be affected, it can be stained easily,and its fire-resistance may be reduced.Note: Use only recommended cleanersand procedures. Others may affectappearance and fire-resistance.

Interior PanelsWhen the interior panels need to becleaned, use soft material such as asoft cloth soaked in clean water andwrung out well and lightly wipe off dirtfrom the surface.If a panel requires further cleaning, wipedirt off using a soft cloth soaked in milddetergent (about 5% solution) and wipeoff any remaining detergent using acloth soaked in clean water and wrungout well.

Caution!

Do not wipe leather parts using alcohol,chlorine bleach, or organic solvents suchas thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise,it may cause discoloration or stains.

Note:

Scratches or nicks on the panelsand metallic trim resulting from the useof a hard brush or cloth may not berepairable.

Be particularly careful whencleaning high gloss panels and metallictrim as they can be easily scratched.

Lap / Shoulder Belt

Warning!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in acollision and leave you with no protection.Inspect the belt system periodically,checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.Damaged parts must be replacedimmediately. Do not disassemble or modifythe system. Seat belt assemblies must bereplaced after a collision if they have beendamaged (i.e., bent retractor, tornwebbing, etc.).

260

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

Clean the webbing with a mild soapsolution recommended for upholstery orcarpets. Follow instructions. Do notbleach or dye the belts, this mayweaken them.After cleaning the belts, thoroughly drythe belt webbing and make sure thereis no remaining moisture beforeretracting them.

Plastic And CoatedParts

Clean interior plastic parts with a dampcloth (if possible made from microfiber),and a solution of water and neutral,non-abrasive detergent.To clean oily or persistent stains, usespecific products free from solvents anddesigned to maintain the originalappearance and color of thecomponents.Remove any dust using a microfibercloth, if necessary moistened withwater. The use of paper tissues is notrecommended as these may leaveresidues.

Instrument panel precautionsPrevent caustic solutions such asperfume and cosmetic oils fromcontacting the instrument panel. Theywill damage and discolor the instrumentpanel. If these solutions get on theinstrument panel, wipe them offimmediately.

Note: Never use alcohol, gasoline andderivatives to clean the instrumentpanel lens.

Caution!

Do not use glazing agents. Glazing agentscontain ingredients which may causediscoloration, wrinkling, cracks and peeling.

Instrument Panel TopWhen cleaning, it is recommended thatyou use a clean towel dampened in amild detergent to remove debris.

Caution!

If the surface is rubbed harshly, it couldresult in the surface being damaged leavingwhite scratch marks.

Window InteriorsIf the windows become covered with anoily, greasy, or waxy film, clean themwith glass cleaner. Follow the directionson the container.Note: Do not scrape or scratch theinside of the window glass. It coulddamage the thermal filaments.

Caution!

When washing the inside of the windowglass, use a soft cloth dampened inlukewarm water, gently wiping the thermalfilaments. Use of glass cleaning productscould damage the thermal filaments.

261

Leather Parts — IfEquipped

Caution!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-basedand/or Ketone based cleaning products toclean leather seats, as damage to the seatmay result.

Remove dust and sand first using avacuum cleaner or other means, thenwipe dirt off using a soft cloth with aleather cleaner or a soft cloth soaked inmild soap.Wipe off the remaining cleaner or soapusing a cloth soaked in clean water andwrung out well.Remove moisture with a dry, soft clothand allow the leather to further dry in awell-ventilated, shaded area.If the leather gets wet such as fromrain, also remove moisture and dry it assoon as possible.

Note:

Because genuine leather is a naturalmaterial, its surface is not uniform andit may have natural scars, scratches,and wrinkles.

To maintain the quality for as longas possible, periodical maintenance,about twice a year, is recommended.

Caution!

Sand and dust on the seat surface maydamage the overcoat of the genuineleather surfaces and accelerate wear.

Greasy soiling on genuine leather maycause molding and stains.

Rubbing hard with a stiff brush or clothmay cause damage.

Do not wipe the leather using alcohol,chlorine bleach, or organic solvents suchas thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise,it may cause discoloration or stains.

If the seats get wet, promptly removemoisture with a dry cloth. Remainingmoisture on the surface may causedeterioration such as hardening andshrinkage.

Exposure to direct sunlight for longperiods may cause deterioration andshrinkage. When parking the car underdirect sunlight for long periods, shade theinterior using sunshades.

Do not leave vinyl products on the seatsfor long periods as they may affect theleather quality and coloring. If the cabintemperature becomes hot, the vinyl maydeteriorate and adhere to the genuineleather.

262

SE

RV

ICIN

GA

ND

MA

INTE

NA

NC

E

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA . . . . . . . .264RECOMMENDED TIRE INFLATIONPRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .268BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269SUSPENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .270STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . .274FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . .275PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .277

263

IDENTIFICATIONDATAIdentification Numbers

Model PlateThe model plate is located on the leftside of door pillar.

Chassis Number/VehicleIdentification NumberThe Vehicle Identification Number islocated below the left side (driver side)of the windshield.

Motor Vehicle Safety StandardLabel(U.S.A. and Canada)The motor vehicle safety standard labelis located on the left side of door pillar.

Vehicle Emission ControlInformation Label(U.S.A. and Canada)The vehicle emission control informationlabel is located under the hood.

Tire Pressure LabelThe tire pressure label is located on theleft side of door pillar.

Engine NumberThe engine number label is located onthe engine.

10010103121001

Model Plate Location

10010104-122-001AB

Vehicle Identification Number

10010109-121-001

Motor Vehicle Safety StandardLabel

10010106-121-001

Vehicle Emission ControlInformation Label

10010107-121-002

Tire Pressure Label

264

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

RECOMMENDEDTIRE INFLATIONPRESSUREOn the tire label you will find therecommended tire inflation pressure inboth psi and kPa for the tires installedas original equipment on the vehicle.It is very important that the inflationpressure of the tires on your vehicle ismaintained at the recommendedpressure.You should check the tire pressureregularly to insure that the properinflation pressure is maintained.

Note:

Tire pressures listed on the vehicleplacard or tire information label indicatethe recommended cold tire inflationpressure, measured when the tires arecold, after the vehicle has been parkedfor at least three hours. As you drive,the temperature in the tire warms up,increasing the tire pressure.

Always check the tire inflationpressures on a regular basis accordingto the recommended tire inflationpressure on the tire label and inconjunction with the information in thisOwner's Manual. Driving your vehiclewith under-inflated tires is dangerous.Under-inflation is the most commoncause of failures in any kind of tire andmay result in severe cracking, treadseparation or “blowout”, withunexpected loss of vehicle control andincreased risk of injury. Under-inflationincreases sidewall flexing and rollingresistance, resulting in heat buildupand internal damage to the tire. Itresults in unnecessary tire stress,irregular wear, loss of control andaccidents. A tire can lose up to half ofits air pressure and not appear to beflat. It is impossible to determinewhether or not tires are properlyinflated just by looking at them.

Checking Tire Pressure

Proceed as follows:

1. When you check the air pressure,make sure the tires are cold - meaningthey are not hot from driving even amile.

2. Remove the cap from the valve onone tire.

3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto thevalve.

4. Add air to achieve recommended airpressure.

5. If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the valve. Then recheck the pressurewith your tire gauge.

6. Replace the valve cap.

7. Visually inspect the tires to makesure there are no nails or other objectsembedded that could poke a hole in thetire and cause an air leak.

8. Check the sidewalls to make surethere are no gouges, cuts, bulges,cracks or other irregularities.

Glossary Of Terms

Tire PlacardA label indicating the OE (OriginalEquipment) tire sizes, recommendedinflation pressure, and the maximumweight the vehicle can carry.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)A number on the sidewall of each tireproviding information about the tirebrand and manufacturing plant, tiresize, and date of manufacture.

Inflation PressureA measure of the amount of air in a tire.

kPaKilopascal, the metric unit for airpressure.

265

psiPounds per square inch, the Englishunit for air pressure.

B-pillarThe structural member at the side ofthe vehicle behind the front door.

Original Equipment (OE)Describes components originallyequipped on the vehicle.

Vehicle Load LimitThe maximum value of the combinationweight of occupants and cargo.

Bead Area of the TireArea of the tire next to the rim.

Sidewall Area of the TireArea between the bead area and thetread.

Tread Area of the TireArea on the perimeter of the tire thatcontacts the road when it's mountedon the vehicle.

266

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

ENGINEEngine

1.4 Turbo Multi Air

Cycle Four

Number and position of cylinders 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 72.0 x 80.4

Total displacement (cm³) 1368

Compression ratio 9.8:1

Maximum power (kW) 119

Maximum power (HP) 160

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5500

Maximum torque (Nm) 250

Maximum torque (lb.-ft.) 184

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500

Spark plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.

Fuel 91 Octane Recommended (87 Octane Acceptable) Maximum 15%Ethanol Content

Note: When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate coating on the iridium alloy and platinumtips could be damaged.

Warning!

Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system’s technical specifications intoaccount, can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

267

TRANSMISSION

Engine Traction Type Description

1.4 Turbo Multi Air RWD Manual/Automatic 6-speed manual (*) / 6-speedAutomatic Transmission(**)

(*) If equipped with manual transmission(**) If equipped with automatic transmission

268

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

BRAKES

Engine Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake

1.4 Turbo Multi Air Ventilated (floating type 11 indiameter)

Solid (floating type 11 indiameter) Mechanical (lever type)

Note: Water, ice, and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time thebrakes are applied.

269

SUSPENSIONS

Engine Front Rear

1.4 Turbo Multi Air Double wishbone with stabilizer bars Multilink with stabilizer bars

270

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

STEERING

Engine Turning circle curb to curb, ft (m) Type

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 30.8 (9.4) Double pinion electric power assist system(DP - EPAS) - rack and pinion

271

DIMENSIONSDimensions

Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured withvehicle unloaded.Trunk Volume: 4.9 cu. ft. (140 Liters)

A B C D E F

159.6 (4054 mm) 90.9 (2309 mm) 48.5 (1232 mm) 58.9 (1496 mm) 68.5 (1740 mm) 59.1 (1503 mm)

10000555-122-333

Vehicle Dimension Chart

272

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

Weights

Curb Weight: 2477 lbs (1124 kg) (ifequipped with manual transmission) /2516 lbs (1141 kg) (if equipped withautomatic transmission).

273

FLUID CAPACITIES

Item Capacities

Fuel tank 11.9 (gallons) / 45 (liters)

Engine oil (without oil filter replacement) 3.3 (quarts) / 3.2 (liters)

Engine oil (with oil filter replacement) 4.0 (quarts) / 3.8 (liters)

Coolant (with manual transmission) 7.6 (quarts) / 7.2 (liters)

Coolant (with automatic transmission) 7.5 (quarts) / 7.1 (liters)

Manual transmission oil 2.2 (quarts) / 2.1 (liters)

Automatic transmission fluid 7.8 (quarts) / 7.5 (liters)

Rear differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters)

Limited slip differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters)

Brake fluid (& clutch fluid) 0.57 (quarts) / 0.55 (liters)

274

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTSFluids And Lubricants

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements ofthe Scheduled Servicing Plan.Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality iscrucial for engine operation and duration.

Lubricant Specification Replacement interval

Engine oil

We recommend you use API Certified SAE5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the

requirements of FCA Material StandardMS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap

for correct SAE grade.

According to Scheduled Servicing Plan

Coolant Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate forFIAT Spider According to Scheduled Servicing Plan

Manual transmission oil Mopar Manual Transmission Long Life GearOil for FIAT Spider

Automatic transmission fluid Mopar Automatic Transmission Long LifeFluid for FIAT Spider

Rear differential oil Mopar Long Life Hypoid Gear Oil for FIATSpider

Limited slip differential oil Mopar Long Life Limited Slip Additive for FIATSpider

Brake/clutch fluidWe recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If

DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT4 is acceptable.

If lubricants compliant with the required specifications are not available, products that comply with the minimum requiredcharacteristics can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

275

Caution!

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result inengine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not bemixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If anon-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained,flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, asthey may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based enginecoolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

276

TEC

HN

ICA

LS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

S

PERFORMANCEPerformance

Top speed after the initial period of usage of the vehicle.

Version MPH (km/h)

1.4 Turbo Multi Air 160HP N/A

277

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAININGSERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . .279IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . .279WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . .281REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .281PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .282

278

CU

STO

ME

RA

SS

ISTA

NC

E

SUGGESTIONS FOROBTAINING SERVICEFOR YOUR VEHICLEPrepare For TheAppointment

If you are having warranty work done,be sure to bring the right papers withyou, as well as your warranty folder. Allwork to be performed may not becovered by the warranty. Discussadditional charges with the servicemanager. Keep a maintenance log ofyour vehicle's service history, as thiscan often provide a clue to the currentproblem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle'sproblems or the specific work you wantdone. If you've had an accident or workdone that is not on your maintenancelog, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable WithRequests

If you list a number of items and youmust have your vehicle by the end ofthe day, discuss the situation with theservice advisor and list the items inorder of priority. At many authorizeddealers, you may obtain a rental vehicleat a minimal daily charge. If you need arental, it is advisable to make thesearrangements when you call for anappointment.

IF YOU NEEDASSISTANCEThe manufacturer and its authorizeddealer are vitally interested in yoursatisfaction. We want you to be happywith our products and services.Warranty service must be done by anauthorized dealer. We stronglyrecommend that you take the vehicle toan authorized dealer. They know yourvehicle the best, and are mostconcerned that you get prompt andhigh quality service. The manufacturer'sauthorized dealer have the facilities,factory-trained technicians, specialtools, and the latest information toensure the vehicle is fixed correctly andin a timely manner.This is why you should always talk to anauthorized dealer service manager first.Most matters can be resolved with thisprocess.

If for some reason you are still notsatisfied, talk to the general manager orowner of the authorized dealer. Theywant to know if you need assistance.

If an authorized dealer is unable toresolve the concern, you may contactthe manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to themanufacturer's customer center shouldinclude the following information:

Owner's name and address

Owner's telephone number (homeand office)

Authorized dealer name

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FIAT Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI48321–8004Phone:

1-888-242-6342

FIAT Canada CustomerCenter

P.O. Box 1621Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)387-9983 French

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma,1240Sante Fe C.P. 05109Mexico, D. F.In Mexico City: 5081-7568Outside Mexico City:

1-800-505-1300

279

Puerto Rico And U.S.Virgin Islands

Customer Service Chrysler InternationalServices LLCP.O. Box 191857San Juan 00919-1857Tel.: (787) 782-5757Fax: (787) 782-3345

Customer AssistanceFor The Hearing OrSpeech Impaired(TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearingdifficulties, the manufacturer hasinstalled special TDD(Telecommunication Devices for theDeaf) equipment at its customer center.Any hearing or speech impairedcustomer, who has access to a TDD ora conventional teletypewriter (TTY) inthe United States, can communicatewith the manufacturer by dialing1-800-380-CHRY.Canadian residents with hearingdifficulties that require assistance canuse the special needs relay serviceoffered by Bell Canada. For TTYteletypewriter users, dial 711 and forVoice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 toconnect with a Bell Relay Serviceoperator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a servicecontract for a vehicle to help protectyou from the high cost of unexpectedrepairs after the manufacturer's NewVehicle Limited Warranty expires. Themanufacturer stands behind only themanufacturer's service contracts. If youpurchased a manufacturer's servicecontract, you will receive PlanProvisions and an Owner IdentificationCard in the mail within three weeks ofthe vehicle delivery date. If you haveany questions about the servicecontract, call the manufacturer'sService Contract National CustomerHotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadianresidents, call (800) 465-2001 English /(800) 387-9983 French).The manufacturer will not stand behindany service contract that is not themanufacturer's service contract. It isnot responsible for any service contractother than the manufacturer's servicecontract. If you purchased a servicecontract that is not a manufacturer'sservice contract, and you requireservice after the manufacturer's NewVehicle Limited Warranty expires,please refer to the contract documents,and contact the person listed in thosedocuments.

We appreciate that you have made amajor investment when you purchasedthe vehicle. An authorized dealer hasalso made a major investment infacilities, tools, and training to assurethat you are absolutely delighted withthe ownership experience. You will bepleased with their sincere efforts toresolve any warranty issues or relatedconcerns.

Warning!

Engine exhaust (internal combustionengines only), some of its constituents, andcertain vehicle components contain, oremit, chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects, or other reproductive harm. Inaddition, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain, or emit, chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects, or other reproductive harm.

280

CU

STO

ME

RA

SS

ISTA

NC

E

WARRANTYINFORMATIONSee the Warranty Information Booklet,for the terms and provisions of FCA USLLC warranties applicable to thisvehicle and market.

REPORTING SAFETYDEFECTSIn The 50 United StatesAnd Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect that could cause a crashor cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying FCA US LLC.If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individualproblems between you, yourauthorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153);or go to http://www.safercar.gov ; orwrite to: Administrator, NHTSA,1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,West Building, Washington, D.C.20590. You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle hasa safety defect, you should contactthe Customer Service Departmentimmediately. Canadian customerswho wish to report a safety defectto the Canadian government shouldcontact Transport Canada, MotorVehicle Defect Investigations andRecalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go tohttp://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ .

281

PUBLICATIONORDER FORMSTo order the following manuals, youmay use either the website or thephone numbers listed below. Visa,Mastercard, American Express, andDiscover orders are accepted.Service ManualsThese comprehensive Service Manualsprovide the information that studentsand professional technicians need indiagnosing/troubleshooting, problemsolving, maintaining, servicing, andrepairing FCA US LLC vehicles. Acomplete working knowledge of thevehicle, system, and/or components iswritten in straightforward language withillustrations, diagrams, and charts.Diagnostic Procedure ManualsDiagnostic Procedure Manuals are filledwith diagrams, charts and detailedillustrations. These practical manualsmake it easy for students andtechnicians to find and fix problems oncomputer-controlled vehicle systemsand features. They show exactly how tofind and correct problems the first time,using step-by-step troubleshooting anddrivability procedures, provendiagnostic tests, and a complete list ofall tools and equipment.

Owner's ManualsThese Owner's Manuals have beenprepared with the assistance of serviceand engineering specialists to acquaintyou with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.Included are starting, operating,emergency and maintenanceprocedures as well as specifications,capabilities and safety tips.Call toll free at:

1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

1-800-387-1143 (Canada)OrVisit us on the Worldwide Web at:

www.techauthority.com

282

CU

STO

ME

RA

SS

ISTA

NC

E

INDEXAbout Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . .149ABS system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) . . . . . .154Adaptive Front Lighting System

(AFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173Advanced Keyless Entry System

Key Left In Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . .21Key left In Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .21Locking Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Request Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .21Unlocking Doors . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130,134Advance Front Air Bag . . . .130,134Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . .146Event Data Recorder(EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144,221Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . .146Maintaining Your Air BagSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .144Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .244Alarm

Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . .24,25Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . .24,25Aluminium wheel maintenance . . . .257Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . .36Automatic Headlights. . . . . . . . . . .40

Automatic Temperature Control(ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .152Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . .63

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . .241Battery (maintenance). . . . . . . . . .233Battery charging procedure . . . . . .234Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . .234Blind Spot Monitoring. . . . . . . . . .114Body and underbody warranty . . . .254Body lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . .234Bodywork (care and maintenance). .254Boot, Convertible Top Lowering . . . .70Boot, Convertible Top Precautions . .73Boot, Convertible Top Raising . . . . .71Brake System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149Brake/clutch fluid (level check) . . . .232Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149,269Bright-metal maintenance . . . . . . .257

Camera, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . .174Center Seat Storage Compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . .175Changing A Flat Tire . . . . .202,203,237Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . .238Check Engine Light (Malfunction

Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Checking levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . .230Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127Child Restraints

Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .127Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . .172Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Compact Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . .248Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . .280Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70Convertible top maintenance . . . . .258Cooling

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . .50Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . .279

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . .144Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . .40Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . .109Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . .219,221Driver's Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . .33Driving in flooded area . . . . . . . . .180Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

Electric power steering . . . . . . . . . .74Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . .37

Electronic Brake Control SystemTraction Control System . . . . . .112

Electronic Speed Control (CruiseControl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Emergency fuel filler door release . .175Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16Emergency, In Case Of . . . . . . . . .207

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . .183Jacking . . . . . . . . . .202,203,237Jump Starting . . . . . . . . .216,217Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . .218Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219,221

Emission control system . . . . . . . . .74Emission Control System

Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . .174Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . .218Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . .218Jump Starting . . . . . . . . .216,217Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . .218Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20,217

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . .230Engine coolant (level check) . . . . . .231Engine oil (level check) . . . . . . . . .231Environment protection systems . . . .74Essential information . . . . . . . . . . . .3Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . .144

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . .174Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Flashers

Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . .183Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . .218Fluid And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . .275Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . .274Fog Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Follow Me Home . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Front lights (light bulbs) . . . . . . . . .186Front Wipers

Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . .42Fuel

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . .173Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

Fuel Consumption Display. . . . . . . .85Fuel Economy Monitor . . . . . . . . . .85Fuel filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174Fuel filler door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174Fuse block (engine compartment) . .196Fuse block (interior) . . . . . . . . . . .200Fuses (interior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Fuses (underhood). . . . . . . . . . . .195

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . .172Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . .172Gear selector positions . . . . . . . . .153GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .183Hazardous driving . . . . . . . . . . . .177Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Headlights

Adjusting The Headlight Abroad . .42High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Heavy-duty use of the vehicle(scheduled servicing) . . . . . . . .224

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . .58Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . .3

Identification Data . . . . . . . . . . . .264Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . .36Instrument Cluster Display

Information Display . . . . . . . .76,77Instrument Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . .11Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Interiors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260Internal Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Jack Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202Jack Operation . . . . . . . .202,203,237

IND

EX

Jump Starting. . . . . . . . . . . .216,217

Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . .14Programming Additional KeyFobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . .41Lane Change Assist. . . . . . . . . . . .41Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . .121,124Leaving Home Light System . . . . . .42Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246Lights

Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . .40Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . .183Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .175Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

LocksPower Door . . . . . . . . . . . .26,31

Maintaining the finish . . . . . . . . . .255Maintenance Monitor . . . . . . . . . . .82Maintenance procedures. . . . . . . .234Malfunction Indicator Light (Check

Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Manual Climate Control System . . . .48Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . .151Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .282Methanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . .36Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . .37Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . .37Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . .121Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . .109Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . .109Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . .35,36Overhead light (bulb replacement) . .193Overheating, Engine. . . . . . . . . . .218Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181Owner's Manual

(Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .282

Paint damage touch-up . . . . . . . .257Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277Periodic checks (scheduled

servicing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .105

Personalization Features . . . . . . . .105Placard, Tire And Loading

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241Plastic part maintenance . . . . . . . .259Power

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .26,31Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . .123Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126Protection from atmospheric

agents (bodywork) . . . . . . . . . .254

Radar Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245Radio Frequency

General Information . . . . . . . .20,23Radio transmitter and mobile

phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166Rear lights (light bulbs) . . . . . . . . .186Rear Park Assist System. . . . . . . .161Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10Rearview Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Recommended Tire Inflation

Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . .144Recreational towing . . . . . . . . . . .177Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . .172

Refueling procedure. . . . . . . . . . .174Refueling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . .172Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . .126Replacement Tires. . . . . . . . . . . .246Replacing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . .183Replacing exterior light bulbs . . . . .186Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Replacing interior light bulbs . . . . .193Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . .281Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . .281Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . .237safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Saving fuel and protection of the

environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177Scheduled servicing. . . . . . . . . . .223Seat Belt

Energy Management Feature . . .126Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . .121,124Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .123Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .125Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . .126Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . .126

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .126Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . .127Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .123Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . .126Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . .33Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Seats and fabric parts (cleaning) . . .260Security Alarm

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .24,25Sentry Key

Key Programming . . . . . . . . . .24Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .279Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . .280Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . .282Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . .155Shift position indication . . . . . . . . .153Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . .121,124Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . .202,248,249Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20,217

Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . .218Starting And Operating . . . . . . .20,217Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . .20,217

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .148Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271

Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60Storing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .253Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Supplemental Restraint System -

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130,134Suspensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . .35Tire And Loading Information

Placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . .237Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244,248,252

Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . .246Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .244Changing . . . . . . . . .202,203,237Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . .248Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . .207General Information . . . . . .244,248High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

IND

EX

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . .244Jacking . . . . . . . . . .202,203,237Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .246Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .241Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . .252Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .246Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237,244Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247Spare Tire . . . . . . . . .202,248,249Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . .246

To Open Deck Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . .66To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Towing

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .219,221Towing Eyes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Towing trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268Tread Wear Indicators. . . . . . . . . .246Trunk Lid

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Trunk light (bulb replacement) . . . . .193Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Undercoating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . .252

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . .175,241Vehicle modifications/alterations . . . . .4Vent Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . .183Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . .281

Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . .42,44Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . .42Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . .249Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . . . . .249Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Window and headlight washer fluid

(level check) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233Window interiors (cleaning) . . . . . .261Windows

Driver/Passenger WindowControls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . .56Window Lockout . . . . . . . . . . .57

Windshield wiper blades(replacing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .42Windstop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . .219,221

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTINGEQUIPMENTSpecial design considerations are incorporated into thisvehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radiofrequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephoneequipment must be installed properly by trained person-nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directlyto the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.The negative power connection should be made to bodysheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on theroof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be usedin mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets mayaffect the accuracy or operation of the compass onvehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical androuted away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Useonly fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio toensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater thannormal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-ence between the communications equipment and thevehicle’s electronic systems.

O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

2 0 1 7

20

17

12

4 S

PID

ER

124 SPIDERFourth Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA GroupMarketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.

17BAFIA-126-AD